bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bizhubpro1050-1pdf 1/842

Operator Manual

Copier

• POD Administrator

• Security

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


X-2 bizhub PRO 1050

2.4 Making User Authentication ...........................................................2-27

3 Paper and Original Information

3.1 Paper Information ..............................................................................3-3

3.1.1 Paper Weight ..................................................................................3-3

3.1.2 Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity ..................................................................3-5

3.1.3 Paper Size .......................................................................................3-7

3.1.4 To Store Copy Paper ......................................................................3-8

3.2 Original Information ..........................................................................3-9

3.2.1 Using Original Glass .......................................................................3-9

3.2.2 ADF Originals ................................................................................3-11

4 Supplies & Handling

4.1 Loading Paper ....................................................................................4-3

4.1.1 Loading Paper in Tray .....................................................................4-4

4.1.2 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray ......................................................4-7

4.2 Adding Toner .....................................................................................4-9

4.3 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-503 Finisher ................4-12

4.4 Empty Trash Basket of FD-501 Folding Unit .................................4-154.5 Removing Finished Sets from LS-501/502

Large Capacity Stacker ..................................................................4-17

5 Before Making Copies

5.1 Copy Screen .......................................................................................5-3

5.2 Features of the bizhub PRO 1050 ....................................................5-5

5.3 How to Make a Basic Copy ..............................................................5-9

5.4 Positioning Originals .......................................................................5-13

5.4.1 Positioning Originals in ADF .........................................................5-13

5.4.2 Positioning Original on Original Glass ..........................................5-16

5.5 Setting Print Quantity ......................................................................5-17

5.5.1 To Set Print Quantity .....................................................................5-17

5.5.2 To Change Print Quantity .............................................................5-18

5.6 Setting Job During Warm-up ..........................................................5-19

5.7 To Stop Scanning/Printing .............................................................5-22

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


bizhub PRO 1050 X-3

6 Basic Job Settings

6.1 Copy Conditions Incompatible with Basic Settings ...................... 6-3

6.2 Original Setting ................................................................................. 6-7

6.2.1 Specifying Original Direction .......................................................... 6-7

6.2.2 Selecting Binding Direction of Originals ........................................ 6-9

6.2.3 Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) ............................ 6-11

6.2.4 Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded) ....................................... 6-13

6.2.5 Feeding Single Original from ADF (Single Feed) .......................... 6-15

6.2.6 Copying Non-Standard Size Originals(Custom Size / Tab Paper) ........................................................... 6-18

6.3 Memory Scan Mode ....................................................................... 6-20

6.4 Special Image .................................................................................. 6-22

6.4.1 Selecting Exposure Level and Adjusting Background Whiteness 6-22

6.4.2 Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo Enhance) . 6-26

6.5 Zoom ................................................................................................ 6-28

6.5.1 To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode ......................................... 6-28

6.5.2 To Change Magnification Ratio .................................................... 6-29

6.6 Copy Mode ...................................................................................... 6-33

6.6.1 Making Double-Sided Copies Using ADF .................................... 6-33

6.7 Making Double-Sided Copies Using Original Glass .................... 6-36

6.7.1 Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals ......... 6-40

6.8 Paper Tray Setting .......................................................................... 6-42

6.8.1 To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS) ................................... 6-43

6.8.2 To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS) .......................................... 6-45

6.8.3 Rotation ........................................................................................ 6-46

6.8.4 Using Paper Not Specified for Any Tray (Paper Presetting) ........ 6-48

6.9 Reserve Job Setting ....................................................................... 6-58

7 Job Management

7.1 Overview of Job List Screen ............................................................ 7-3

7.2 Job Operation on Job List Screen .................................................. 7-4

7.2.1 To Check/Control Reserved Jobs .................................................. 7-4

7.2.2 To Display Output History .............................................................. 7-6

7.2.3 To Display Send History ................................................................. 7-7

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


X-4 bizhub PRO 1050

7.2.4 To Check Incomplete Jobs .............................................................7-8

7.2.5 To Check/Operate Suspended Jobs ..............................................7-9

7.2.6 To Check/Control Spool Jobs ......................................................7-11

8 Applications8.1 Copy Conditions Incompatible with Applications ..........................8-3

8.2 To Use Application Function ............................................................8-8

8.3 Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet Insertion) .............................8-10

8.4 Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) ........................8-17

8.5 Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) ...............8-20

8.6 Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) ..................8-23

8.7 Copying onto Transparent Films (OHP Interleave) .......................8-26

8.8 Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) ........................8-29

8.9 Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Book Copy) .........8-33

8.10 Programming Different Settings for anOutput Job (Program Job) ..............................................................8-38

8.11 Erasing Outside of the Original (No Image Area Erase) ...............8-41

8.12 Reversing Color in Black and White Image(Neg. Pos. Reverse) .........................................................................8-44

8.13 Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode) .....8-46

8.14 Repeat Automatically or Select Repeat Times(Repeat: Auto/ Repeat Mode) .........................................................8-49

8.15 Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders(Frame/Fold Erase) ..........................................................................8-53

8.16 Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (Image Centring) ...8-57

8.17 Printing Images Fully to the Edges (All-Image Area) ...................8-59

8.18 Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) ...........................8-608.19 Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) ......8-63

8.20 Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) ..............8-66

8.21 Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) .....................................8-74

8.22 Overlay an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) .8-77

8.23 Store Image in HDD / Overlay Stored Image (Overlay Memory) .8-80

9 Setting Output Methods

9.1 Copy Conditions Incompatible with Output Modes .......................9-3

9.2 Selecting an Output Tray ..................................................................9-7

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


X-6 bizhub PRO 1050

13 Adjustment

13.1 Machine Adjustment Outlines ........................................................13-3

13.2 01 Magnification Adjustment ..........................................................13-4

13.2.1 01 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1> ................................13-4

13.3 02 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2> ................................13-7

13.4 03 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1> ...................................13-9

13.5 04 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2> .................................13-11

13.6 02 Timing Adjustment ...................................................................13-13

13.6.1 01 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1> .........................13-13

13.6.2 02 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2> .........................13-16

13.6.3 03 Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment ......................................13-18

13.6.4 04 ADF Restart Timing Adjustment ............................................13-20

13.7 03 Centring Adjustment ................................................................13-22

13.7.1 01 Printer Centring Adjustment ..................................................13-22

13.8 Finisher Adjustment ......................................................................13-24

13.9 01 Stapler Position Adjustment ....................................................13-25

13.9.1 01 Stapling Centre Position Adjustment .....................................13-25

13.9.2 02 Paper Width Adjustment ........................................................13-27

13.10 02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adjustment ............................................13-30


13.10.2 02 Hole-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment ..............................13-32

13.11 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adjustment ................................................13-35

13.11.1 01 Folding Position Adjustment ..................................................13-35

13.11.2 02 Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment ........................................13-38

13.11.3 03 Letter Fold-out Position Adjustment ......................................13-41

13.11.4 04 Double Parallel Position Adjustment ......................................13-44

13.11.5 05 Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...................................................13-47

13.11.6 06 Gate Position Adjustment ......................................................13-50

13.12 04 Stacker Adjustment ..................................................................13-53


13.12.2 02 Paper Length Adjustment ......................................................13-55

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


bizhub PRO 1050 X-7

14 Controller Setting

14.1 Function Overview .......................................................................... 14-3

14.2 01 Report Type ................................................................................ 14-7

14.3 02 Printer Setting ............................................................................ 14-9

14.4 03 Select Printer Setting .............................................................. 14-16

14.5 04 Spool ......................................................................................... 14-18

14.6 05 Interface Setting ...................................................................... 14-19

15 Utility Screen Settings

15.1 Utility Screen Setting Outlines ...................................................... 15-3

16 User Setting16.1 01 System Setting ........................................................................... 16-3

16.1.1 01 Language Setting .................................................................... 16-3

16.1.2 02 Buzzer Setting ......................................................................... 16-4

16.1.3 03 1SHOT Indication Time ........................................................... 16-8

16.1.4 04 Default Screen Setting ............................................................ 16-9

16.1.5 05 Auto Reset Setting ................................................................ 16-10

16.1.6 06 Key Response Time .............................................................. 16-11

16.1.7 07 Change User Password ........................................................ 16-12

16.2 02 Function Setting ....................................................................... 16-14

16.2.1 01 Feed Tray Setting .................................................................. 16-14

16.2.2 02 ATS Permit ............................................................................ 16-16

16.2.3 03 Auto Paper Type ................................................................... 16-18

16.2.4 02 Each Function Setting ........................................................... 16-20

16.2.5 03 Density Setting ...................................................................... 16-21

16.2.6 03 Photo Mode Density Setting ................................................. 16-25

16.2.7 04 Image Density Selection ....................................................... 16-27

16.2.8 04 Preset Zoom .......................................................................... 16-29

16.3 03 Copy Setting ............................................................................. 16-30

16.3.1 01 Reset Setting ......................................................................... 16-30

16.3.2 02 Each Function Setting ........................................................... 16-37

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


X-8 bizhub PRO 1050

16.4 04 Scanner Setting ........................................................................16-40

16.4.1 01 Default Address Setting .........................................................16-40

16.4.2 02 Each Function Setting ............................................................16-42

16.5 05 Touch Screen Adjustment .......................................................16-44

17 Machine Manager Setting

17.1 Machine Manager Setting Outlines ...............................................17-3

17.2 01 System Setting ............................................................................17-6

17.2.1 01 Power Save Setting .................................................................17-6

17.2.2 02 Time and Date Setting .............................................................17-8

17.2.3 03 Weekly Timer Setting .............................................................17-10

17.2.4 04 Management List Print ...........................................................17-22

17.2.5 05 Operation Prohibit Set ...........................................................17-26

17.2.6 06 Expert Adjustment .................................................................17-29

17.2.7 07 Size Setting ............................................................................17-35

17.3 02 Manager/Machine Register .....................................................17-36

17.3.1 01 Machine Manager Register ....................................................17-36

17.4 03 Use Auth./Volume Track ..........................................................17-38

17.4.1 01 Authentication Method ..........................................................17-38

17.4.2 02 Volume Track .........................................................................17-43

17.4.3 03 User Authentication Set .........................................................17-48

17.4.4 04 Non register/Output Set .........................................................17-54

17.5 04 Network Setting ........................................................................17-55

17.5.1 01 Machine NIC Setting ..............................................................17-55

17.5.2 02 Controller NIC Setting ............................................................17-57

17.6 05 Copy/Printer Setting ...............................................................17-111

17.6.1 01 JOB Offset Operating ..........................................................17-111

17.6.2 02 Continuation Print(Print) .......................................................17-112

17.6.3 03 Page No. Position (Booklet) .................................................17-113

17.6.4 04 Fixing Prerotation Set ..........................................................17-114

17.6.5 05 Image Auto Rotation ............................................................17-116

17.6.6 06 Interruption Suspend ...........................................................17-117

17.6.7 07 Copy Reserve Operation .....................................................17-118

17.6.8 08 Scan Stop (pull out tray) ......................................................17-120

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


bizhub PRO 1050 X-9

17.6.9 09 Continuation Print (Copy) .................................................... 17-121

17.6.10 10 Original Glass SDF .............................................................. 17-122

17.6.11 11 SDF Auto Setting ................................................................ 17-123

17.7 06 System Connection ............................................................... 17-124

17.7.1 01 User Call .............................................................................. 17-124

17.8 07 Security Setting ...................................................................... 17-125

17.8.1 01 Machine Manager Password .............................................. 17-125

17.8.2 02 HDD Management Setting .................................................. 17-127

17.8.3 03 Security Strengthen mode .................................................. 17-135

17.9 08 Scanner Address Register .................................................... 17-137

17.9.1 01 Send Address Edit/Delete ................................................... 17-137

18 Browser Control Setting

18.1 About PageScope Web Connection ............................................. 18-3

18.1.1 Web Browser Settings ................................................................. 18-4

18.2 Access ............................................................................................. 18-5

18.3 Screen Configuration ..................................................................... 18-6

18.3.1 Logging in Using Administrator Mode ......................................... 18-8

18.4 Administrator Mode ...................................................................... 18-10

18.5 Administrator Mode – System Tab .............................................. 18-10

18.5.1 Administrator Password ............................................................. 18-10

18.5.2 Device Information ..................................................................... 18-11

18.5.3 ROM Version .............................................................................. 18-12

18.5.4 Online Assistance ....................................................................... 18-12

18.5.5 Import/Export ............................................................................. 18-14

18.5.6 Maintenance ............................................................................... 18-15

18.5.7 Alert Mail .................................................................................... 18-17

18.6 Administrator Mode – Print Tab .................................................. 18-18

18.6.1 Interface ..................................................................................... 18-18

18.6.2 Port Settings .............................................................................. 18-19

18.6.3 Default Settings .......................................................................... 18-20

18.6.4 Administrator Mode – Scan Tab ................................................ 18-24

18.6.5 Subject Registration ................................................................... 18-24

18.6.6 Body Registration ...................................................................... 18-27

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


X-10 bizhub PRO 1050

18.7 Administrator Mode – Network Tab .............................................18-30

18.7.1 TCP/IP .........................................................................................18-30

18.7.2 NetWare ......................................................................................18-32

18.7.3 IPP ..............................................................................................18-34

18.7.4 FTP ..............................................................................................18-35

18.7.5 SNMP ..........................................................................................18-37

18.7.6 SMB ............................................................................................18-38

18.7.7 Apple Talk ...................................................................................18-40

18.7.8 E-Mail ..........................................................................................18-41

18.7.9 SSL/TLS ......................................................................................18-43

18.7.10 Authentication .............................................................................18-58

19 Security

19.1 Security Functions ...........................................................................19-0

19.1.1 Environments in which Security Strengthen modeis recommended ...........................................................................19-1

19.1.2 Creating a secure environment .....................................................19-1

19.2 Security Strengthen Mode ..............................................................19-2

19.2.1 Description of Security Strengthen mode .....................................19-219.2.2 Data protected by Security Strengthen mode ..............................19-3

19.2.3 Data that is not protected in Security Strengthen mode ..............19-3

19.3 Protect and Delete Data After Use ................................................19-4

19.4 User Authentication in Security Strengthen Mode .......................19-5

19.4.1 To register a user ..........................................................................19-6

19.4.2 To change a user ........................................................................19-11

19.4.3 To delete a user ..........................................................................19-1619.4.4 To change password by user .....................................................19-19

19.5 HDD Store Function in Security Strengthen Mode .....................19-22

19.5.1 Access to the data in a Box ........................................................19-22

19.5.2 Save/Output scanned data .........................................................19-26

19.5.3 Delete data in a Box ....................................................................19-31

19.5.4 Output data in the Confidential Box ...........................................19-35

19.6 Machine Manager Security Functions .........................................19-3919.6.1 Turn Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF ...................................19-39

19.6.2 HDD lock password ....................................................................19-43

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



23 Appendix

23.1 How to Input Characters ................................................................23-3

23.1.1 About keys on the character input screen ....................................23-3

23.1.2 About character input ...................................................................23-4

23.2 Setting Data for Import/Export .......................................................23-5

23.3 Configuration Setting ....................................................................23-10

23.4 Font List ..........................................................................................23-14

23.5 PCL Font List .................................................................................23-25

23.6 Glossary ..........................................................................................23-28

23.7 Index ...............................................................................................23-31

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


bizhub PRO 1050 X-13

ENERGY STAR® Program

The ENERGY STAR Program has been established to encourage the wide-spread and voluntary use of energy-efficient technologies that reduce energyconsumption and prevent pollution. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have

determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energyefficiency, based on the following features.

- Auto Low Power

This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fix-ing unit. In the standard setting, Auto Low Power operates automaticallywhen 15 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the

copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time.The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 5 minutes,

10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 min-

utes, or 240 minutes.

- Automatic Shut-Off

This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning thepower supply OFF, thereby reducing energy consumption to 105 W orless. In the standard setting, Automatic Shut-Off follows Auto Low Pow-

er, operating automatically when 90 minutes have elapsed after comple-tion of the last copy, with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state

during that time.The time period for the Automatic Shut-Off function can be set for 30

minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes or 240 minutes.- Automatic Duplex Copying

To reduce paper consumption, use this function to make double-sided(duplex) copies, automatically.

We recommend that you utilize the Auto Low Power function, the AutomaticShut-Off function, and the Automatic Duplex Copying function.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



Acknowledgements

bizhub PRO is a trademark of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLO-GIES, Inc.

Copyright © 2004 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, Inc.

Exemption

- No part of this manual may be used or duplicated without permission.

- Manufacturer and Sales Company will have no liability for any influences

caused by using the printing system and this Operator Manual.

- The information written in this Operator Manual is subject to change with-out prior notice.

2

NoteTo operate safely, be sure to read the Safety Information before using the

machine. For details, refer to “Safety Information” on page 1-3 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


1Safety Information

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Safety Information 1

bizhub PRO 1050 1-5

CAUTION

• The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible. Oth-

erwise you can not pull out the power plug when an emergency oc-curs.

Power plug

WARNING

• Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand, as anelectrical shock could result.

• Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failure to dothis could result in a fire or electrical shock.

CAUTION

• Do not tug the power cord when unplugging. Pulling on the powercord could damage the cord, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

• Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time a yearand clean the area between the plug terminals. Dust that accumu-lates between the plug terminals may cause a fire.

Grounding

WARNING

• Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is equipped witha grounding terminal.

Power source

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


1 Safety Information

1-6 bizhub PRO 1050

Installation

WARNING

• Do not place a flower vase or other con-

tainer that contains water, or metalclips or other small metallic objects onthis product. Spilled water or metallicobjects dropped inside the productcould result in a fire, electrical shock, orbreakdown.Should a piece of metal, water, or anyother similar foreign matter get inside the product, immediately turnOFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power out-let, and then call your authorized service representative.

CAUTION

• After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If the unitmoves or falls, it may cause personal injury.

• Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site exposed to sootor steam, near a kitchen table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electricalshock, or breakdown could result.

• Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, or in a lo-cation subject to a lot of vibration and shock. It could drop or fall,causing personal injury or mechanical breakdown.

• Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this product. Heatcould accumulate inside the product, resulting in a fire or malfunc-tion.

• Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases near this product, asa fire could result.

Ventilation

CAUTION

• Always use this product in a well ventilated location. Operating theproduct in a poorly ventilated room for an extended period of timecould injure your health. Ventilate the room at regular intervals.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



1-8 bizhub PRO 1050

Before successive holidays

CAUTION

• Unplug the product when you will not use the product for long pe-

riods of time.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



1-10 bizhub PRO 1050

For Finland, Sweden Users

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITEKLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

6 VAROITUS!% Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tav-

alla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymät-

tömälle lasersäteilylle.

% Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin suurin teho on 15 mW ja aallon-pituus on 770 - 800 nm.

7 VARNING!% Om apparaten används på annat sätt än I denna bruksanvisning spe-

cificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som

överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.

% Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är15 mW och våglängden är 770 - 800 nm.

Rear sideof main body

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 1-11

1.2.2 Ozone Release

During print operation, a small quantity of ozone is released. This amount is

not large enough to harm anyone adversely. However, be sure the roomwhere the machine is being used has adequate ventilation, especially if youare printing a high volume of materials, or if the machine is being used con-

tinuously over a long period.

1.2.3 Electromagnetic Interference

This product must be used with a shielded network cable and shielded USB

interface cable.

The use of non-shield cables is likely to result in interference with radio com-munications and is prohibited under CISPR 22 and local rules.

1.2.4 For European UsersThis product complies with the following EU directives:

89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC

This declaration is valid for the areas of the European Union (EU) or EFTA on-ly.

This device must be used with a shielded network cable and shielded USB

interface cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interfer-ence with radio communications and is prohibited under 89/336/EEC rules.

1.2.5 For German Users

Maschinenlärminformations -Verordnung - 3. GSGV, 18.01.1991:

Der arbeitsplatzbezogene Immisionswert betraegt 70 dB(A) oder wenigernach ISO 7779.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




1.3 Caution Labels and Indicators

The caution labels and indicators are attached to the machine areas, as

shown below, where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid anydangerous situations or serious injury.

HIGH VOLTAGE

ATTENTION CUIDADOPRECAUCIONCAUTIONThis internal area is veryhot. To avoid gettingburned, DO NOT TOUCH.

Alta temperatura. NÃOTOQUE nesta áreainterior, pois há risco dequeimadura.

Cette zone interne esttrès chaude. Pour éviterde se brûler, NE PAS LATOUCHER.

Esta zona interior estámuy caliente. Para noquemarse NO TOCAR.

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

The fixing unit isvery hot.To avoid gettingburned DO NOTTOUCH.

DO NOT put yourhand between the

main body anddeveloping fixingunit; otherwiseyou may beinjured.

DO NOT put yourhand betweenthe main body

and developingfixing unit;otherwise youmay be injured.

CAUTION

This product employs a ClassIIIb Laser Diode that emits aninvisible laser beam. The covershould not be opened underany circumstances.

CAUTION

This area generates high voltage. Iftouched, electrical shock may occure.DO NOT TOUCH.

DO NOT INSERT your fingerinto the two RADF hingeportions; otherwise you maybe injured.

(Right side of the fixing unit)

(Inside of the fixing unit)

(Top surface of the fixing unit)

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Unit: mmUnit: mm

Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + LS-501 + LS-502

Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + FD-501 + FS-503

Main body + DF-603 + PF-701 + LS-501(x2) + FS-503

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




!Details

The whole machine may weigh approx. 750 kg at maximum, depending

on the combination of options. Be sure to choose a level and solid floor

for the installation place.

2

Reminder

Finisher tray of FS-503 Finisher gradually goes down while printed mate-

rials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of

the tray on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause

damage to the finisher.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


2Preparation for Use

Copier

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


2 Preparation for Use

2-4 bizhub PRO 1050

8 Tray left side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

9 Tray 1 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 1,500 sheetsfrom A3 to A5.

10 Tray 2 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 1,500 sheetsfrom A3 to A5.

11 Front door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

12 Toner unit door opens to allow toner supply.

13 Options see descritpion for each on the following pages

14 Left side door opens together with the Front door to allow removal ofmishandled paper or when turning on/off the main powerswitch.

No. Part name Description

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Preparation for Use 2

bizhub PRO 1050 2-5

2.1.2 Internal Machine Items

7 CAUTIONThe internal fixing unit is very hot.

% To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH.


1 Total counter indicates the total number of copies and prints made.

2 Conveyance fixing unit passes the paper through the drum unit, and fuses thetoner onto the copy paper, and is to be withdrawn for re-moval of mishandled paper.

3 Lever A can be moved to withdraw the conveyance fixing unit forremoval of mishandled paper.

4 Drum unit forms the copy image.

5 Fixing unit fuses the toner onto the copy paper.

6 Main power switch used only by service representative turns machine poweron/off when pressed.

54 32

6 1

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



2-6 bizhub PRO 1050

2.1.3 Control Panel Layout


1 Sub Power Switch turns machine power on/off when pressed.

2 Keypad enters numeric values.

3 Reset restores copier to the initial settings.

4 Interrupt stops copying/printing/scanning in progress to allow asimple copying job.

5 Stop ceases the copying sequence; deletes the stored memo-ry.

6 Proof Copy outputs a single set of copies to confirm whether the cur-rent settings are selected properly.

7 Start activates copying or scanning.

8 Start LED lights in green when machine operation is available, andturns red if any operation cannot be started.

9 [C] (Clear quantity) allows resetting of print quantity.

10 Access sets the machine to allow copying/scanning/printing onlywhen the User Authentication/Volume Track password isentered.

18

1716

15

14

13 12 11 10 9 8 7

6

5

4

3

2

1

20

19

21

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



2-8 bizhub PRO 1050

2.1.4 Machine Status Screen

The Machine Status Screen displays when copying operation becomes

available after warm-up, or when any copying job has been completed.


1 COPY tab is touched to display the Copy Screen.

2 JOB LIST tab is touched to display the Job List Screen.

3 MACHINE tab is touched to display the Machine Status Screen, andblinks in red when machine trouble occurs.

4 Count/Set indicator indicates the print quantity entered from the control panelkeypad, and also indicates the print count on the left ofthe set count while printing.

5 Tray setting list displays the paper setting made for each tray, and alsodisplays the paper sizes loaded in the Post inserter. Thecurrently selected tray will be indicated in different color.

6 Job list displays the current status of the jobs to be operated onthe machine.

7 Controller key is touched to set the controller.

8 Adjustment key is touched to make adjustments of the machine and op-tional equipment.

9 Paper Set key is touched to make paper setting for each tray.

15

14

13

12

11

10

9 8 7

6

5

4

321

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 2-9

10 Maintenance & supplyindicator

lights in red when staple supply is required or when trashbasket is full.

11 Toner message displays the current status of toner supply.

12 Machine status display prompts you if any door or cover is open.

13 Scanner message displays the current status of scanning job.

14 Icon area display to indicate various machine status.

15 Message area displays messages concerning printing job.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2.1.5 FD-501 Folding Unit


1 Lower cover feed tray holds cover sheets.

2 Lower cover feed trayguide plates

hold cover sheets to fix the position.

3 Upper cover feed tray holds cover sheets.

4 Upper cover feed trayguide plates

hold cover sheets to fix the position.

5 Upper cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.

6 Folding unit door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or waste pa-per.

FD-503FD-501

6

54

3

2

1

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





1 Inlet lever opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.

2 Post inserter convey-ance lever

(behind the inlet lever) opens leftward to remove mishan-dled paper.

3 Trash basket holds waste paper punched out.

4 Upper/Lower convey-ance lever

opens rightward to remove mishandled paper.

5 Folding unit handle withdraws the unit to allow removal of mishandled paper.

6 Conveyance knob/1 can be turned counterclockwise to ease removal of mis-handled paper.

7 Outlet lever opens rightward to remove mishandled paper.

8 Upper/Lower right sidelever

opens upward to remove mishandled paper.

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

11

10

9

8

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9 Upper/Middle/Lowerknob

can be turned clockwise to ease removal of mishandledpaper.

10 Left side lever (right/ left)

opens leftward to remove mishandled paper.

11 Upper lever opens upward to remove mishandled paper.

12 Conveyance knob/2 can be turned clockwise to ease removal of mishandledcover paper.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2.1.7 LS-501/LS-502 Large Capacity Stacker


1 Secondary (Sub) tray holds sets output in Non-sort mode.

2 Top cover handle (left) opens to remove mishandled paper.

3 Top cover handle(right)

opens to remove mishandled paper.

4 Paper removal indica-tor

lights while the stacker goes down in order to allowtakeout of printed sheets.

1

2 3

4

5

6

7 8

9

10

12

13

13 1415 1110

8

1214

93

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2.1.8 Standard/Optional Equipment

FS-503 Finisher

FS-503 Finisher

FS-503 Finisher

FS-503 Finisher +

FD-501 Folding Unit

LS-501 LargeCapacity Stacker

LS-501 Large Capacity Stacker (×2)

LS-501 Large Capacity Stacker +LS-502 Large Capacity Stacker

LS-502 Large Capacity Stacker

Memory unit for

Adobe PostScript 3

Printer Controller (EM-701)

Expander Kit (PS-502)

Main Body+ PF-701 Paper Feed Unit+ DF-603 Reverse

Automatic DocumentFeeder

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2.2 Turning On/Off the Power Switch

The machine has two power switches, namely, main power switch and sub

power switch.

2.2.1 To Turn On the Power1 Turn ON the main power switch.

- The main power switch is located

inside the machine.- Open the front door and left side

door to reach it.- When the main power switch is

turned on, the Power LED on thecontrol panel will light in red.

!Details

Once the main power switch is turned on, be sure not to use it in usual

operation.

2 Turn ON the sub power switch.

- The sub power switch is located

on the right side of the controlpanel.

- When the sub power switch isturned on, the Power LED will

turn green.

3 The Wake-up Screen and Machine Status Screen with warm-up imagewill be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears in the touch panel,

the Machine Status Screen with four types of warm-up image will bedisplayed in succession for approx. 6.0 minutes.

!DetailsYou can set reserve jobs while the machine is warming up.

Touch the touch panel to change the Machine Status Screen with warm-

up image to the screen with the job list, then check that the message

“Ready to copy reserve” is displayed in the message area.

4 The Machine Status Screen with the Job list will be displayed.

The message on the Machine Status Screen will inform you that copy-ing job is now available.

!Details

Machine manager may have changed the screen to be displayed after themachine power is on, so that a user should enter the user name and

password to operate the machine. For details, refer to “Making User Au-

thentication” on page 2-27 .

If a key counter or copy card is required, follow the instruction on the

screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2.3 To Use Machine When Power Save LED Lights

If you find the Power Save LED lit on the control panel, the machine cannot

be operated due to the Power Save or Weekly Timer function.

% Press [Power Save] on the control panel.

If Power Save has been activated, the machine will become availablefor copying operation.

2

Note

Power Save function has two modes; Auto Low Power and Auto Shut-

Off. See the following description for details.

This function can also be activated manually. For details, refer to “Using

Power Save Manually” on page 2-22 .

If Weekly Timer has been activated, the Machine Status Screen will appear

with the message “Timer interrupt mode / Enter password” displayed in themessage area, and the machine operation will be available temporarily by the

Timer Interrupt function. For details, refer to “When Weekly Timer Is Activat-ed” on page 2-24.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




!Details

Be sure to press [Power Save] for one second or longer, otherwise the

following message will be displayed and the Shut-Off (Low Power) mode

will not be activated.

2 Power Save will be activated.

The [Power Save] LED will be lit and the touch panel will be turned off.

Press POWER SAVER more than one second,then release it for shut off mode

Press POWER SAVER continuously morethan one second for low power mode

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2.3.4 When Weekly Timer Is Activated

The Weekly Timer function turns a copier on and off at the time specified by

the machine manager.

2Note

For details, refer to “Lists of the function settings” on page 15-5 .

When a machine is in OFF condition under control of Weekly Timer, the[Power Save] LED is lit and machine operation is unavailable.

However, the following procedure temporarily enables the machine opera-tion. (Timer Interrupt)

1 Press [Power Save] on the control panel.

- The Machine Status Screen will be displayed along with the mes-sage shown below.

!Details

The machine power will be turned off automatically after 5 minutes from

this state if a password is not entered.

If the above message is displayed, proceed to step 3.

Timer interrupt modePlease input password

Input copy time0 hour(s) 05 minute(s)

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Enter the Timer Interrupt password, then press [Start].

- Enter a 4-digit Timer Interrupt password using the control panelkeypad.

- Press [Start].

2

Note

The Timer Interrupt password is to be specified in the machine manager

setting. Ask your machine manager for the password.

!Details

If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit

password.

3 Set the hour for the interrupt use, then press [Start].

- Enter a 1-digit hour (ex. 3 for 3 hours) using the control panel key-

pad. (0 ~ 9)

- Press [Start].

4 Set the minute for the interrupt use, then press [Start].

- Enter a 2-digit minute (ex. 07 for 7 minutes) using the control panelkeypad. (00 ~ 59)

- Press [Start].

!Details

Entering a number smaller than 5 will set the minute at 5. A number larger

than 60 is unavailable.

Copying is available until the set time is up.

Timer interrupt mode

Please input password ####

Input copy time3 hour(s) 05 minute(s)

Input copy time

3 hour(s) 07 minute(s)

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2.4 Making User Authentication

This machine can prohibit its operation until the user name, user password,

section name, and/or section password specified by the machine managerare verified.

Copy quantity limit for each section can also be set.When the machine is turned on, one of the following User Authentication

Screen will be displayed according to the authentication setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Copying will be available by the following procedure.

1 Enter the user name, user password, section name, and/or sectionpassword, as required.

- Touch the desired item key to display the keypad screen.- Enter your user name (max. 64 characters), user password (max. 64

characters), section name (max. 8 characters) and/or 8-digit sec-tion password.

2 Touch [OK].

Check that the screen message changes to “Ready for copy.”

!DetailsIf the message “Copy limit reached” is displayed and machine operation

remains unavailable, contact your machine manager.

3 Start machine operation.

Normal copying/printing/scanning job is available on the machine.

!Details

If the message “Copy limit reached” is displayed and machine operationbecomes unavailable, contact your machine manager.

4 When machine operation is completed, press [Access].

The initial state will be restored, with the User Authentication Screen

displayed on the touch panel.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



3-4 bizhub PRO 1050

The paper weight specified for each tray can be changed for temporary

use. For details, refer to “Using Paper Not Specified for Any Tray (Paper

Presetting)” on page 6-48 .

When using Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Double parallel, or Gate mode,

the finished set will be delivered only to the secondary (sub) tray on theleft side of the Folding unit.

2

Reminder

Be sure to use paper only of the weight specified for the tray; otherwise

copy quality may be deteriorated or machine trouble may occur.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



3-6 bizhub PRO 1050

Using Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Double parallel, or Gate mode, the

finished set will be delivered only to the secondary (sub) tray on the left

side of the Folding unit.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper and Original Information 3

bizhub PRO 1050 3-7

3.1.3 Paper Size

Paper Trays Available Sizes

Tray 1 to 5 • STD size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12"x18", 11"x17",

8.5"x14", 8.5"x11" Available to detect 5.5”x8.5” instead of A5, 8.5"x11"R

instead of A4R, 8K instead of B4, 16K instead of B5,

16KR instead of B5R

• Non STD size:Max. 324mm x 460mm ~ Min. A5 or 5.5"x8.5"

• Wide size: A3W, B4W, A4W, A4RW, B5W, B5RW, A5W,12"x18"W, 11"x17"W, 8.5"x11"W, 8.5"x11"RW,5.5"x8.5"W

• STD tab paper: A3T, B4T, A4T, A4RT, B5T, B5RT, 11"x17"T,8.5"x11"T, 8.5"x11"RT

• Non STD tab paper:Max. 324mm x 460mm ~ Min. A5 or 5.5"x8.5"

Equipment Available Sizes

ADU • STD size: A3 to A5 (Portrait orientation only)• Non STD size:

Max. 324mm x 460mm ~ Min. 100mm x 140mm• Wide size: A3W to A5W (Portrait orientation only)• Tab paper: Unavailable

Finisher Secondary (sub)

tray

Max. 324mm x 460mm ~ Min. B6R

Primary (main)tray (normal)

• STD size: A3 to A5R• Wide sizes• STD tab paper

Primary (main)tray (Staple)

• STD size: A3 to A5• Wide sizes• STD tab paper

Folding unit Finisher primary(main) tray

• Punch: A3 to A5• Folding modes:

A3, B4, A4R, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R

Secondary (sub)tray on the leftside of Foldingunit

Max. 324mm x 460mm ~ Min. B6R

Post inserter Upper/Lowertray

• STD size: A3 to A5• Wide sizes

Large capacitystacker

Stacker STD size: A3 to A5

Secondary (sub)tray

Wide sizes:Max. 324mm x 460mm ~ Min. B6R

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 3-9

3.2 Original Information

Use the original glass or document feeder to position originals to copy.

3.2.1 Using Original Glass

Use the original glass when originals are not suitable for use with the docu-ment feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded,

stapled, torn, or in generally poor condition.

2

Note

See each description in this guide for copy conditions which cannot use

the document feeder to scan.

Unsuitable ADF Originals

Specifications for Using Original Glass

- Max. original size: 297mm x 432mm, sheet or book- Max. book weight/thickness: 6.8 kg / 30mm

- Original placement: Face down on left depth side of glass

2

Note

Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series,

AB series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by the machine manager.

For details, refer to “07 Size Setting” on page 17-35 .

Curled, creased or

Glossy or transparent

Paste-ups

Doubled, punched or

Books

Thin or thick

folded originals or cut-outs

originals, OHP film,art paper, cellophane stapled originals originals

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3.2.2 ADF Originals

Following three modes are provided when using the document feeder (ADF)

to scan originals.

- Normal mode

- Mixed Original mode- Z-Folded Original mode

- SDF mode

Specifications for each mode are described as follows.

2

Note

Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series,

AB series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by the machine manager.For details, refer to “07 Size Setting” on page 17-35 .

Normal mode

Mixed Original mode

Use Mixed Original mode to copy mixed size originals. For details, refer to“Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original)” on page 6-11.

Specifications

Detectable original size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11"x17", 8"x13", 8.5"x11"(297mm x 432mm ~ 128mm x 140mm)

Original weight 50 ~ 130 g/m 2 (no special stock)

Max. feeder capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m 2 paper)

Curling tolerance 10mm or less

Original placement Face up

Specifications

Original size Three types of size combination are determined by the ADF guidewidth.• A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5 and A5 mixed• B4, A4R, B5, B5R and A5 mixed• A4R, B5R and A5 mixed




Original placement Face up (For details, refer to p. 5-14.)

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




!Details

See below for the guide width of each combination.

Z-Folded Original mode

Use Z-Folded Original mode to scan folded originals without using the sizedetection sensor of the ADF. For details, refer to “Copying Z-Folded Origi-nals (Z-Folded)” on page 6-13.

SDF mode

Use SDF mode to copy thick originals to be fed one sheet at a time in the

document feeder. For details, “Feeding Single Original from ADF (SingleFeed)” on page 6-15.

Guidewidth

Guidewidth

Guidewidth

Specifications

Detectable original size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11"x17", 8"x13", 8.5"x11"

(297mm x 432mm ~ 128mm x 140mm)




Original placement Face up; orientation same as copy paper

Specifications

Detectable original size 297mm x 432mm ~ 128mm x 140mm

Original weight • Single-sided original 50 ~ 200 g/m2 paper • Double-sided original 50 ~ 130 g/m2

Max. feeder capacity 1 sheet at a time

Original placement Face up

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


4Supplies & Handling

Copier

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Supplies & Handling 4

bizhub PRO 1050 4-3


4.1 Loading Paper A paper indicator is shown on each tray

key of the Machine Status Screen and ofthe Copy Screen to indicate the paper levelof the tray. Six levels are provided.

When paper in a tray becomes empty, theindicator blinks on the tray key.

Follow the procedure below to supply the empty tray with copy paper.

2

Reminder

Paper type setting for each tray made on the Machine Status Screen can

be changed temporarily on the Copy Screen using the Paper Presetting

key.

Be sure to load the specified paper; otherwise mishandled paper may oc-

cur.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



4-4 bizhub PRO 1050

4.1.1 Loading Paper in Tray

1 Withdraw the tray to be supplied with paper.

!Details

Be sure that the machine is powered ON before withdrawing the tray.

Only one tray can be withdrawn at a time.

2

Reminder

Do not withdraw the tray forcibly; otherwise you may be injured.

2 Open the paper feed roller.

- Tray 1 and 2

- Tray 3, 4, and 5

3 Place paper on the tray with any curl turning up, then move the sideguide plates and front edge guide to the edge of the paper.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 4-5

- Load paper aligning it to the paper feed roller side of the tray.- Press the release knob of the front side guide plate to move the side

guide plates, and also move the rear edge guide to the edge of the

paper.

2

Reminder

Do not load above the limit level, and carefully load the paper to be seat-

ed under the paper holding lever at the air nozzle.

Be sure that the side guide plates and rear edge guide are securely

aligned to the paper; otherwise the machine cannot detect the correct

paper size, or machine trouble may occur.

4 When paper is seated properly, close the paper feed roller.

Tray 3, 4, and 5

Tray 1 and 2

Limit lever

Limit lever

Paper holding lever

Paper holding lever

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



4-6 bizhub PRO 1050

5 Push in the tray until it locks into place.

The indicator on the Machine StatusScreen or Copy Screen will change.

2

Reminder

Do not bump the tray into the main body; otherwise machine trouble may

be caused.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 4-7

4.1.2 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray

Tabbed sheets can be used if the tray paper size is specified as tabbed

sheets in the Tray Setting or Paper Presetting. Follow the procedure belowto supply the tray with tabbed sheets.

Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets.

1 Withdraw the tray.

The tray paper size should be specified as tabbed sheets.

2

Note

For details, refer to “Using Paper Not Specified for Any Tray (Paper Pre-

setting)” on page 6-48 .

2 Open the paper feed roller.

3 Place paper on the tray.

Place paper referring to the illustration shown above.

2

Reminder

Do not load above the limit level on the side guide plate.

Loaded in Tray Loaded in Tray1 or 2 3,4 or 5

3 finished sets

1st TAB

2nd TAB 3rd TAB

1st TAB

2nd TAB

3rd TAB

1st TAB

2nd TAB

3rd TAB

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



4-8 bizhub PRO 1050

4 Move the side guide plates to the edge of the paper.

- Set paper aligning it to the paper feed roller side of the tray.- Press the release lever of the front side guide plate to move the side

guide plates, and also move the rear edge guide to the edge of thepaper.

2

Reminder

Be sure that the side guide plates and rear edge guide are securely

aligned to the paper; otherwise the machine cannot detect the correct

paper size, or machine trouble may occur.

5 When paper is seated properly, close the paper feed roller.

6 Push in the tray until it locks into place.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Pull the toner unit lever forward to

withdraw the bottle holder until itstops.

3 Remove the empty toner bottle.

4 Shake the new toner bottle severaltimes to loosen toner.

5 Remove the cap from the new toner

bottle, then put it to the used one.

New Used

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6 Set the new toner bottle into the bottle holder.

!Details

Be sure to set the label of the toner bottle upward, then fit its bottom to

the hollow part of the bottle holder; otherwise toner leakage may occur

or the bottle holder may not be returned to its original position.

7 Return the bottle holder to its original

position, then close the toner unitdoor securely.

7 CAUTION% Keep the toner bottle away from children. The toner is non-toxic; how-

ever if you inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water andseek medical advice.

% Do not throw the empty toner bottle into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire,

the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




4.3 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-503 Finisher

When the staple cartridge of the Finisher is empty, the Cartridge indicator

lights in red in the option status area of the Machine Status Screen.

Follow the procedure below to set the staple roll into the staple cartridge.

1 Open the Finisher door.

2 Pull out the stapler unit slowly byholding the stapler unit handle until it

stops.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Remove the staple cartridge.

Pull down the handle of the staplecartridge to draw it downward.

4 Set the staple roll into the staple cartridge.

- Open the staple cartridge cover,then set the staple roll into the

cartridge.

- Close the cover, then remove the

lock tape pulling it in horizontaldirection.

2Reminder

Do not pull the lock tape upward, oth-

erwise the tape may rip and remain in-

side the cartridge so that the staples

cannot be used.

5 Set the staple cartridge.

- Return the staple cartridge to its

original position as shown below.- Push up and in to secure it in

place.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6 Return the stapler unit to its original

position.

7 Close the Finisher door.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




4.4 Empty Trash Basket of FD-501 Folding Unit

When the trash basket becomes full, the Punch Dust indicator lights in red in

the option status area of the Machine Status Screen.

Follow the procedure below to empty the trash basket.

1 Open the Finisher door.

2 Withdraw the trash basket.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Empty the trash basket.

4 Return the trash basket to its originalposition.

5 Close the Finisher door securely.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




4.5 Removing Finished Sets from LS-501/502 Large Ca-pacity Stacker

LS-501/502 Large Capacity Stacker can hold 5,000 output sheets (2,000sheets for B5 and A5) at maximum.

Follow the procedure below to take out paper from the stacker.

1 Press the Paper removal button.

The stacker unit will move down tothe carriage.

2 Open the large capacity stackerdoor.

!Details

Once the stacker holds a sheet of out-

put paper, the large capacity stackerdoor will be locked and cannot open till

the stacker unit goes down fully to the

carriage.

3 Withdraw the carriage by holding itshandle.

2

ReminderBe sure to withdraw the carriage

straightforward, and do not change the

direction forcibly while driving it.

The carriage is for the exclusive use of carrying paper. Do not drive it in

any other use.

Never put yourself in the large capacity stacker.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




4 Remove the sheets from the car-

riage.

The stacker unit can be removed

from the carriage.

5 Return the carriage to its original po-sition.

6 Close the large capacity stacker

door.

2Reminder

When returning the stacker unit to its

original position, fit the two projections

of the carriage to the two holes of the

stacker unit, otherwise the carriage

cannot be returned properly.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


5Before Making Copies

Copier

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Before Making Copies 5

bizhub PRO 1050 5-3


5.1 Copy ScreenThe Copy Screen is used to select the desired copy conditions when setting

a new copy job and also reserve jobs.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

1415161718

19

20

21

22


1 COPY tab is touched to display the Copy Screen.

2 Original Setting key is touched to specify the condition of originals to bescanned.

3 Special Image key is touched to specify the image quality or background ex-posure level of the originals, and also to specify the usersetdensity.

4 AE key is touched to activate AE (Automatic Exposure).

5 Density adjustment keys are used to specify the desired exposure level.

6 Zoom key is touched to select the desired magnification ratio using

preset ratios, user preset ratios, zoom mode or vertical/hor-izontal zoom mode.

7 ×1.0 key is touched to copy in 1.000 magnification ratio.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



5-4 bizhub PRO 1050

8 Auto Zoom key is touched to activate AMS (Automatic Magnification Se-lection).

9 Set Number indicator indicates the print quantity entered from the control panelkeypad.

10 Output indicator indicates the print count on the left of the set count whileprinting.

11 Application key is touched to select various application functions.

12 Paper Presetting key is touched to use different paper type from that indicatedon the tray key.

13 Tray keys display specified paper setting and amount remaining ineach tray.

14 Auto Paper Select key is touched to activate APS (Automatic Paper Selection).

15 Rotation Off key is touched to release the Rotation function.

16 Copy Mode area is used to select the copy mode (1-1, 1-2, 2-1, or 2-2).

17 Punch key is touched to use Punch mode.

18 Staple key is touched to use Staple mode

19 Output Application key is touched to specify the desired output mode.

20 Memory Scan key is touched to store scanned images innto memory.

21 Icon area displays to indicate various machine status.

22 Message area displays the machine status and procedure required at that

time.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 5-5

5.2 Features of the bizhub PRO 1050

- All-Image Area

Makes copies printed completely to the edges of the paper to avoid im-age loss.

- AE - Automatic Exposure Automatically adjusts exposure to compensate for quality of the original.

- AMS - Automatic Magnification Selection

Automatically selects an appropriate magnification ratio when paper sizeis selected manually. Automatically selected when [Auto Zoom] is

touched.

- APS - Automatic Paper Selection

Automatically selects copy paper size to match the original documents.

- Auto Low Power

Automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactiv-ity.

- Auto Reset

Automatically resets to the default settings after a specified period ofcopier inactivity.

- Auto Shut-Off

Automatically shuts off the power after a specified period of copier inac-

tivity.

- Book Copy

Copies both pages of an open book or book-size sheet separately ontotwo letter sheets in 1-1 mode or separately onto each side of one lettersheet in 1-2 mode. You can use the Book Copy mode with the Front or

Front/Back cover mode. The cover page(s) will be scanned and copiednormally before image division is performed on the other pages.

- Booklet

Creates letter R or ledger size booklets from letter size originals in 1-2 or

2-2 copy mode.

- Chapter

Starts chapter pages on the right side (front pages) of the finished docu-ment. Only duplex mode (1-2) is compatible with this feature.

- Combination

Copies a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paperto create a draft copy of a multi-page report at the same time as saving

paper.

- Copy Density

Manually selects up to 9 density levels.

- Copy Mode

Selects the desired simplex mode (1-1 or 2-1); or duplex mode (1-2 or 2-2).

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



5-6 bizhub PRO 1050

- Custom Size for Original

Identifies the special original size which the machine cannot detect, in or-der to select the optimal paper size for copying or printing.

- Density Shift

Shifts each of nine density levels in four enhance modes (Text & Photo,

Text, Photo, Low Contrast) to three levels lighter or three levels darker.- Frame/Fold Erasure

Erases border and/or fold image area using Frame (1 - 300mm), Fold (1 -

99mm), or Frame & Fold.

- Image Centring

The original image on the original glass or in the document feeder is cop-

ied and centred on a sheet.

- Image Insert

Stores pages in memory from the original glass, and inserts the pages

into a document copied from the document feeder.- Image Shift

Creates or removes a binding margin at the top, bottom, right and leftedges (shift amount from 0 ~ 250mm, in 1mm increments); reduces im-

age to prevent image loss (reduce & shift amount from 0 ~ 250mm, in1mm increments).

- Interrupt Copying

Interrupts copying-in-progress to perform an urgent copy, using any of

the copier features for the interrupt job.

- Job List Displays the Job List Screen to view the current machine status, changes

the operation order of reserve jobs, deletes the unused reserve job, ordisplays the previous job list.

- Manual Shut-off

Shuts off the machine’s power when pressing [Power Save] on the con-

trol panel.

- Memory Scan Mode

Scans documents into memory from the original glass and/or the docu-

ment feeder and inserts the pages into another document copied fromthe document feeder. If an incompatible function is selected in this mode,the latter function will not be selected, and an Error message will be dis-

played.

- Mixed Original

Copies mixed size originals from the document feeder in APS or AMSmode. APS automatically selects the paper size of each original. AMS

mode allows you to select one paper size for all originals.

- Mode Memory

Programs up to 30 jobs and recalls each job by job number, as needed. All compatible original glass functions can be programmed into ModeMemory directly after they are selected.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 5-7

- Neg. Pos. Reverse

Reverses the image from black-on-white to white-on-black or vice versa.

- No Image Area Erase

When copying from the original glass when the document cover is open,

copies only the image area and not the exposed area of glass, which

would otherwise copy as black.- OHP Interleave

Copies onto transparency film and interleave blank or copied paper for

each original copied.

- Output for Machine with FS-503 Finisher Installed

Non-Sort, Collated, Uncollated, and Staple modes using the primary

(main) tray.Collated and Uncollated modes using the secondary (sub) tray.Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Application

Screen.- Output for Machine with LS-501/502 Large Capacity Stacker In-

stalled

Non-Sort, Collated, and Uncollated modes using the stacker

Collated and Uncollated modes using the stacker secondary (sub) traySelects an output tray and output mode on the Output ApplicationScreen.

- Output for FS-503 Finisher with FD-501 Folding Unit Installed

Punch, Folding (Z-fold, Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Double parallel,

Gate, Folding), Cover sheet feedingFor details, refer to “Setting Output Methods” on page 9-3.

- Overlay

Scans an original image and overlays it on the pages of another docu-ment. For example, you may want to incorporate a page heading, graphic

design or logo into the pages of your document.

- Overlay Memory

Same as for “Overlay” except the overlay image is stored in memory.

- Paper Capacity

Total 9,000 sheets, including two 1,500-sheet trays (Tray 1 and 2) andthree 2,000 sheet trays (Tray 3, 4, and 5).

- Power Save

Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified pe-riod of copier inactivity, for optimal efficiency. Power is returned after a

brief warm up period by pressing [Power Save] on the control panel.

- Program Job

Scans documents into memory while designating different copy condi-tions for each original, then prints all the documents collectively.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



5-8 bizhub PRO 1050

- Proof Copy

To ensure correct output before running multiple copies, run a proof copyby pressing [Proof Copy] on the control panel or touching [Proof Copy]on the Check Screen.

- Repeat

Selects the horizontal image area across the page, and repeats it downthe page as many times as the repeat width setting (10 ~ 150mm) permits

in manual or auto.

- Reserve

Scans in subsequent copy jobs while the machine is busy printing or cop-ying.

- Rotation

Rotates the image before copying when the portrait/landscape orienta-tion of the original is different from the orientation of the copy paper.

- Sheet Insertion Insert up to 30 blank or copied sheets from any tray, or inserts blank orcopied front and back covers from any tray to enhance the presentationof multi-page documents.

- Stamp

Prints watermark, regular stamp, date/time, page number, and number-ing onto the output copies to enhance the presentation and usefulness of

the copies.

- Stapling

Selects the stapling position and number of staples.- Tab Paper

Copies onto tabbed sheets from tabbed originals, allowing the image onthe tab part of the original to be printed on the same part of the tabbedcopy paper.

- Text/Photo Enhance

Enhances photo image in Photo mode, regular image in Text/Photomode, text image in Text mode, lighter image in Low Contrast mode.

- Weekly Timer

Can be set according to the needs of each work environment. Turns mainbody power Off/On daily or weekly, during lunch time, on holidays, andalso enables the Timer Interrupt mode, which allows temporary use of the

machine even when the machine is in the daily, weekly, or holiday Offmode.

- Wide Size Paper

Copies onto paper slightly larger than the specified regular size.

- Z-Folded Original

This feature sets the ADF to accept Z-folded originals.

- Zoom Selects fixed ratios, four reduction, four enlargement, and three user-set

ratios. Zoom ratios can be selected from 25% ~ 400% in 1% increments.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 5-9

5.3 How to Make a Basic Copy

Follow the procedure below to make a basic copy.

!Details

The following procedure is basic and not always applicable to the oper-

ation of selected copy conditions. When using a specific function, be

sure to follow the procedure described in each section.

1 Display Copy Screen.

- Touch [COPY] tab on the Machine Status Screen to display theCopy Screen.

2 Set copy conditions as desired.

The following settings are available on the Copy Screen.

- Original Setting (See p. 6-7 )- Special Image (See p. 6-22 )- Zoom (See p. 6-28 )

- Application (See p. 8-8 )- Output Application (See p. 9-3 )- Copy Mode (See p. 6-33 )

- Paper Presetting (See p. 6-48 )

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.For details, refer to “Setting Print Quantity” on page 5-17.

4 Position originals FACE UP in the

document feeder, or FACE DOWNon the original glass.

For details, refer to “Positioning Orig-inals” on page 5-13.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5 Press [Start] on the control panel.

When the machine starts scanning originals, the current job status willbe displayed on the popup menu.

The reserve job setting is available from this popup menu. Touch [Yes]or [Close] to return to the Copy Screen. For details, refer to “Reserve

Job Setting” on page 6-58.

!Details

The screen to be displayed after machine power is turned on can be se-

lected either from the Machine Status Screen (initially selected) or the

Copy Screen. The popup screen will vary depending on this selection.

The Job List Screen is provided to change the operation order of reserve

jobs or cancel the reserve job. For details, refer to “Overview of Job ListScreen” on page 7-3 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




If [No] is touched, the Machine Status Screen will be restored.

The current job will be displayed in the job list, with the count/set quan-tity indicated at the upper right corner of the screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5.4 Positioning Originals

5.4.1 Positioning Originals in ADF

The document feeder (ADF) automatically feeds up to 100 originals directly

to the original glass area, starting with the top sheet. The ADF should only beused for unstapled, smooth, flat originals.

Positioning originals in Normal mode

1 Arrange originals in order.

2

Reminder

Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closedfully. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the se-

lected copy conditions may be altered automatically.

Be sure not to use unsuitable ADF originals.

2 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.

- Place two-sided originals withpage one FACE UP.

Up to 100 originals can be set at

a time.

2

Reminder

Do not set more than 100 originals or

over the limit line indicated on the pa-

per guides; otherwise a paper misfeed

will occur.

If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not ex- ceeding 100 sheets, then load them from the block with the first page.

3 Adjust paper guides.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





Positioning originals in Z-Folded original mode

Z-Folded original mode detects the folded original size without using the size

detection sensor of the ADF.

2Note

For details, refer to “Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded)” on

page 6-13 .

1 Arrange originals in order.

2 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.

- Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.Up to 100 originals can be set at a time.

2

Reminder

Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed

fully. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the se-

lected copy conditions may be altered automatically.

Be sure not to use unsuitable ADF originals. For details, refer to “Unsuit-

able ADF Originals” on page 3-9 .


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5.4.2 Positioning Original on Original Glass

Use the original glass when originals are not suitable for use with the docu-

ment feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded,stapled, torn, or in generally poor condition.

1 Raise the document feeder.

2 Position original FACE DOWN in the left rear corner, aligning the edge

with the left measuring guide.

The direction of the original shouldconform to the Original direction icondisplayed on the Copy Screen.

3 Gently close the document feeder toprevent the original from shifting on

the glass.

!Details

When Book Copy, AUTO mode in Re-

peat, or Image Centring is selected, the

document feeder should not be closed

while scanning. For details, refer to chapter “8 Applications” .

7 CAUTION% Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when thick

original is placed and is under pressure of ADF; otherwise the glass

may be broken and you may be injured.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5.5 Setting Print Quantity

This section describes how to set or change print quantity.

5.5.1 To Set Print Quantity

The copier is initially set to copy the original set in amounts determined bythe print quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets.

% Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.

Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5.5.2 To Change Print Quantity

Follow the procedure below to change the print quantity that has been al-

ready entered.

1 Press [C] (clear quantity).

The quantity displayed on the touch panel will return to 1.

2 Enter the correct quantity.

Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5.6 Setting Job During Warm-up

While the copier is warming up after power is turned on, select copy condi-

tions and start scanning so that the copier may start printing immediately thecopier engine is ready.

1 Turn on the main power switch and sub power switch of the machine.

2

Note

For details, refer to “Turning On/Off the Power Switch” on page 2-17 .

2 Display the Copy Screen to check that the message “Ready to copy re-

serve” is displayed in the message area.

- A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears in the touch pan-el, the Machine Status Screen with four types of warm-up image

will be displayed in succession for approx. 6.0 minutes.

- Touch [COPY] tab to change the Machine Status Screen to displaythe Copy Screen, then check that the message “Ready to copy re-serve” is displayed in the message area.

3 Set the desired copying conditions, and enter the print quantity.

2

Note

For details, refer to “Setting Print Quantity” on page 5-17 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5.7 To Stop Scanning/Printing

Follow the procedure below to stop scanning or printing.

2

Note

This procedure is effective only for the job in progress. To stop the re-

served jobs on standby, operate on the Job List Screen. For details, refer

to “Overview of Job List Screen” on page 7-3 .

1 Press [Stop] while the current job is in progress.

!Details

With the popup menu displayed right after pressing [Start], the job cannot

be canceled even if [Stop] is pressed. According to the procedure “Scan-

ning reserve job while printing” on page 5-25 touch an appropriate key

on the popup menu to clear it.

The current machine operation of the selected job will be suspended,

and the popup menu will be displayed on the Copy Screen.

2 Touch the desired key on the popup menu.

The popup menu will vary according to the job in progress.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Batch printing is in progress

% Touch [Stop Job] to cancel the job, or touch [Continue] to complete the job.

!Details

Touching [Stop Job] will delete all the scanned data.

Scanning and printing the job using Program Job

% Touch [Stop Job] to cancel the job, or touch [Continue] to complete the

job.

!Details

Touching [Stop Job] will delete all the scanned data.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Scanning reserve job while printing

Select to stop scanning, printing, or to stop both operation.

1 Start scanning the reserve job while printing.

The following popup menu will be displayed.

2 Touch [NO] to restore the Machine Status Screen.

If machine has been set to display the Copy Screen as the initial

screen, touch [MACHINE] tab to restore the Machine Status Screen.

3 Press [Stop]. Machine operation will be ceased, and the following pop-up menu will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




4 Select the job to cancel.

- Touch Scan to stop scanning the reserve job and continue printing.- Touch Print to stop printing and continue the scanning job.

- Touch Scan/Print to cancel both scanning and printing jobs.- Touch Continue to complete both jobs.

!Details

All the data scanned for stopped job will be deleted.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


6Basic Job Settings

Copier

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



6-4 bizhub PRO 1050

A p p l i c a t i o n / F i l e E d i t A p p l i c a t i o n / I m a g e E d i t

P

r

o

g

r

a

m

J

o

b

(

F

i

r

s

t

j

o

b

)

S

h

e

e

t

I

n

s

e

r

t

i

o

n

I

n

s

e

r

t

i

o

n

u

s

i

n

g

P

I

F

r

o

n

t

C

o

v

e

r

B

a

c

k

C

o

v

e

r

F

r

o

n

t

P

I

(

U

p

p

e

r

/

L

o

w

e

r

)

B

a

c

k

P

I

(

U

p

p

e

r

/

L

o

w

e

r

)

C

h

a

p

t

e

r

C

h

a

p

t

e

r

(

P

r

i

n

t

I

n

s

e

r

t

i

o

n

)

C

o

m

b

i

n

a

t

i

o

n

B

o

o

k

l

e

t

B

o

o

k

l

e

t

(

A

d

h

e

s

i

v

e

B

i

n

d

i

n

g

)

O

H

P

I

n

t

e

r

l

e

a

v

e

I

m

a

g

e

I

n

s

e

r

t

B

o

o

k

C

o

p

y

N

e

g

.

P

o

s

.

R

e

v

e

r

s

e

R

e

p

e

a

t

R

e

p

e

a

t

(

A

u

t

o

)

(

*

2

)

R

e

p

e

a

t

(

2

/

4

/

8

R

e

p

e

a

t

)

F

r

a

m

e

E

r

a

s

u

r

e

F

o

l

d

E

r

a

s

u

r

e

I

m

a

g

e

C

e

n

t

r

i

n

g

I

m

a

g

e

S

h

i

f

t

R

e

d

u

c

e

&

S

h

i

f

t

N

o

n

-

I

m

a

g

e

A

r

e

a

E

r

a

s

e

A

l

l

-

I

m

a

g

e

A

r

e

a

S

t

a

m

p

P

a

g

e

N

u

m

b

e

r

i

n

g

S

e

t

N

u

m

b

e

r

i

n

g

D

a

t

e

W

a

t

e

r

m

a

r

k

W

a

t

e

r

m

a

r

k

/

N

u

m

b

e

r

i

n

g

O

v

e

r

l

a

y

M

e

m

o

r

y

O

v

e

r

l

a

y

(

*

1

)

u u u u

u u u u

u

u u u

u u u u u u u u u u u u u u

u u u u u u

u

u

u

x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x

c x x x x u x x x

x x x x x x x x

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Basic Job Settings 6

bizhub PRO 1050 6-5

C o p y C o n d i t i o n s I n c o m p a t i b l e w i t h

B a s i c S e t t i n g s

O u t p u t A p p l i c a t i o n

C

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

(

O

f

f

s

e

t

)

U

n

c

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

C

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

(

R

o

t

a

t

i

o

n

)

U

n

c

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

(

R

o

t

a

t

i

o

n

)

1

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

U

p

p

e

r

L

e

f

t

)

1

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

U

p

p

e

r

R

i

g

h

t

)

2

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

T

o

p

)

2

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

L

e

f

t

)

2

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

R

i

g

h

t

)

Z

-

F

o

l

d

F

o

l

d

i

n

g

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

F

o

l

d

i

n

g

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

i

n

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

i

n

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

o

u

t

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

o

u

t

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

D

o

u

b

l

e

P

a

r

a

l

l

e

l

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

D

o

u

b

l

e

P

a

r

a

l

l

e

l

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

G

a

t

e

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

G

a

t

e

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

H

o

l

e

-

P

u

n

c

h

(

R

i

g

h

t

)

H

o

l

e

-

P

u

n

c

h

(

L

e

f

t

)

H

o

l

e

-

P

u

n

c

h

(

T

o

p

)

F

a

c

e

U

p

F

a

c

e

D

o

w

n

C

o

p

y

M

o

d

e

/

M

a

g

n

i

f

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

1 - 1

1 - 2 x

2 - 1

2 - 2 x

M e m o r y S c a n M o d e ( G l a s s )

M e m o r y S c a n M o d e ( A D F )

A P S

A M S

1 . 0 0 0 M a g n i f i c a t i o n

Z O O M

P r e s e t M a g n i f i c a t i o n

R o t a t i o n * 4 * 4 * 4 * 4

S

p

e

c

i

a

l

I

m

a

g

e

M a n u a l D e n s i t y

A E

P r e s e t D e n s i t y

T e x t & P h o t o ( E n h a n c e )

L o w C o n t r a s t

P h o t o ( * 5 )

T e x t

B a c k g r o u n d A d j u s t ( + )

B a c k g r o u n d A d j u s t ( - )

O

r

i

g

i

n

a

l

S

e

t

t

i

n

g

M i x e d O r i g i n a l x x

Z - F o l d e d O r i g i n a l x x

C u s t o m S i z e

C u s t o m S i z e ( F u l l A r e a ) x x

T a b P a p e r x x

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



6-6 bizhub PRO 1050


1

t

o

N

N

t

o

1

R

i

g

h

t

&

L

e

f

t

B

i

n

d

i

n

g

U

p

p

e

r

B

i

n

d

i

n

g

H

D

D

Description

None Compatible

x Grayed out (including automatic release)

c Output message

u Originally incompatible but selectable (Function last selected has priority.)

z Released automatically

*1 Overlay cannot be selected in Program Job.

*2 Selecting Auto in Repeat, Non-Image Area Erase will also be selected automati-cally and cannot be released.

*3 Rotation without AMS is unavailable in Mixed Original. (Mixed Original or last se-lected function has priority.)

*4 Rotation is unavailable if staple or punch position will be interfered.

*5 Memory Scan mode is selected automatically.

*6 If Low Contrast is selected with minus level in Background Adjustment, the minuslevel will be altered to “0” automatically.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 6-7

6.2 Original Setting

6.2.1 Specifying Original Direction

Specify the direction of the originals placed on ADF or original glass.

This setting is required to obtain copy results as expected when making dou-ble-sided copies with binding position specified or when staple position is

specified.

2

Note

For details, refer to “Setting Binding Direction for Duplex Copies” on

page 9-12 and “Selecting Binding Direction of Originals” on page 6-9 .

1 Touch [Original Setting] on the Copy Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.

Normal

Left

Upside Down

Right

Normal

Left

Upside Down

Right

Originals on ADF: Originals on platen glass:

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



6-8 bizhub PRO 1050

2 Touch to highlight the desired original direction key.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Copy Screen.

!Details

Touch [Recall STD] to restore the initial setting, or touch [Cancel] to

resume the previous setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 6-9

6.2.2 Selecting Binding Direction of Originals

When copying double-sided originals in 2-1 or 2-2 mode, the copied sets will

be exactly the same in page arrangement as the originals.

Use this function to obtain the single- or double-sided copies having the

same edge as page top, from double-sided originals printed upside down onthe reverse side.

2

Note

For details, refer to “Setting Binding Direction for Duplex Copies” on

page 9-12 .

Specifications for Binding Direction of Originals:

- Upper Binding is available only in 2-1 or 2-2 copy mode.- If the machine restores the initial setting, this function will be reset to R&L

Binding.

- The machine is set to match the Original binding direction and Copybinding direction automatically. For details, refer to “02 Each Function

Setting” on page 16-37.



R & L Binding

Upper Binding

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Touch [Upper Binding] to highlight it.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




APS mode

Automatically select the paper of the same size as that of the original.

AMS mode

Automatically select magnification ratio to copy onto the same paper in size.



2 Touch [Mixed Original] to highlight it.

3 Touch [OK] to return to the Copy Screen.

!Details

APS is automatically selected on the Copy Screen.

To select AMS, touch the tray key on the Copy Screen to select the de-

sired paper size.

4 Position mixed original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.

Arrange the mixed size originals aligning the left and rear sides.

2

Note

For details, refer to “Positioning originals in Mixed Original mode” on

page 5-14 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





!Details

Touch [Recall STD] to restore the initial setting, or touch Cancel toresume the previous setting.

4 Position Z-folded original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.

Normal originals can be set together with the Z-folded original.

2

Note

For details, refer to “Positioning originals in Z-Folded original mode” on

page 5-15 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




4 Position Single Feed original FACE UP in the document feeder.

- Position a sheet of the original inthe document feeder, then align

the paper guides to the original.

2Reminder

Never set more than one thick original

or paste up, otherwise machine trouble

may be caused.

5 Select additional copy conditions, then press [Start].

The original will be fed and scanned, then the printing job will start in

succession when the machine becomes ready for output.

Procedure in Auto Start mode



2 Touch [Single Feed] to highlight it.


Memory Scan is automatically highlighted on the Copy Screen.

!DetailsTouch [Recall STD] to restore the initial setting, or touch [Cancel] to


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




4 Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

5 Adjust the ADF paper guides.

Without setting the original, adjustthe ADF paper guides according tothe original size to be set.

6 Position a sheet of original FACE UPin the document feeder.

The set original will be automaticallyfed and scanned.

2

Reminder

Never set more than one original, oth-

erwise machine trouble may be

caused.

7Touch Memory Scan to exit the Memory Scan mode (ADF), then press[Start].

The printing job will start.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6.2.6 Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Custom Size / TabPaper)

The copier usually detects the standard size of originals fed through ADF orpositioned on the original glass (Standard Size mode).

Use Custom Size mode to specify the scanning area manually for copying orprinting special size originals. Use Tab Paper mode to copy a tabbed origi-

nal, including the image of the tab part, onto tabbed copy paper.

Specifications for Custom Size / Tab Paper:

- Use Full area on the Custom Size mode menu for small originals that can-

not be copied in Standard Size mode.

- Tab extension width for tabbed originals: 12.5 mm or less

Tabbed copy paper size and tab extension width can be specified in Pa-per Setting.



2 Touch [Custom Size] or [Tab Paper].

The popup menu will appear for Custom Size or Tab Paper size setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Touch the desired size key.

4 Touch [OK] on the popup menu.

The popup menu will disappear.


!Details



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6.3 Memory Scan Mode

Use Memory Scan mode to scan more than 100 originals into memory then

to start a continuous printing job, or to combine images scanned from ADFand original glass.

Specification for Memory Scan Mode:- Memory Scan mode is necessarily used in the following functions: Mak-

ing double-sided copies using original glass, Image Insert, Book Copy,Program Job, Storing image in Overlay Memory

1 Make copying selections on the Copy Screen, as desired.

2 Touch [Memory Scan] to highlight it.

The Memory Scan mode will be activated.

!Details

[Memory Scan] may already be highlighted depending on the selectedcopy conditions.

3 Position original(s), then press [Start].

Using original glass:

- Place original FACE DOWN. Start scanning from the first page.- Repeat this step for all originals.

Using ADF:- Position originals FACE UP.

If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks notexceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the firstpage.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




!Details

Memory indicator under the message area of the touch panel allows you

to check the remaining memory.

To delete the scanned data without printing, press [Stop]. For details,

“Scanning the job in Memory Scan mode” on page 5-23 .

4 When scanning is completed, touch Memory Scan to exit the MemoryScan mode.

5 Press [Start].

All the data in memory will be output.

Press [Stop] to suspend the printing job.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




!Details



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6.4.2 Making Copy Quality Closer to Originals (Text/Photo En-hance)

Use this function to enhance the reproducibility of half tones so that the copyquality more closely matches to that of the original.

Text & Photo Mode Use this mode to copy an original including both text and photo image.

Low Contrast Mode

Select Low Contrast to darken lightly printed images (e.g., pencil) withoutchanging background exposure.

Photo Mode

Use the Photo mode to reproduce a half-tone photo image. The copy will

closely represent the half-tones of the original image.

Text Mode Use the Text mode when copying a text original. In this mode, text is im-

proved in comparison to using the general mode.

2

Note

Density Shift can shift each of nine density levels described on the pre-

ceding pages to three levels lighter or three levels darker.

This function can be set by the machine manager to use in combination

with each of four Enhance modes. (Utility Menu Screen>02 Function Set-

ting>03 Density Setting>01 Density Shift for Enhance Mode) For details,

refer to “01 Density Shift for Enhance Mode” on page 16-21 .

Original Text&Photo Photo

Original Text&Photo Photo

Original Text&Photo LowContrast

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




1 Touch [Special Image] on the Copy Screen.

The Special Image popup menu will be displayed.

2 Touch the desired mode key to highlight it.


!Details



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6.5 Zoom

In the initial settings on the Copy Screen, the magnification is automatically

set at “1.000” (full size).

This section describes how to change the magnification ratio.

6.5.1 To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode

Follow this procedure to make a 100% copy of the original image.

1 Close the ADF securely, then press [Reset].

The initial settings are restored. Check that [×1.0] is highlighted to indi-cate that the 1.000 magnification is selected.

!Details

The initial settings may be altered by the machine manager. For details,

refer to “01 Initial Setting” on page 16-30 .


Specifying paper size will release 1.000 magnification and set [AutoZoom] automatically. In this case, touch [x1.0] to highlight it again.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Specify the desired magnification.

- Manual Zoom (proportional)

Touch the key at the upper left corner in the Manual Zoom area.

- Use the screen keypad to enter the desired magnification ratio. Theentered ratio will be displayed on the Copy Screen.

!Details

If wrong number is entered, continue by entering the correct number.

Touching arrow keys + and , will change the ratio in 0.001 (0.1%) steps.

- Manual Zoom (individual)

Touch the vertical zoom key (the second one in the left side line) inthe Manual Zoom area.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





!Details

Touch [Cancel] to resume the previous setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6.7 Making Double-Sided Copies Using Original Glass

Use the original glass to scan originals unsuitable for the document feeder.

Specifications for Making Double-Sided Copies Using Original Glass:

- Use the Memory Scan mode.

- Position originals according to the original direction icon on the Copy

Screen.

- The double-sided copies can be arranged upside down on the back pag-es.

- For details, refer to “Unsuitable ADF Originals” on page 3-9.

- The machine is set to match the Original binding direction and Copybinding direction automatically. For details, “02 Each Function Setting”

on page 16-37.

1 Specify copy conditions for making double-sided copies.

- Selecting the original set direction

Touch [Original Setting] on the Copy Screen to display the SpecialOriginal popup menu.

- Touch the desired original direction key to highlight it.- Touch [OK] to return to the Copy Screen.

2

Note

For details, refer to “Specifying Original Direction” on page 6-7 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Touch [1-2] on the Copy Screen to highlight it.

The [Memory Scan] key will be automatically highlighted on the screen.

2

Reminder

DO NOT press [Reset] at this point, otherwise the Memory Scan mode

will be released to disable the copier from scanning the original placed

on the original glass.


5 Press [Start] to scan.

The front side image of the double-sided copy will be scanned into

memory.

6 Replace the original on the original glass with the back side image orig-

inal, then press [Start].

7 When all originals are scanned, touch Memory Scan to exit the MemoryScan mode.

!Details

To delete the scanned data without printing, press [Stop]. For details, re-

fer to “Scanning the job in Memory Scan mode” on page 5-23 .

8 Press [Start] to print.

All the data in memory will be output.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6.7.1 Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals

Use ADF and select 2-1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from dou-

ble-sided originals.

Specifications for Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals:

- Position originals according to the original direction icon on the CopyScreen.

- The normal single-sided copies (having the same edge as page top) can

be made from double-sided originals printed upside down on the backpages.

1 Touch [2-1] on the Copy Screen to highlight it.

Double-sided original Simplex copy

2-1 Copying

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Specify copy conditions for making copies from double-sided origi-

nals.

- Selecting the original set direction and binding direction

Touch [Original Setting] on the Copy Screen to display the Spe-cial Original popup menu.

- Touch the desired original direction key to highlight it.- To make normal double-sided copies (having the same edge as

page top) from double-sided originals printed upside down on the

back pages, touch [Upper Binding] to highlight it.- Touch [OK] to return to the Copy Screen.

2

Note

For details, refer to “Specifying Original Direction” on page 6-7 .

For details, refer to “Selecting Binding Direction of Originals” on

page 6-9 .


4 Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder

Set originals according to the original direction icon displayed on theCopy Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6.8 Paper Tray Setting

Each paper tray has been preset with paper size, paper type/weight, and air

assist on/off by machine manager.

Paper SizeThe machine manager has been set each tray to detect the standard papersize when loaded or exclusively to accommodate a specific size. (non-stand-

ard size, wide size, or tabbed paper size)

The tray specified as standard size or tabbed paper size allows APS (Auto-matic Paper Selection), AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection), and Rota-

tion to function, and the tray specified as wide size allow AMS and Rotation.

The size selection for each tray can be altered temporarily from the CopyScreen.

Paper Type/Weight

The machine manager specifies various paper conditions (Type, Weight,Colored Paper, Hole-Punch, Both Sides Adjustment) for each tray.

The selection for each can also be altered temporarily from the Copy Screento make a copy using different type of paper.

Air Assist On/Off

For details of this function, contact your machine manager.

The following describes how to use APS, AMS, Rotation functions, and howto temporarily change the paper size and other conditions specified for each

tray by machine manager.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6.8.1 To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS)

APS detects the original size placed on the ADF or original glass and auto-

matically selects and feeds copy paper of the same size, or selects an ap-propriate size according to the magnification ratio selected.

!Details

The original sizes to be detected from the ADF or original glass are pre-

viously determined. For details, refer to “ADF Originals” on page 3-11 .

The original sizes to be detected from the ADF or original glass can be

changed by the machine manager. For details, refer to “07 Size Setting”

on page 17-35 .

The machine manager can designate the tray or paper condition incompatible with APS. For details, refer to “02 Each Function Setting” on

page 16-37 .

The machine manager can deactivate APS when original is set in the ADF

or on the original glass.

Specifications for APS:

- APS is incompatible with AMS, however, Rotation is available.

- APS will not select the tray of the size specified as non-standard or widesize.

1 Touch [Auto Paper Select] at lower right corner of the Copy Screen.

2 Select additional copy conditions as desired, then position original(s).

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Press [Start].

Scanned image will be printed on the paper size automatically select-ed.

If the appropriate copy paper is not loaded in any tray, no copying willbe performed, and a message will prompt you to load the appropriatepaper.

!Details

The APS may not function for the tray of the selected size due to the pa-

per type/weight specified for that tray. Contact your machine manager.

See the table below for the relation of original size, magnification ratio

and copy paper size.

Paper size Paper sizeOriginal size

M a g n i f i c

a t i o n

M a g n i f i c

a t i o n

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6.8.3 Rotation

This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original docu-

ments onto size A4 or B5, irrespective of the copy paper feeding direction.

!Details

The machine manager can set this function ON, or to operate when APS,

AMS or reduce functions. For details, refer to “05 Image Auto Rotation”

on page 17-116 .

Specifications for Rotation:

- Copy paper sizes: A4, B5

- Original sizes: A3, B4, A4, B5

The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically.

Follow the procedure below to release/resume this function.

Original Copy Original Copy

Rotation copying

Normal copying

Rotation copying

Normal copying

A3

B4

A4R

B5R

A4 B5

A4 B5

A4R

B5R

A4

B5

B5R

A4R

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




1 Touch [Rotation Off] on the Copy Screen to highlight it.

When Rotation is released, the Rotation icon on the Copy Screen willdisappear to indicate that this function is cancelled.

2 Touch to deselect [Rotation Off] to resume this function.

When Rotation is resumed, the Rotation icon will be displayed on thescreen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Touch Paper Presetting.

The Paper Presetting popup menu will be displayed.

3 Select the tray to change the setting temporarily.

Touch the desired tray key on the popup menu.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




sion, 140 mm ~ 460 mm in horizontal dimension.

- Touch [Lead Edge], [Rear Edge], or [Centre] to specify the desiredimage position.

- Touch [OK] to complete the setting

- Setting Wide Size Paper Touch [Size Setting], then touch [Wide Size Paper.]

- Touch the desired wide size key to highlight it.- Touch [Lead Edge], [Rear Edge], or [Centre] to specify the desired

image position.- Touch [Input Size] to display the Size Input Screen.

- Touch the vertical size key, then use the screen keypad or arrowkeys + and , to enter the vertical size.The entered number should fall within the range from the vertical

size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size,to a maximum of 324 mm.

- Touch the horizontal size key, then use the screen keypad or arrow

keys + and , to enter the horizontal size.The entered number should fall within the range from the horizontal

size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size,to a maximum of 460 mm.

!Details

When setting wide size, be sure to specify the precise dimensions of pa-

per to be used. The dimensions of the wide size selected in step (2) are

not correctly set in the initial setting.

- Touch [Select Size] to return to the Select Size Screen.

- Touch [OK] to complete the setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5 Change the paper setting.

Change the paper setting of the tray either by selecting the one previ-ously registered or by programing a new setting.

- Selecting the paper setting

Touch [Type/Weight].

- Use [Next] or [Previous] to scroll to the desired paper type/weight

from the list, then touch the key to highlight it.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- Programing a new setting

Touch [Change].

- Touch [Type], then select the desired paper type key.Touch [OK] to complete the setting.

!Details

For details, refer to “Paper Setting Outlines” on page 12-3 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Touch the desired color key, then touch [OK].

- Touch [Hole-Punch].

Touch [With Punch Hole] if the paper has punch holes, or touch [NonPunch Holes] if not, then touch [OK].

- Touch [Both Sides Adj].

Touch [Front or Back] to select the printed side, select the adjustmentitem (vertical zoom, horizontal zoom, vertical shift, or horizontal shift),

and then touch + <--> - to specify the value to be positive or negative.

Use the screen keypad or arrow keys + and , to enter the desired adjustment value, then touch [OK].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2

Note

For details,refer to “Paper Setting Outlines” on page 12-3 .

6 Touch [Close] on the Paper Presetting popup menu.

The tray with the paper setting changed will be selected on the screen,

and all paper level indicators will disappear from the tray keys.

However, the name indicated on the tray key will not be changed.

7 Load copy paper into the tray with the setting change made.

!Details

The changed setting will be cleared when copying job is completed using

that tray.

If [Reset] is pressed or Auto Reset functions before completion of the job,the changed setting will also be cleared.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




6.9 Reserve Job Setting

The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current job is in

process. When the current job is finished, the Reserve job starts printing im-mediately.

Specifications for Reserve:- Job settings: Max. 100

- The reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to scan the

current job, and also available anytime while printing the current job.

1 Display the Copy Screen with the message “Ready to copy reserve”.

When scanning job is started:

- The above popup menu will be displayed.- Touch Yes. The Copy Screen for setting reserve job will be dis-

played.

2

Note

Touching [No] will return to the Machine Status Screen. In this case,

touching [COPY] tab will display the Copy Screen and allows you to make

the reserve job setting.

If the machine is initially set to display the Copy Screen after scanning job

is started, the above popup menu will provide only the Close key. Touch-

ing [Close] will also display the Copy Screen to make the reserve job set-

ting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


7Job Management

Copier

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Job Management 7

bizhub PRO 1050 7-3

7 Job Management

7.1 Overview of Job List ScreenThe Job List Screen allows you to check/operate the following items.

- Reserved job

- Output History

- Send History

- Incomplete

- Suspended (The letters on the key turn red if any suspended job remains.)

- Spool

!Details

The jobs referred here include printer jobs and scanner jobs.

Follow the procedure below to display the Job List Screen.

1 Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy Screen.

The Job List Screen will be displayed.

2 Touch the desired key at the bottom of the screen.

See the following pages for details of each subsequent screen.

3 Touch other tab key to exit the Job List Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


7 Job Management

7-4 bizhub PRO 1050

7.2 Job Operation on Job List Screen

7.2.1 To Check/Control Reserved Jobs

Use this function to display all the reserve jobs as a list.

The list includes following information.- Job No.: consecutive numbers of both copy and print jobs

- User Name: user who transmitted the job

- Mode: Copy or Printer

- Status: Printing or Reserved (current status of the job)

- Sheets: max. 4-digit page count

- Sets: max. 4-digit set count

- Pages To Go: max. 4-digit pages to be output (Sheets x Sets = Pages ToGo)

- Minute(s): time required for completing each job (minute)

Follow the procedure below to check the settings, change the output order,and suspend/delete/stop reserved jobs.

1 Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy Screen, then touch Reserved Job ifnot highlighted.

- Check the status of the reserved jobs.- Touch [Next] to scroll, if 8 or more jobs are entered.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


7 Job Management

7-6 bizhub PRO 1050

7.2.2 To Display Output History

Use this function to display output history as a list.

The list includes following information.

- Job No.: consecutive numbers of both copy and print jobs

- User Name: user who transmitted the job- Mode: Copy or Printer

- Sheets: max. 4-digit page count

- Sets: max. 4-digit set count

- Result: Complete or Cancel

- Time: time when output operation was executed

Follow the procedure below to check the settings of output jobs.

1 Touch JOB LIST tab on the Copy Screen, then touch [Output History].

- Check the status of the output jobs.- Touch [Next] to scroll, if 8 or more jobs are entered.

2 Touch the desired job key, then touch [Details].

- Detailed settings of the selected job will be displayed.

- Touch [Close] to return to the previous screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Job Management 7

bizhub PRO 1050 7-7

7.2.3 To Display Send History

Use this function to display the send history as a list.



- User Name: user who transmitted the job- Mode: E-Mail / FTP / PC / HDD

- Address: address to which the data was transmitted

- Result: Complete or Cancel

- Time: time when data transmission was executed

Follow the procedure below to check the settings of transmitted jobs.

1 Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy Screen, then touch [Send History].

- Check the status of the transmitted jobs.- Touch [Next] to scroll, if 8 or more jobs are entered.




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


7 Job Management

7-8 bizhub PRO 1050

7.2.4 To Check Incomplete Jobs

Use this function to display incomplete jobs as a list.



- User Name: user who transmitted the job

- Cause: Memory Full, Cancel, etc.(cause for which the job was not com-

pleted)

Follow the procedure below to check the settings of noncomplete jobs.

1 Touch [JOB LIST] tab on the Copy Screen, then touch [Incomplete].

- Check the status of the incomplete jobs.- Touch [Next] to scroll, if 8 or more jobs are entered.




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


7 Job Management


2 Select the desired job, then select the job operation.

% To output suspended job:

Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch [Release].

The selected job will be output according to the current printing order.

!Details

To check the printing order, touch [Reserved Job] to display the reserved

job list.

% To output all suspended jobs:

Touch [All Release], then touch [Yes] on the popup menu.

All suspended jobs will be output according to the current printing or-der.

!Details

To check the printing order, touch [Reserved Job] to display the reserved

job list.

% To check the settings of suspended job:

Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch [Details].

Check the settings of the selected job on the screen. Touch [Close] to

return to the Job List Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


7 Job Management


% To change the order of jobs:

Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch Priority.

The highlighted job will be advanced by one in printing order unless the job preceding the selected one is already in progress.

!Details

If printing order cannot be changed for the selected job, a message will

be displayed for information.

% To clear spool job:

Touch to highlight the desired job key, then touch Delete.Touch Yes on the popup menu to clear the selected job.

!Details

All the data of the selected job will be cleared.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications

Copier

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8

bizhub PRO 1050 8-3

8 Applications

8.1 Copy Conditions Incompatible with Applications

C o p y C o n d i t i o n s I n c o m p a t i b l e

w i t h A p p l i c a t i o n s

C o p y M o d e / M a g n i f i c a t i o n S p e c i a l I m a g e O r i g i n a l S e t t i n g

1

-

1

1

-

2

2

-

1

2

-

2

M

e

m

o

r

y

S

c

a

n

M

o

d

e

(

G

l

a

s

s

)

M

e

m

o

r

y

S

c

a

n

M

o

d

e

(

A

D

F

)

A

P

S

A

M

S

1

.

0

0

0

M

a

g

n

i

f

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

Z

O

O

M

P

r

e

s

e

t

M

a

g

n

i

f

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

R

o

t

a

t

i

o

n

M

a

n

u

a

l

D

e

n

s

i

t

y

A

E

P

r

e

s

e

t

D

e

n

s

i

t

y

T

e

x

t

&

P

h

o

t

o

(

E

n

h

a

n

c

e

)

L

o

w

C

o

n

t

r

a

s

t

P

h

o

t

o

(

*

5

)

T

e

x

t

B

a

c

k

g

r

o

u

n

d

A

d

j

u

s

t

(

+

)

B

a

c

k

g

r

o

u

n

d

A

d

j

u

s

t

(

-

)

M

i

x

e

d

O

r

i

g

i

n

a

l

Z

-

F

o

l

d

e

d

O

r

i

g

i

n

a

l

C

u

s

t

o

m

S

i

z

e

C

u

s

t

o

m

S

i

z

e

(

F

u

l

l

A

r

e

a

)

T

a

b

P

a

p

e

r

A

p

p

l

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

/

F

i

l

e

E

d

i

t

P r o g r a m J o b ( F i r s t j o b ) x c

S h e e t I n s e r t i o n x x

I n s e r t i o n u s i n g P I x x

F r o n t C o v e r

B a c k C o v e r

F r o n t P I ( U p p e r / L o w e r )

B a c k P I ( U p p e r / L o w e r )

C h a p t e r x x x x

C h a p t e r ( P r i n t I n s e r t i o n ) x x x x x

C o m b i n a t i o n x x x x

B o o k l e t x x x x x x

A d h e s i v e B i n d i n g x x x x x x

O H P I n t e r l e a v e x x x x

I m a g e I n s e r t x x

B o o k C o p y x x x x x x

A

p

p

l

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

/

I

m

a

g

e

E

d

i

t

N e g . P o s . R e v e r s e

R e p e a t x x x x x x

R e p e a t ( A u t o ) ( * 4 ) x x x x x x x

R e p e a t ( 2 / 4 / 8 R e p e a t ) x x x x x

F r a m e E r a s u r e

F o l d E r a s u r e

I m a g e C e n t r i n g x x x x x

I m a g e S h i f t x

R e d u c e & S h i f t x x x x x x

N o n - I m a g e A r e a E r a s e z x x x x x x

A l l - I m a g e A r e a

S t a m p

P a g e N u m b e r i n g

S e t N u m b e r i n g

D a t e

W a t e r m a r k

W a t e r m a r k / N u m b e r i n g

O v e r l a y M e m o r y

O v e r l a y ( * 3 ) x

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications

8-4 bizhub PRO 1050


P

r

o

g

r

a

m

J

o

b

(

F

i

r

s

t

j

o

b

)

S

h

e

e

t

I

n

s

e

r

t

i

o

n

I

n

s

e

r

t

i

o

n

u

s

i

n

g

P

I

F

r

o

n

t

C

o

v

e

r

B

a

c

k

C

o

v

e

r

F

r

o

n

t

P

I

(

U

p

p

e

r

/

L

o

w

e

r

)

B

a

c

k

P

I

(

U

p

p

e

r

/

L

o

w

e

r

)

C

h

a

p

t

e

r

C

h

a

p

t

e

r

(

P

r

i

n

t

I

n

s

e

r

t

i

o

n

)

C

o

m

b

i

n

a

t

i

o

n

B

o

o

k

l

e

t

B

o

o

k

l

e

t

(

A

d

h

e

s

i

v

e

B

i

n

d

i

n

g

)

O

H

P

I

n

t

e

r

l

e

a

v

e

I

m

a

g

e

I

n

s

e

r

t

B

o

o

k

C

o

p

y

N

e

g

.

P

o

s

.

R

e

v

e

r

s

e

R

e

p

e

a

t

R

e

p

e

a

t

(

A

u

t

o

)

R

e

p

e

a

t

(

2

/

4

/

8

R

e

p

e

a

t

)

F

r

a

m

e

E

r

a

s

u

r

e

F

o

l

d

E

r

a

s

u

r

e

I

m

a

g

e

C

e

n

t

r

i

n

g

I

m

a

g

e

S

h

i

f

t

R

e

d

u

c

e

&

S

h

i

f

t

N

o

n

-

I

m

a

g

e

A

r

e

a

E

r

a

s

e

A

l

l

-

I

m

a

g

e

A

r

e

a

S

t

a

m

p

P

a

g

e

N

u

m

b

e

r

i

n

g

S

e

t

N

u

m

b

e

r

i

n

g

D

a

t

e

W

a

t

e

r

m

a

r

k

W

a

t

e

r

m

a

r

k

/

N

u

m

b

e

r

i

n

g

O

v

e

r

l

a

y

M

e

m

o

r

y

O

v

e

r

l

a

y

x x x x x x x x x x x x



u

u

x - x x x x x x x

x - x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 x

x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x


x x x x x x x x x x x z z x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x z z x x x x * 4 x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x z z x x x x x * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 c x

x x x x

x x x x x x

x x x x x x x

x -

x x x x x - x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x x x x

* 1 x x x * 1 z z z

* 1 x x x * 1

* 1 x x x * 1 z z z

* 1 x x x * 1

* 1 x x x * 1 z z z z

* 1 x x x * 1 z z z z

u x x x u z z z z z

x x x x x x x x x x x x z z z z z

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8

bizhub PRO 1050 8-5


A p p l i c a t i o n s


C

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

(

O

f

f

s

e

t

)

U

n

c

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

C

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

(

R

o

t

a

t

i

o

n

)

U

n

c

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

(

R

o

t

a

t

i

o

n

)

1

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

U

p

p

e

r

L

e

f

t

)

1

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

U

p

p

e

r

R

i

g

h

t

)

2

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

T

o

p

)

2

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

L

e

f

t

)

2

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

R

i

g

h

t

)

Z

-

F

o

l

d

F

o

l

d

i

n

g

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

F

o

l

d

i

n

g

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

i

n

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

i

n

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

o

u

t

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

o

u

t

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

D

o

u

b

l

e

P

a

r

a

l

l

e

l

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

D

o

u

b

l

e

P

a

r

a

l

l

e

l

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

G

a

t

e

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

G

a

t

e

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

H

o

l

e

-

P

u

n

c

h

(

R

i

g

h

t

)

H

o

l

e

-

P

u

n

c

h

(

L

e

f

t

)

H

o

l

e

-

P

u

n

c

h

(

T

o

p

)

F

a

c

e

U

p

F

a

c

e

D

o

w

n

A

p

p

l

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

/

F

i

l

e

E

d

i

t

P r o g r a m J o b ( F i r s t j o b ) x x x

S h e e t I n s e r t i o n x x x

I n s e r t i o n u s i n g P I x x x

F r o n t C o v e r

B a c k C o v e r

F r o n t P I ( U p p e r / L o w e r ) - -

B a c k P I ( U p p e r / L o w e r ) - -

C h a p t e r x x x

C h a p t e r ( P r i n t I n s e r t i o n ) x x x

C o m b i n a t i o n x x x

B o o k l e t x x x

A d h e s i v e B i n d i n g x x x

O H P I n t e r l e a v e x x x x x c x x x x x x x x x x x x x

I m a g e I n s e r t x x x

B o o k C o p y x x

A

p

p

l

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

/

I

m

a

g

e

E

d

i

t

N e g . P o s . R e v e r s e

R e p e a t x x x

R e p e a t ( A u t o ) ( * 4 ) x x x

R e p e a t ( 2 / 4 / 8 R e p e a t ) x x x

F r a m e E r a s u r e

F o l d E r a s u r e

I m a g e C e n t r i n g x x

I m a g e S h i f t

R e d u c e & S h i f t

N o n - I m a g e A r e a E r a s e x x

A l l - I m a g e A r e a x x

S t a m p

P a g e N u m b e r i n g

S e t N u m b e r i n g

D a t e

W a t e r m a r k

W a t e r m a r k / N u m b e r i n g

O v e r l a y M e m o r y

O v e r l a y ( * 3 ) x x

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications

8-6 bizhub PRO 1050


1

t

o

N

N

t

o

1

R

i

g

h

t

&

L

e

f

t

B

i

n

d

i

n

g

U

p

p

e

r

B

i

n

d

i

n

g

H

D

D

(

*

2

)

x

x

x

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8

bizhub PRO 1050 8-7

Description

None Compatible


c Output message



*1 2 in 1 and 2 Repeat are available. (Grayed out if not.)

*2 Limited to Job Store function in Copy mode.


*4 Selecting Auto in Repeat, Non-Image Area Erase will also be selected automati-cally and cannot be released.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications

8-8 bizhub PRO 1050

8.2 To Use Application Function

Follow the procedure below to display the Application popup menu and se-

lect the desired copying features.

1Touch [COPY] tab on the Machine Status Screen to display the CopyScreen.

2 Touch [Application] on the Copy Screen.

The Application popup menu will be displayed on the touch panel.

!Details

When a function key is touched, it becomes highlighted. If you touch afunction key, another screen or two will display to enable you to enter the

appropriate settings.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8

bizhub PRO 1050 8-9

If one function on the menu is incompatible with another, it will appear

dimmed.

Touch [Bookmark] on the subsequent screen, if desired, so that the

screen may be directly accessed from the Check Screen to change the

setting you made.

- To restore the original copying conditions, touch [Cancel].- To cancel all the selected functions with the setting made for each

remained, touch [All Off].- To resume the initial setting, press [Reset].

3 Touch [OK] on the Application popup menu.

Selections will be completed and the Copy Screen will be restored,with the selection listed in the area under the Application key.

2

Reminder

With the Copy Screen displayed, you can press [Start] to perform the

operation.

!Details

Selected functions can be directly accessed from the Application area ofthe Copy Screen to change or clear the setting you made.

To cancel the selection of each application function, touch [Function

OFF] on the subsequent screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


1 Load regular sheets, insertion sheets and covers into any tray.

When using the Post inserter to insert front/back cover, load coversinto the Post inserter tray.

2

Reminder

Be sure that the trays for copy paper, front/back cover, and insertions

have the same paper size loaded.

Check the tray information on the Machine Status Screen or Copy Screen

and use the specified paper; otherwise machine trouble may occur.

To use any other paper type/size than the specified paper, touch [Paper

Presetting] on the Copy Screen to change the setting temporarily.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 89 10

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 89 10

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

1 2 3

4

5 6

7

8 9

10

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

1

2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

1

2 3

4

5 6

7

8 9

10

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

9 10

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

910

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

SURVEYOR S

REPORT

CopiesOriginals

CopiesOriginals

CopiesOriginals

CopiesOriginals

CopiesOriginals

CopiesOriginals

CopiesOriginals

CopiesOriginals

FRONT COVER PRINTED

BACK COVER PRINTED

PRINTED SHEET INSERTION

FRONT & BACK COVERS PRINTED

AND PRINTED SHEET INSERTION

FRONT COVER BLANK

BACK COVER BLANK

BLANK SHEET INSERTION

FRONT & BACK COVERS BLANK

AND BLANK SHEET INSERTION

Combination samples:

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications



2

Reminder

When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the ADF securely, thenpress [Reset].

3 Touch [Sheet Insertion] on the Application popup menu.

The Sheet Insertion Screen will be displayed.

4 Select the desired cover mode.

If no cover is desired, proceed to the next step.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


% To insert a front cover: Touch [Front Cover].

The Front Cover Screen will be displayed.

Select the desired front cover mode, copy mode (Simplex/Duplex), and

tray paper to be used.

To use covers loaded in the Post inserter, touch [Cover] and select the

tray to be used. If both tray cover and post inserter cover are specified,

the post inserter front cover will be the first page.

Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the previous screen.

% To insert a back cover: Touch [Back Cover].

The Back Cover Screen will be displayed.

Select the desired back cover mode, copy mode (Simplex/Duplex), and traypaper to be used.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


To use covers loaded in the Post inserter, touch [Cover] and select the tray

to be used. If both tray cover and post inserter cover are specified, the postinserter back cover will be the last page.

Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the previous screen.

5 To insert the insertion sheets: Touch [Insertion Sheets].

The Insertion Sheets Screen will be displayed.

6 Enter the desired insertion type setting.

The Set 01 key is active to be ready for the first insertion type setting.

Select the desired insertion mode (Print/Blank), copy mode (Simplex/ Duplex), and tray paper to be used.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


7 Enter the page number.

Touch [Insert Page Setting], then use the touch panel keypad to enterthe page number of insertion location. Use “, (comma)” between pag-

es, or “- (hyphen)” for consecutive pages.

To delete the last entered number, touch [Delete]. To clear all the page

entry, touch [Clear].

!Details

If p 4 is entered in blank mode, a blank sheet will be inserted between p.

4 and p. 5; in copy mode, a copied sheet is inserted at p. 4.

2

Note

The page numbers entered at random will be sorted automatically.

Entering “0” or the same page number twice will be ignored on thescreen.

When a page number entered is larger than the total original page count,

it will be ignored.

Touch [Fix] to complete the page entry. The Set 01 setting is fixed and

the Set 02 key will be active.

To change the insertion type, set the new one and enter the page

number.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


!Details

Up to 30 insertion type settings can be stored.

If the same page number has been entered in Set 02 and Set 03 for example, the setting of earlier number (Set 02) will take priority.

8 When all settings are completed, touch [OK] on the Sheet InsertionScreen.

The Application popup menu will be restored.

!Details

To clear all the settings, touch [Clear All].

To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].

To cancel the function without clearing the setting made, touch [Function

OFF].


The Copy Screen will be restored.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


8.4 Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter)

Chapter is used with ADF in 1-2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages

on the right side, rather than reverse side, of a duplex copy to improve thepresentation of double-sided copies.

To effectively locate the title page on the right, a blank sheet will be automat-ically created on the reverse side of a sheet, if required.

Specifications for Chapter:

- Use ADF.

- Max. title pages: 30 locations, from 1 ~ 999

- The chapter page can be copied on the sheet from another tray source.(Print insertion)

- Use Stamp together with this function to print chapter number onto

chapter page in addition to page number, numbering, or watermark num-bering.


2Reminder

When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the ADF securely, then

press [Reset].

1-sided originals Copies in

Chapter mode

Title pagesTitle pages

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


2 Touch [Chapter] on the Application popup menu.

The Chapter Screen will be displayed.

3 Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each title

page.

Touch [Set] after each entry to move to the next key. To set more than

15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next page.

To clear an incorrect entry, touch [Delete]. The entered number will be

deleted.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


8.5 Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)

Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto

one sheet of copy paper (2 in 1, 4 in 1, or 8 in 1).

Specifications for Combination:

- Use ADF.

- AMS is automatically selected. (Normally the fixed size of Tray 1 will beselected.)


2

Reminder


press [Reset].

2 Touch [Combination] on the Application popup menu.

The Combination Screen will be displayed.

Original

2 in1 copying

4 in1 copying

8 in1 copying

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


3 Select the desired Combination mode.

Touch [2 in 1], [4 in 1] or [8 in 1] in the desired order area, referring tothe illustration on the following page.

4 Touch [OK].


!Details

To cancel the setting, touch [Cancel].


OFF].



AMS is automatically selected. When selecting any tray other than the

one that is set and displayed on the Copy Screen, touch the desiredtray key.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


6 Select the desired original direction.

Touch [Original Setting] on the Copy Screen to display the SpecialOriginal popup menu. Touch to select the desired original direction key,then touch [OK] to return to the Copy Screen.


8 Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

9 Press [Start].

!Details

Refer to the table below to select the desired Combination mode.

Original

Layout

Portrait type

Landscape type

Horizontal order Vertical order

2 in 1 4 in 1 8 in 1 4 in1 8 in 1

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


8.6 Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)

Use the Booklet to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of

paper. Original images are scanned into memory and automatically arrangedin booklet format in correct order.

If the machine is equipped with FD-501 Folding unit option, Adhesive Bind-ing is available together with Folding mode.

Specifications for Booklet:

- Use ADF.

- Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last.

- Trays for copy paper and front/back covers should have the same paper

size loaded.

- AMS is automatically selected. Select the desired paper size.

1 Load Copy Paper.

Load the desired copy paper size in a tray.

When selecting cover sheet mode (Cover With Copy Sheet or Cover

With Blank Sheet), load the same size paper in any other tray unless itis specified as Thick or Tab paper of the paper type.

1-sided originals

Booklet copying

Magazine binding

Adhesive binding

2-sided originals

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications



2

Reminder


3 Touch [Booklet] on the Application popup menu.

4 Touch to highlight the desired Booklet mode key.

- When a cover sheet is required, touch [Cover Tray Select] to select

the cover sheet tray source.

- Touch [Left binding] or [Right binding] if you want to change theoutput order.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


5 Touch [OK].


!DetailsTo cancel the setting, touch [Cancel].


OFF].

2

Note

The Utility Menu Screen provides the setting to position the page num-

bers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet

with Page Numbering in Stamp.



AMS is selected automatically.

7 Select the tray in which you loaded copy paper in step 1.

To release AMS, select the desired magnification, then select paper

size.

8 Select the 1-2 or 2-2 copy mode.

If the copier is equipped with FD-501, Folding output mode is available.


10 Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder, then press [Start].

2Reminder

Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in

2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8



4 Touch [OHP Interleave] on the Application popup menu.

5 Select the desired OHP Interleave mode, then touch [OK].

!Details



OFF].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications




!Details AMS is selected automatically.

To release AMS, select the desired magnification.

Print quantity is already set to 1. You cannot enter any other quantity.

7 Touch to select the tray loaded with transparent films.

8 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN


9 Press [Start].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


2 Touch [Image Insert] on the Application popup menu.

The Image Insert Screen will be displayed.

3 Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number.

- Touch [Set] after each entry to move to the next key.- When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move

to the next page.- To clear an incorrect entry, touch [Delete]. The entered page

number will be deleted.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


!Details

Entering Page Numbers

For example, if insertion locations are [2/2/6], scanned images will be in-

serted as follows: The first scanned image will be inserted after page 2.

The second scanned image will be inserted directly after the first scanned

Image insertion.

The third scanned image will be inserted after page 6.

2

Note

When a page number is larger than the total original count, a sheet is inserted as the last page.

Insertions occur in sequence, even if page numbers are entered out of

sequence.

Entering the same page number twice will insert two sheets at that loca-

tion.

Option

Touch [Booklet] on the Image Insert Screen to use this function.

4 When all page number entries are made, touch [OK].The Application popup menu will be restored.

!Details



OFF].



The Memory Scan key on the Copy Screen appears highlighted toshow that the Memory Scan mode is automatically selected.


7 Scan the document feeder images

Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not ex-

ceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first page.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


8.9 Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (BookCopy)

The Book Copy mode performs image division on the original image. Use thisfunction to copy an open book or a ledger sheet onto two sheets in 1-1 or 2-

1 mode, or onto the front and back sides of one sheet in 1-2 or 2-2 mode.The following three modes can be selected from the Book Copy Screen:

- Full Scan mode

Image division starts from the first scan.

- Front Cover + Full Scan mode

Image division starts from the second scan, after the first scan copiesnormally.

- Front/Back Cover + Full Scan mode

Image division starts from the third scan, after the first and second scan

copy normally.

Specifications for Book Copy

- Memory Scan mode is automatically selected.

- Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R

1 Touch Application on the Copy Screen.

When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the ADF securely,then press [Reset].

1-2/2-2 mode

1-1/2-1 modeSet original

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


2 Touch [Book Copy] on the Application popup menu.

The Book Copy Screen will be displayed.

3 Select the desired Book Copy mode.

Touch to highlight the desired mode key.

4 Touch [Left Binding] or [Right Binding] to select the output order ac-

cording to the original pagination.

2

NoteOption

Touch [Booklet] on the Book Copy Screen to use this function.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


5 Touch [OK].


!DetailsTo cancel the setting, touch [Cancel].


OFF].



APS and AMS are automatically released, and the Memory Scan key

appears highlighted to show that the Memory Scan mode is automati-

cally selected.

7 Select the desired copy mode and magnification.

!Details

Available paper sizes are A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, and B5R.

When selecting Full scan mode and scanning from the original glass, se-

lect 1-1 or 1-2 copy mode.

APS and AMS are released and 1.000 magnification is selected automat-

ically. Change the magnification manually, if desired.


9 Position original(s).

When using original glass to scan, position the first page FACE DOWNwith document feeder kept open.

When using document feeder, position original(s) FACE UP.

For details on scanning originals in Front cover + Full scan and Front/

Back Cover + Full scan mode, see the description on the followingpage.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals.

2

Reminder

When using original glass, No Image Area Erase and Image Centring areautomatically selected.

DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job.

12 Touch [Memory Scan] to exit the Memory Scan mode.

13 Press [Start].

The copier will start printing when ready for output.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


Scanning Original for Cover

Use original glass for scanning original for cover.

1. Open the document feeder.

2. Position original for front cover FACE DOWN on the original glass.

3. Press [Start] to start scanning.4. When Front/Back Cover + Full scan is selected, scan original for back

cover according to the above steps 2 and 3.

5. Use original glass or document feeder, as required, for scanning bodytext originals.To output the set in the same order as the originals, start scanning from

the first page.

6. Press [Start] to start scanning.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for subsequent originals.

Front cover + Facing pages

Front/Back cover + Facing pages

Front cover + Facing pages

Front/Back cover + Facing pages

Scan fromfirst page

Copies

Copies

Copies

Copies

Scan fromfirst page

Scan front cover Scan body textScan back cover

Scan front cover Scan body text

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


8.10 Programming Different Settings for an Output Job(Program Job)

In the ordinary Memory Scan mode, the combined features selected for the job are applied to all originals to be scanned. In the Program Job mode, you

may scan multiple sets of originals and apply different settings on each set(referred to as JOB), then output them all as a complete set.

Specifications for Program Job:

- Max. 100 JOBs can be programmed for an output job.

- Once specified, paper size and the paper type/size setting cannot be

changed for another JOB.

- Output mode and print quantity setting cannot be specified for each JOB.The last setting made will be applied to all JOBs.

- Program Job settings cannot be stored in Job Memory.


2Reminder


press [Reset].

Original A Original B Original C

Output usingProgram Job

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


6 Press [Start].

The paper size determined at this time will be applied to all subsequentJOBs.

When scanning for the current JOB is completed, the popup menu will

be displayed in the Copy Screen.

7 Touch [Confirm].

The current JOB images will be stored.To delete the images, touch [Cancel].

8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 until all JOB originals are scanned.

2

Reminder

PLACE AND SCAN EACH ORIGINAL SET IN THE CORRECT ORDER OF

PAGINATION.

9 Touch [Memory Scan] to exit the Memory Scan mode.

10 Select the desired output mode and enter the print quantity from the

control panel keypad.

11 Press [Start].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


8.11 Erasing Outside of the Original (No Image Area Erase)

The No Image Area Erase mode is used to copy non standard or special orig-

inals, such as books, magazines, paste-ups, graphs, thick or thin materials,etc. from the original glass. The exposed glass area outside the borders of

the original will not be copied.Specifications for No Image Area Erase:

- Use the original glass only. Keep ADF open throughout the procedure.


2Reminder


press [Reset].

2 Touch [No Image Area Erase] on the Application popup menu.

The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.

Set original

General copying No Image Area Erase

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications




4 Select magnification and paper size, as desired.

!Details

APS and AMS are automatically released.

Copy mode is automatically set to 1-1. When selecting 1-2 mode, Mem-

ory Scan mode will function automatically.


6 Position original FACE DOWN on the original glass.

2

Reminder

DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER.

Original size should be larger than 10mm x 10mm.

7 Press [Start].

!Details

Oblique Erase and Rectangle Erase Modes

The No Image Area Erase has two modes; Rectangle erase mode and

Oblique erase mode. The copier is initially set to select either mode ap-

propriate for the original placed on the original glass (AUTO mode).

If desired, display the Utility Menu Screen to specify either mode and the

original density level manually so that the No Image Area Erase functions

without fail.

Oblique Rectangleerase modeerase mode

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


Having Any Problem?

This function may perform incorrectly if the lighting in the work place is di-rectly over the original glass. In this case, consult your service representativeabout an appropriate place for installation.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


8.12 Reversing Color in Black and White Image (Neg. Pos.Reverse)

Use Neg. Pos. Reverse to reverse the image from black-on-white to white-on-black, and vice versa. This is very good for copying white-on-black orig-

inals and reversing them to fax.


2

Reminder


press [Reset].

2 Touch [Neg. Pos. Reverse] on the Application popup menu.


Neg. Pos. Reverse copyingOriginal

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


8.13 Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz.Mode)

Use this function to repeat the selected image area of 10mm ~ 150mm inboth vertical and horizontal widths measured from the rear left corner of the

A3 original area indicated on the left edge of the original glass.Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Mode Specifications:

- Use the original glass. (Document feeder cannot be used.)


2Reminder


press [Reset].

2 Touch [Repeat] on the Application popup menu.

The Repeat Screen will be displayed.

Horizontal width

Vertical

width

Repeat copy

Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting mode

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


3 Touch [Manual], then specify the vertical and horizontal widths of the

scanning area.

Use up/down arrow key to enter the width from 10 to 150 mm in 1 mmincrements. Keep touching the key to increase/decrease the value con-

tinuously.

Or, touch [Input With Keypad] to display the popup menu to enter thevalue from the touch panel keypad.

Touch [Vertical] or [Horizontal] on the popup menu, enter the value for

each, then touch OK to restore the Repeat Screen.

4 Touch [OK].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications




6 Select the desired magnification and paper size.

!Details

APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected

as a magnification ratio.




8 Position original FACE DOWN on the original glass.

9 Press [Start].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


8.14 Repeat Automatically or Select Repeat Times (Re-peat: Auto/ Repeat Mode)

Auto Detect mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size ofthe original placed onto the original glass by activating No Image Area Erase.

Repeat mode will scan the image area specified by the selected paper sizeand mode (2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat), then arrange the image byspecified times in one copy sheet. Use 2 Repeat in designated order mode

to have the same cut side when cutting copied sheets in two.

Auto Detect/ Repeat Mode Specifications:

- Auto Detect Mode: Use the original glass. ADF cannot be used.

- ADF is available with Repeat mode.

- Repeat Mode Magnification ratio: 1.000 (100%) fixed


Auto Detect mode

Repeat mode

Copy(2 Repeat)

Copy(4 Repeat)

Copy(8 Repeat)

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


2 Touch [Repeat] on the Application popup menu.

The Repeat Screen will be displayed.

3 Touch to highlight the desired mode key.

- Touch [Auto] to select the Auto Detection mode.- Touch [2 Repeat], [4 Repeat], or [8 Repeat] to select the desired Re-

peat mode.- If you want the image upside down on the other side in 2 Repeat

mode, touch [R-Reverse] or [L- Reverse].

4 Touch [OK].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


!Details

No Image Area Erase is automatically selected on the Application popup

menu when Auto mode is selected.

2

Note

When 2 Repeat mode is selected, Page space function of Image Shift can

be used to make the desired amount of blank space between the two im-

ages on a page. For details, refer to “Adjusting Position of Copy Image

(Image Shift)” on page 8-60 .

5Touch [OK] on the Application popup menu.The Copy Screen will be restored.

6 Select the desired magnification and paper size.

!Details



When 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat is selected, the scanning area will

be a portion of the selected paper size equally divided according to the

selected mode. In this case, magnification ratio will be fixed to 1.000

(100%).




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


8 Position original.

For Auto Detect mode original, open the document feeder, then posi-tion the original FACE DOWN on the original glass.

For 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat or 8 Repeat mode original, ADF is also availa-

ble.2

Reminder

When Auto Detect mode is selected, No Image Area Erase functions au-

tomatically.

DO NOT close the document feeder.

9 Press [Start].

!Details

The Auto Detect mode may not operate properly if the lighting in the work

place is directly over the original glass. In this case, consult your service

representative about an appropriate place for installation.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


8.15 Eliminating Black Copy Marks Along Borders (Frame/ Fold Erase)

Use Frame/Fold Erase to eliminate black copy marks along borders to cleanup and improve the presentation of the copy.


2

Reminder


press [Reset].

Frameerasure

Frameerasure

Fold

erasure

Frameerasure

Frame/Fold Erasurecopying

Fold Erasurecopying

Frame Erasurecopying

General copying

Frameerasure

Set original

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


2 Touch [Frame/Fold Erase] on the Application popup menu.

The Frame/Fold Erase Screen will be displayed.

3 Touch to highlight the desired mode key.

- Touch [All sides], [Each side], or [Fold Erasure] to highlight it.

- Either of Frame erasure mode and Fold erasure mode can be se-lected in combination.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


4 Specify the erasure amount in the selected mode.

% To specify Frame Erasure (All sides) amount:

Touch to highlight [Frame], if not highlighted, then use the touch panel

keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired erasure amount ofthe Up, Down, Right, and Left sides collectively, from 1 to 300 mm in 1mm increments.

% To specify Frame Erasure (Each side) amount:

Touch to highlight [Frame], if not highlighted, then touch [Up Side],

[Right Side], [Down Side], or [Left Side]. The selected side amount willbe highlighted in the left illustration area of the screen.

Use the touch panel keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired

erasure amount, from 1 to 300 mm in 1 mm increments.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


8.16 Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (ImageCentring)

Use this function to detect the image area of the original and centre thewhole image on the copy paper making it easy to copy small pieces of paper.

Specifications for Image Centring:

- No Image Area Erase is automatically selected. Release it manually whenusing ADF to scan originals.


2Reminder


press [Reset].

2 Touch [Image Centring] on the Application popup menu.


Set originalImage Centering copying

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


!Details

No Image Area Erase will be selected automatically. When using ADF to

scan the original, touch to deselect this function.

When using the Book Copy with this function, the original smaller than

the selected paper size will be printed in the centre of the copy paper

without image division performed.



4 Select the desired magnification and paper size on the Copy Screen.

!Details






6 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN


2

Reminder

DO NOT close the ADF when No Image Area Erase is selected.

Placing original obliquely on the original glass may cause black copy

marks.

7 Press [Start].

!Details

Having Any Problem?

The Image Centring function may not operate properly if the lighting in the

work place is directly over the original glass. In this case, consult your

service representative about an appropriate place for installation.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


8.17 Printing Images Fully to the Edges (All-Image Area)

Use this function to make copies printed completely to the edges.


2

Reminder


press [Reset].

2 Touch [All-image Area] on the Application popup menu.




Original Normal copy All-Image Area copy

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


8.18 Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift)

Use Image Shift to adjust the position of copy images, e.g. for the purpose

of creating a new binding margin on originals to make it easier for filing pur-poses.

Page Space function is available only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Re-peat has been already selected. Use this function to make the desired

amount of blank space between the two images on a page.

If image loss is likely, select the Reduce & Shift mode instead of regular Im-age shift. For details, refer to “Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin(Reduce&Shift)” on page 8-63.

Specifications for Image Shift:

- Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments

- Setting in 0.1mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available.This setting change can be made on the Utility Menu Screen.

1 Select the copy mode and paper size from the Copy Screen, as re-quired.

Right

Up

Right

Down

Left

Up

Original

Down

LeftCopies

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8



2

Reminder


3 Touch [Image Shift] on the Application popup menu.

4 Touch [Image Shift] on the Image Shift Screen, then specify the shift di-rection and amount.

Touch [Front] or [Back] to specify the shift direction and amount indi-vidually; or touch [Both Sides] to specify collectively. The [Back] and

[Both Sides] keys function only for duplex copying.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


Touch to highlight the desired shift direction key in the upper right area,

then use the touch panel keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the de-sired shift amount, from 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments.

The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction

and amount to be created on the printed sheets.

When Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected,the [Page Space] key appears clear on the screen to show its availabil-

ity.

If desired, touch [Page Space] to highlight it, then enter the desired

amount using the touch panel keypad or up/down arrow key.

5 Touch [OK].




!Details

Page Space Function

Booklet

Original

2 Repeat in Repeat

Original

Page space

Page space

Pagespace

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


8.19 Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Re-duce&Shift)

Use Reduce & Shift instead of regular Image Shift to prevent image losswhen creating a binding margin.

Specifications for Reduce & Shift:

- AMS is automatically selected and cannot be released.

- Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments

- Setting in 0.1 mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available.This setting change can be made on the Utility Menu Screen.

Left binding margin

Right

Front

Up

Down

Left

Back

Right binding margin

Top binding margin

Left

Up

Down

Front

Right

Back

Left Right Left Right

Front Down UpBack

Front

Originals

Back

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


1 Select the copy mode and paper size, as required.


2

Reminder


press [Reset].

3 Touch [Image Shift] on the Application popup menu.

4 Touch [Reduce & Shift] on the Image Shift Screen, then specify the shift

direction and amount.

Touch [Front] or [Back]. In Reduce & Shift mode, the [Both Sides] key

appears dimmed to show inactivity.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


Touch to highlight the desired shift direction key, then use the touch

panel keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount,from 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments.

The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction

and amount to be printed on the printed sheets.

!Details

The AMS will automatically determine the magnification ratio according

to the shift amount specified for the front page. The shift amount and

magnification ratio determined for the front page will be automatically ap-

plied to the back page. If any positioning adjustment is required, touch

[Back] and make direction and amount change.

5 Touch [OK].




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


8.20 Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)

This function allows you to print onto output copies the desired type of

stamp, page number, numbering, and date/time at the location designatedon the screen.

The four stamp types and watermark (described in the next subsection) pro-vided on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen can be used individually or in

multiple combinations.


2

Reminder


press [Reset].

TOP SECRET

STAMP

SET NUMBERING

PAGE NUMBERING

DATE/TIME

Top-Left T-Middle T-Right

Middle-Left Middle M-Right

Lower-Left L-Middle L-Right

Printing positions

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


2 Touch [Stamp/Overlay] on the Application popup menu.

The Stamp/Overlay Screen will be displayed.

3 Touch to select the desired key in the Stamp area.

The subsequent screen will be displayed to allow you to specify the se-

lected stamp type.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


4 When selecting Stamp:

Specify the stamp type, printing position, character size and printedpage.

- Touch to highlight the desired stamp key and printing position key

on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch [Fine Adjust-ment] to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. For details, re-

fer to p. 8-70.- Touch [Character Size] to select [Bigger] or [Smaller].

- Touch [Printed Page] to designate whether to print the selectedstamp on the cover only or on all pages.- When selecting Set Numbering: Specify the numbering type, print-

ing position, character size, printed page and start number.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


- Touch to highlight the desired numbering type key and printing po-

sition key on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch [Fine Adjustment] to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. For de-tails, refer to p. 8-70.

- Touch [Character Size] to select 20 point or 30 point.

- Touch [Printed Page] to designate whether to print the selectedstamp on the cover only or on all pages.

- Touch [Start Number] to designate the starting number, if required.

For details, refer to p. 8-71.

When selecting Page Numbering:

Specify the page numbering type, printing position, character size and

type, printed page and start number.

- Touch to highlight the desired page numbering type key and print-ing position key on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch

[Fine Adjustment] to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen.For details, refer to p. 8-70.

- Touch [Change Character] to select the character size (8point,10point, 12point or 14point) and type (Gothic or Ming). For details,refer to p. 8-72.

- Touch [Printed Page] to designate whether to print the selectedstamp on the front/back cover or insertions. For details, refer top. 8-73.

- Touch [Start Number] to designate the starting number, if required.For details, refer to p. 8-71.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


When selecting Date/Time:

Specify the date/time type, printing position, character size and type,and printed page.

- Touch to highlight the desired date, time, and printing position keys

on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch [Fine Adjust-ment] to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. For details, re-

fer to p. 8-71.- Touch [Change Character] to select the character size (8point,

10point, 12point or 14point) and type (Gothic or Ming). For details,refer to p. 8-72.- Touch [Printed Page] to designate whether to print the selected

stamp on the cover only or on all pages.

5 Touch [OK].

The Stamp/Overlay Screen will be restored.

Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, ifdesired.

6 Touch [OK] on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.




!Details

Fine Adjustment Setting Screen

When [Fine Adjustment] is touched, the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen

will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


Start Number Setting Screen:

Available from Page Numbering

- When Chapter is already selected, the chapter start number canalso be specified on the Start Number Setting Screen.To enter the

start number, touch [Start Number] to highlight it, then use thetouch panel keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired startnumber for each.

- Also touch [Start Page] or [Start Chapter] to highlight it, and enterthe desired start page number or chapter number.

- Touch [OK] to return to the previous screen.

Change Printing Character Screen:

from Page Numbering or Date/Time

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


- When [Change Character] is touched, the Change Printing Charac-

ter Screen will be displayed.- Touch to select the desired key, then touch [OK] to return to the

previous screen.

Cover/Insert Print Setting Selection Screen:

from Page Numbering

- When copied/blank insertion mode of Sheet Insertion has been al-

ready selected, this screen allows you to specify whether to printthe page number on insertions, or skip them from the page count.

- Touch to select the desired key, then touch [OK] to return to the

previous screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


8.21 Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp)

Use this function to print the desired letter type obliquely in the centre of the

page (Watermark), or the numbers in the specified form repeatedly over thescanned image (Watermark Numbering).


2

Reminder


press [Reset].



Watermark Watermark Numbering

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


3 Touch [Watermark] or [Watermark Numbering], as desired.

The subsequent screen will be displayed to allow you to specify the se-lected watermark type.

4 When selecting Watermark:

Specify the desired watermark type and density.

- Touch to highlight the desired watermark key and density key onthe screen. If fine adjustment of the centred watermark position isrequired, touch [Fine Adjustment] to display the Fine Adjustment

Setting Screen. For details, refer to p. 8-71.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


When selecting Watermark Numbering:

Specify the desired watermark numbering type, density, character sizeand start number.

- Touch to highlight the desired watermark key and density key on

the screen.- Touch [Character Size] to select 20 point. or 30 point.

- Touch [Start Number] to designate the start number, if required. Fordetails, refer to p. 8-71.

5 Touch [OK].


Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, ifdesired.

6 Touch [OK] on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


8.22 Overlay an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job(Overlay)

Use this function to scan an image, then overlay the image onto each pagecopied in the job.

Specification for Overlay:

- Memory Scan mode is automatically selected.


2

Reminder


press [Reset].



1st scanned original Originals scanned2nd and later

Copies in Overlay mode

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


3 Touch [Overlay].

4 Touch [OK] on the Stamp/Overlay Screen.




The Memory Scan mode is automatically selected.

6 Select the desired paper size and magnification on the Copy Screen.

APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selectedas a magnification ratio.


8 Position the overlaying original.

Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN



The original image will be scanned into memory.

10 Position the original(s) to be overlaid.

Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWNon the original glass.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8


13 Touch [Memory Scan] on the Copy Screen to exit the Memory Scan

mode, then press [Start] to print.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


8.23 Store Image in HDD / Overlay Stored Image (OverlayMemory)

Use Overlay Memory to scan and store several images in HDD, then recallthe desired image from the HDD to overlay onto each page copied in the job.


2

Reminder


press [Reset].

Copies inOverlay Memory mode

Recall overlaying image

HDD

Output

Overlay originalsRecalled image

Image Store

Store in HDD

Overlaying image

Output

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8




3 Touch [Overlay Memory].

- The Store Image Screen will be displayed.- Proceed to step 9, when recalling only the stored image.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


4 Touch [Store Image] to display the Image Name Entry Screen.

5 Enter the desired image name.

Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired name up to 8 charac-ters. The date when you made this entry will be stored automatically.To correct an entry, touch [Del] repeatedly to delete each character,

then enter the correct name.

6 If the image name is correct, touch [OK].

The Copy Screen to store the overlaying image will be displayed.

Select the desired copy conditions.

2

Note

The popup menu may be displayed to prompt you that the entered image

name has been already used.

7 Position the overlaying original on the original glass.

!Details

The document feeder cannot be used for storing the overlaying image.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Applications 8



The Store Image Screen will be displayed.

!DetailsTo stop scanning, press [STOP].

The machine automatically starts to store the overlaying image data in

the HDD. The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will resume when the

storing function is completed.

To continue to store the overlaying image data, return to step 4.

9 Touch to select the desired overlaying image data, then touch [OK].


!Details

Delete Image Key on the Overlay Image Selection Screen

If the [Delete Image] key is displayed on the Overlay Image Selection

Screen, you can delete the stored image and name. Select the image

name using up/down arrow key to scroll, then touch Delete Image.

10 Touch [OK] to return to the Application popup menu.


The Memory Scan mode is automatically selected, and APS and AMSare released.

Set the desired conditions on the Copy Screen.


13 Position the original(s) to be overlaid.

Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN




16 Touch Memory Scan to exit the Memory Scan mode, then press [Start]

to print.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8 Applications


!Details

Popup Menu for Name Duplication

If the popup menu with [Yes] and [No] keys is displayed instead of the

Copy Screen, the entered name is duplicated. Touch Yes to enter a newname, or No to create a duplicate name.

If the popup menu with [OK] key is displayed, the entered name is dupli-

cated. Touch [OK], then enter a new name.

Changing the popup menu for duplicate name and displaying the [Delete]

Image key is available in the Utility mode.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


9Setting Output Methods

Copier

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Setting Output Methods 9

bizhub PRO 1050 9-3


9.1 Copy Conditions Incompatible with Output Modes

C o p y C o n d i t i o n s I n c o m p a t i b l e

w i t h

O u t p u t M o d e s

C o p y M o d e / M a g n i f i c a t i o n S p e c i a l I m a g e O r i g i n a l S e t t i n g

1

-

1

1

-

2

2

-

1

2

-

2

M

e

m

o

r

y

S

c

a

n

M

o

d

e

(

G

l

a

s

s

)

M

e

m

o

r

y

S

c

a

n

M

o

d

e

(

A

D

F

)

A

P

S

A

M

S

1

.

0

0

0

M

a

g

n

i

f

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

Z

O

O

M

P

r

e

s

e

t

M

a

g

n

i

f

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

R

o

t

a

t

i

o

n

M

a

n

u

a

l

D

e

n

s

i

t

y

A

E

P

r

e

s

e

t

D

e

n

s

i

t

y

T

e

x

t

&

P

h

o

t

o

(

E

n

h

a

n

c

e

)

L

o

w

C

o

n

t

r

a

s

t

P

h

o

t

o

(

*

3

)

T

e

x

t

B

a

c

k

g

r

o

u

n

d

A

d

j

u

s

t

(

+

)

B

a

c

k

g

r

o

u

n

d

A

d

j

u

s

t

(

-

)

M

i

x

e

d

O

r

i

g

i

n

a

l

Z

-

F

o

l

d

e

d

O

r

i

g

i

n

a

l

C

u

s

t

o

m

S

i

z

e

C

u

s

t

o

m

S

i

z

e

(

F

u

l

l

A

r

e

a

)

T

a

b

P

a

p

e

r

O

u

t

p

u

t

A

p

p

l

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

C o l l a t e d ( O f f s e t )

U n c o l l a t e d

C o l l a t e d ( R o t a t i o n ) u u u u

U n c o l l a t e d ( R o t a t i o n ) u u u u

1 S t a p l i n g ( U p p e r L e f t ) * 5

1 S t a p l i n g ( U p p e r R i g h t ) * 5

2 S t a p l i n g ( T o p ) * 5

2 S t a p l i n g ( L e f t ) * 5

2 S t a p l i n g ( R i g h t ) * 5

Z - F o l d

F o l d i n g ( I n s i d e P r i n t )

F o l d i n g ( O u t s i d e P r i n t )

L e t t e r F o l d - i n ( I n s i d e P r i n t )

L e t t e r F o l d - i n ( O u t s i d e P r i n t )

L e t t e r F o l d - o u t ( I n s i d e P r i n t )

L e t t e r F o l d - o u t ( O u t s i d e P r i n t )

D o u b l e P a r a l l e l ( I n s i d e P r i n t )

D o u b l e P a r a l l e l ( O u t s i d e P r i n t )

G a t e ( I n s i d e P r i n t )

G a t e ( O u t s i d e P r i n t )

H o l e - P u n c h ( R i g h t ) * 5

H o l e - P u n c h ( L e f t ) * 5

H o l e - P u n c h ( T o p ) * 5

F a c e U p x x

F a c e D o w n

1 t o N

N t o 1

R i g h t & L e f t B i n d i n g

U p p e r B i n d i n g

H D D ( * 1 )

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



9-4 bizhub PRO 1050


P

r

o

g

r

a

m

J

o

b

(

F

i

r

s

t

j

o

b

)

S

h

e

e

t

I

n

s

e

r

t

i

o

n

I

n

s

e

r

t

i

o

n

u

s

i

n

g

P

I

F

r

o

n

t

C

o

v

e

r

B

a

c

k

C

o

v

e

r

F

r

o

n

t

P

I

(

U

p

p

e

r

/

L

o

w

e

r

)

B

a

c

k

P

I

(

U

p

p

e

r

/

L

o

w

e

r

)

C

h

a

p

t

e

r

C

h

a

p

t

e

r

(

P

r

i

n

t

I

n

s

e

r

t

i

o

n

)

C

o

m

b

i

n

a

t

i

o

n

B

o

o

k

l

e

t

B

o

o

k

l

e

t

(

A

d

h

e

s

i

v

e

B

i

n

d

i

n

g

)

O

H

P

I

n

t

e

r

l

e

a

v

e

I

m

a

g

e

I

n

s

e

r

t

B

o

o

k

C

o

p

y

N

e

g

.

P

o

s

.

R

e

v

e

r

s

e

R

e

p

e

a

t

R

e

p

e

a

t

(

A

u

t

o

)

(

*

4

)

R

e

p

e

a

t

(

2

/

4

/

8

R

e

p

e

a

t

)

F

r

a

m

e

E

r

a

s

u

r

e

F

o

l

d

E

r

a

s

u

r

e

I

m

a

g

e

C

e

n

t

r

i

n

g

I

m

a

g

e

S

h

i

f

t

R

e

d

u

c

e

&

S

h

i

f

t

N

o

n

-

I

m

a

g

e

A

r

e

a

E

r

a

s

e

A

l

l

-

I

m

a

g

e

A

r

e

a

S

t

a

m

p

P

a

g

e

N

u

m

b

e

r

i

n

g

S

e

t

N

u

m

b

e

r

i

n

g

D

a

t

e

W

a

t

e

r

m

a

r

k

W

a

t

e

r

m

a

r

k

/

N

u

m

b

e

r

i

n

g

O

v

e

r

l

a

y

M

e

m

o

r

y

O

v

e

r

l

a

y

(

*

2

)

u

u u u u u u u u u u u u u

u u u - - u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u

u u u - - u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u

u

c

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x x x

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 9-5


O u t p u t M o d e s


C

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

(

O

f

f

s

e

t

)

U

n

c

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

C

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

(

R

o

t

a

t

i

o

n

)

U

n

c

o

l

l

a

t

e

d

(

R

o

t

a

t

i

o

n

)

1

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

U

p

p

e

r

L

e

f

t

)

1

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

U

p

p

e

r

R

i

g

h

t

)

2

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

T

o

p

)

2

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

L

e

f

t

)

2

S

t

a

p

l

i

n

g

(

R

i

g

h

t

)

Z

-

F

o

l

d

F

o

l

d

i

n

g

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

F

o

l

d

i

n

g

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

i

n

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

i

n

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

o

u

t

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

L

e

t

t

e

r

F

o

l

d

-

o

u

t

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

D

o

u

b

l

e

P

a

r

a

l

l

e

l

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

D

o

u

b

l

e

P

a

r

a

l

l

e

l

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

G

a

t

e

(

I

n

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

G

a

t

e

(

O

u

t

s

i

d

e

P

r

i

n

t

)

H

o

l

e

-

P

u

n

c

h

(

R

i

g

h

t

)

H

o

l

e

-

P

u

n

c

h

(

L

e

f

t

)

H

o

l

e

-

P

u

n

c

h

(

T

o

p

)

F

a

c

e

U

p

F

a

c

e

D

o

w

n

O

u

t

p

u

t

A

p

p

l

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

C o l l a t e d ( O f f s e t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z

U n c o l l a t e d z - -

C o l l a t e d ( R o t a t i o n ) - - z - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

U n c o l l a t e d ( R o t a t i o n ) - - z - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 S t a p l i n g ( U p p e r L e f t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z c x

1 S t a p l i n g ( U p p e r R i g h t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z c x

2 S t a p l i n g ( T o p ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z c c x

2 S t a p l i n g ( L e f t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z c c x

2 S t a p l i n g ( R i g h t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z c c x

Z - F o l d z - - z z z z z z z z z z z x

F o l d i n g ( I n s i d e P r i n t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

F o l d i n g ( O u t s i d e P r i n t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

L e t t e r F o l d - i n ( I n s i d e P r i n t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

L e t t e r F o l d - i n ( O u t s i d e P r i n t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

L e t t e r F o l d - o u t ( I n s i d e P r i n t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

L e t t e r F o l d - o u t ( O u t s i d e P r i n t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

D o u b l e P a r a l l e l ( I n s i d e P r i n t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

D o u b l e P a r a l l e l ( O u t s i d e P r i n t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

G a t e ( I n s i d e P r i n t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

G a t e ( O u t s i d e P r i n t ) z - - z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

H o l e - P u n c h ( R i g h t ) c c c z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

H o l e - P u n c h ( L e f t ) c c c z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

H o l e - P u n c h ( T o p ) c c z z z z z z z z z z z z z x

F a c e U p x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x z

F a c e D o w n z

1 t o N

N t o 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

R i g h t & L e f t B i n d i n g x x

U p p e r B i n d i n g x x x x

H D D ( * 1 )

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



9-6 bizhub PRO 1050


1

t

o

N

N

t

o

1

R

i

g

h

t

&

L

e

f

t

B

i

n

d

i

n

g

U

p

p

e

r

B

i

n

d

i

n

g

H

D

D

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x x

x x

x x

x

x

Description

None Compatible


c Output message



*! Limited to Job Store function in Copy mode.


*3 Available only when Booklet is selected.

*4 Selecting Auto in Repeat, Non-Image Area Erase will also be selected automaticallyand cannot be released.

*5 Rotation is unavailable if staple or punch position will be interfered.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 9-7

9.2 Selecting an Output Tray

This section describes how to select an output tray.

Optional equipment combinations and the default output tray are as follows.

- FS-503 Finisher only:

FS-503 Finisher primary (main) tray

- FD-501 Folding Unit + FS-503 Finisher :FS-503 Finisher primary (main) tray

- LS-502 Large Capacity Stacker only :LS-502 Large Capacity Stacker

- LS-501 Large Capacity Stacker + FS-503 Finisher :FS-503 Finisher primary (main) tray

- LS-501+LS-502 Large Capacity Stacker :LS-501 Large Capacity Stacker

- LS-501+LS-501 Large Capacity Stacker + FS-503 Finisher:

FS-503 Finisher primary (main) tray

1 Touch [Output Application] on the Copy Screen.

The Output Application Screen appears.

Trays that can output paper will be have keys on the front image of themachine, and the tray that is currently set to output paper is shown witha depressed key.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



9-8 bizhub PRO 1050

2 Touch [Output Tray].

An Output Tray Selection Screen reflecting the combination of optionaldevices will appear.

3 Select the desired output tray.

Touch the desired tray position key to select it.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf



bizhub PRO 1050 9-9

Machine with LS-502 Large Capacity Stacker (1 unit), or with

LS-501 Large Capacity Stacker + FS-503 Finisher:

In addition to the tray position key, the [Pile Setting] key is shown. If youtouch [Pile Setting], a popup screen will appear. Touch [Permit] if you

want to allow paper from several jobs to pile up in the large capacity

stacker, or touch [Prohibit] if you do not.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5 Touch [OK] on the Output Application Screen.

It will return to the Copy Screen.

2

ReminderBe careful not to exceed the finisher tray / stacker capacity when select-

ing the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.3 Setting Binding Direction for Duplex Copies

When setting duplex mode (simplex % duplex / duplex% duplex), a binding

direction must be selected. It should be set when making duplex copies withupper binding (front and back sides have the opposite side up) from simplex

or duplex originals of right/left binding (front and back sides have the sameside up).

2

Note

If you want to make duplex copies with of right/left binding (front and

back sides have the same side up) from duplex originals with upper bind-

ing (front and back sides have the opposite side up), settings for duplex

originals and binding direction are needed. For details, refer to “Specify-

ing Original Direction” on page 6-7 .

Specifications for Binding Direction:

- Upper binding for duplex printing is available only when duplex mode isselected.

- If the machine is reset, the binding mode will go back to right/left binding.

Binding Direction for Duplex copying

R&L Upper

OriginalsCopies

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf






7 Touch [Upper] to select it.

8 Touch [OK].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.4 Sorting / Stapling Copies (FS-503 Finisher)

The FS-503 Finisher has a primary (main) tray and a secondary (sub) tray,

each of which has the following output modes.

Output to the Primary (Main) Tray:- Non-sort:

Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are

not selected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by

sorted sets.

- Collated:

Collated mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having eachsorted set offset by 30mm upon exit.

- Uncollated:

Uncollated mode groups together multiple copies of each original andoffsets the sets by 30mm upon exit.

- Staple:

Staple mode offsets and staples each sorted set.

Combined with the output modes above except staple mode, you can alsochoose to output face up or face down, and output front to back or back tofront.

Example:Make 3 copied setsfrom 4 original sheets

Offset by 30mm

Offset by 30mm1 obliquestaple

2 staples

UncollatedCollatedStapleNon-sort

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Output to the Secondary (Sub) Tray

- Collated:

Collated mode outputs multiple copies of the original set. No offset out-put is available.

- Uncollated:

Uncollated mode groups together multiple copies of each original. Nooffset output is available.

Combined with the output modes above, you can also choose to output faceup or face down, and output front to back or back to front.

This section describes the following output methods:

- Non-sort / Collated / Uncollated output to the primary (main) tray

- Stapled output to the primary (main) tray

- Collated / Uncollated output to the secondary (sub) tray

Example:Make 3 copied sets

Face downcollated

Face downuncollated

Face upcollated

Face upuncollated

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.4.1 Non-sort / Collated / Uncollated Output to the Primary(Main) Tray

A machine with FS-503 Finisher installed is set to collate output to the prima-ry (main) tray by default, regardless of whether or not other optional devices

are attached. Please select an output mode by following the procedures de-scribed below.

2

Note

You can change the initial output settings. For details, refer to “01 Initial

Setting” on page 16-30 .

Specifications for Non-sort / Collated / Uncollated Output to the Prima-

ry (Main) Tray - Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 12"x18", 11"x17",

8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, standard index pa-per, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)

- Paper weight: 50 - 244 g/m2

- The primary (main) tray's specifications are described separately. For de-

tails, refer to “Paper Information” on page 3-3.



The output tray location is indicated by a depressed key on the front

image of the machine. If the primary (main) tray is not selected as the

output tray, touch Output Tray to select it.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2

Note

Changing output trays is described separately. For details, refer to “Se-

lecting an Output Tray” on page 9-7 .

2 Select an output mode.

- For non-sort output, cancel both [Collated] and [Uncollated].

- For collated output, touch [Collated] to select it.- For uncollated output, touch [Uncollated] to select it.

- Select output face (Face Down / Face Up), and output order (1 to N / N to 1) as needed.


The icon of the specified output application appears on the CopyScreen.

2Reminder

The primary (main) tray gradually goes down while printed materials out-

put. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray

on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to

the finisher.

2

Reminder

Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the

print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.4.2 Stapling Output to the Primary (Main) Tray

Copies will be stapled in this mode. Follow the procedures below to select

stapling position and number of staples: upper left/upper right 1 stapling,left/up/right 2 stapling.

Specifications for Stapling Output to the Primary (Main) Tray

- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",

8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K, wide size paper (max. 324mm x460mm)


- Number of sheets to be stapled: Maximum 100 sheets (80 g/m2 paper)

- Stapling position: 1 at the back (45°), 1 at the front, 2 in the centre

- Stapling method: Inline clinch (staple cutting method)

- Number of cut staples: 5,000 or more (cut staples must be disposed ofby a service centre during regular maintenance.)

- The primary (main) tray's specifications are described separately. For de-tails, refer to “Paper Information” on page 3-3.

1 Touch [Staple] on the Copy Screen.

Stapled sheets will be delivered to the primary (main) tray. The Output

Application Icon shows the stapling position.

If you want to change stapling style and position, proceed to the fol-lowing steps.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Touch [Output Application].


3 Touch [Stapling] and select stapling style and position.

The Stapling Selection Screen appears.

Touch any stapling position key to select it.

!Details

If you touch [Cancel], it returns to the previous setting.

If you touch [Function Off], stapling output will be turned off but the sta-

pling position will be kept in memory.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




4 Touch [OK].

It will return to the Output Application Screen.



2

Reminder

The primary (main) tray gradually goes down while printed materials out-

put. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray

on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to

the finisher.

2

Reminder



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.4.3 Collated / Uncollated Output to the Secondary (Sub) Tray

A machine with FS-503 Finisher installed is set to collate output to the prima-

ry (main) tray by default, regardless of whether or not other optional devicesare attached. Please change the output tray and select an output mode byfollowing the procedures described below.

Specifications for Collated / Uncollated Output to the Secondary (Sub)Tray

- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, A5R, B5R, B6R, 12"x18",11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, 8K, 16K,16KR, standard tab paper, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)


- The secondary (sub) tray's specifications are described separately. Fordetails, refer to “Paper Information” on page 3-3.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Select the secondary (sub) tray as the output tray.

Touch [Output Tray] to open the Output Tray Selection Screen. Touchthe tray position key of the secondary (sub) tray to select it. Touch [OK].


- For collated output, touch Collated to select it.

- For uncollated output, touch Uncollated to select it.- Select output face (Face Down / Face Up), and output order (1 to N

/ N to 1) as needed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf






!Details



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.5 Loading / Sorting Large Numbers of Sheets (LS-501/ LS-502)

The LS-501/LS-502 Large Capacity Stacker has a stacker (on the carriage)and a secondary (sub) tray, each of which has the following output modes.

Output to the Stacker

- Non-sort:

Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes arenot selected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by

sorted sets.

- Collated:

Collated mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having eachsorted set offset by 20mm upon exit.

- Uncollated: Uncollated mode groups together multiple copies of each original andoffsets the sets upon exit.

Combined with the output modes above, you can also choose to output face

up or face down, and output front to back or back to front.

Output to the Secondary (Sub) Tray

- Collated:

Collated mode outputs multiple copies of the original set. No offset out-

put is available.- Uncollated:

Uncollated mode groups together multiple copies of each original. Nooffset output is available.

Combined with the output modes above, you can also choose to output face

up or face down, and output front to back or back to front.

Specifications for Loading / Sorting Large Numbers of Sheets

Stacker

- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)


- Number of sheets to be stacked:

- 5,000 sheets (A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11",8.5"x11"R, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)

- 2,000 sheets (B5, A5)

- Different sizes of paper cannot be loaded at the same time.

- To remove paper, open the front door and pull out the base car. If twounits are connected, paper can be removed from one unit while the other

is operating.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- The stacker's specifications are described separately. For details, refer to

“Paper Information” on page 3-3.

Secondary (sub) tray

- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, 12"x18",

11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5x8.5, 8K, 16K, 16KR, stand-ard tab paper, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)


- Loading capacity: Maximum 200 sheets

- The secondary (sub) tray's specifications are described separately. Fordetails, refer to “Paper Information” on page 3-3.



The output tray location is indicated by a depressed key on the front

image of the machine. If the primary (main) tray is not selected as theoutput tray, touch [Output Tray] to select it.

2

Note

Changing output trays is described separately. For details, refer to “Se-

lecting an Output Tray” on page 9-7 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





- For unsorted output, cancel both [Collated] and [Uncollated].- For collated output, touch [Collated] to select it.- For uncollated output, touch [Uncollated] to select it.

- Select output face (Face Down / Face Up), and output order (1 to N / N to 1) as needed.



2

Reminder

Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray / stacker capacity when select-

ing the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.6 Punching File Holes in Copies / Folding Copies(FD-501)

There are three elements for output settings:

- Intermediary processing

- Output mode- Output tray position

The FD-501 Folding Unit does the intermediary processing, while FS-503

Finisher sets an output mode and changes output tray position.

The following punch/folding patterns are available:

- Punch:

2 or 4 holes can be punched in sheets for filing purposes. Set left/right/ top position according to the placement of sheets.

- Folding: Six folding types are available - Z-Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out,

Double Parallel, Gate, and Folding. Choose to print outside the fold (out-

side print) or inside (inside print) for each folding mode except Z-fold.

This section describes how to set intermediary processing for punchingholes in copies and folding copies.

FoldingDouble ParallelLetter Fold-in

GateLetter Fold-outZ-Fold

80 mm

80 mm

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.6.1 Punching File Holes in Copies

Copies will be punched in this mode. Follow the procedures below to select

2- or 4-hole punch and punch position.

Specifications for Punching Copies:

- Punch holes: 2 / 4- Punch hole diameter: 2-hole 6.5 mm / 4-hole 8.0 mm

- Punch hole pitch: 80 mm

- Hole position adjustment range: ±4 mm (error 0.2mm)

- Paper size:

- 2-hole: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 12"x18", 11"x17",8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K

- 4-hole: A3, B4, A4, B5, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x11", 8K, 16K


- Punch waste capacity: 10,000 punches

- Tab paper and other kinds of paper placed on the post inserter can alsobe punched.

- Punching can be combined with the folding function.

- Punched sheets will be delivered to FS-503 Finisher’s primary (main) tray

/ secondary (sub) tray or to the secondary (sub) tray on the left side of FD-501 Folding unit.

1 Touch [Punch] on the Copy Screen

The Output Application Icon shows the number of punch holes andpunch position.

If you want to change number of punch holes and position, proceed tothe following steps.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Touch [Output Application].


3 Touch [Punch] and select the number of punch holes and position.

The Hole-Punch Screen appears.

Touch any punch key to select it.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




4 Touch [OK].


!DetailsIf you touch [Cancel], it returns to the previous setting.

If you touch [Function Off], punch output will be turned off but the select-

ed punch settings will be kept in memory.



2

Reminder

Punched sheets will be delivered to FS-503 Finisher's primary (main) tray

/ secondary (sub) tray or to the secondary (sub) tray on the left side of FD-

501 Folding unit. Be careful not to exceed the capacity of each tray when

selecting the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be

caused.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.6.2 Folding Copies

Copies will be folded in this mode. Follow the procedures below to select

from six folding types.

Specifications for Folding Copies:

- Folding types: Z-Fold, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out, Double Parallel,Gate, Folding

- Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8K

- Paper weight:

- Z-Fold / Letter Fold-in / Letter Fold-out / Folding: 50 - 130 g/m2

- Double Parallel / Gate: 50 - 91 g/m2

- Sheets placed on the post inserter can also be folded.

- Folding can be combined with the punching function.

- Normally folded or Z-folded sheets will be delivered to the FS-503 Finish-er’s primary (main) tray / secondary (sub) tray or to the secondary (sub)

tray on the left side of FD-501 Folding unit.

- Using Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Double parallel, or Gate, the foldedsheets will be delivered only to the secondary (sub) tray on the left side

of FD-501 Folding unit.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Touch [Folding] to select a folding type.

The Folding Mode Screen appears.

Touch any punch key to select it.

3 Touch [OK].


!Details

If you touch [Cancel,] it returns to the previous setting.

If you touch [Function Off], folding output will be turned off but the select-

ed folding settings will be kept in memory.



2

Reminder

Normally folded or Z-folded sheets will be delivered to FS-503 Finisher's

primary (main) tray / secondary (sub) tray or to the secondary (sub) tray

on the left side of FD-501 Folding unit. Using Letter fold-in, Letter fold-

out, Double parallel, or Gate, the folded sheets will be delivered only to

the secondary (sub) tray on the left side of FD-501 Folding unit.

Be careful not to exceed the capacity of each tray when selecting the


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.7 Output with Cover Sheet (Post Inserter)

This is the post inserter function of the FD-501 Folding Unit. Cover sheets

placed in the top and bottom trays of the post inserter will be attached as afront cover or back cover to output copies. It can create a book with a staple

binding with a cover and chapter title pages. You can also use the Sheet In-sertion's Cover mode to make a booklet with cover sheets attached.

Specifications for Output with Cover Sheet:

- Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12"x18", 11"x17",

8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K, 16KR, standard tabpaper, wide size paper (maximum 324 x 460 mm)


- Paper: PPC paper, fine paper, coated paper, trace paper

- Upper/lower paper feed tray capacity: Max. 500 sheets each (80 g/m2

paper)

- Multi-feed detection function.

1 Place paper on the upper and lower

trays of the post inserter.

2

Reminder

Do not load more than 500 sheets (80

g/m 2 ) for each of the upper and lower

trays. Do not load above the load limitline on the guide plate.

Copied set withcover attached instaple mode

Copied set withcover attached

Cover sheet

Lower tray

Upper tray

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Use the sheet insertion or booklet function to place a cover sheet.

2

Reminder

Copies will be delivered to the FS-503 Finisher's primary (main) tray. Becareful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the print

quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




9.8 Using Folder/Finisher Functions Manually

If the optional FD-501 Folding Unit and the FS-503 Finisher are installed, you

can load paper in the upper tray of the post inserter and manually staple,punch, or fold copies.

Specifications for Using Folder/Finisher Functions Manually:- When using folder/finisher functions manually, paper should be placed

only in the upper tray of the post inserter.

- Multi-feed detection is a feature that automatically stops the machine ifmore than one sheet is fed at a time. The post inserter is designed to de-tect multi-feeding. Coated paper and other kinds of smooth surface pa-

per may activate this function even if a single sheet is fed, stopping themachine. Should this case occur frequently, press the Multi-Feed Detec-tion button and light up the lower lamp, in order to turn the function OFF.

- Paper specifications for 1 or 2 stapling– Paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",

8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K– Paper weight: 50 - 244 g/m2

– Number of sheets to be stapled: Maximum 100 sheets (80 g/m2 )

- Paper specifications for punching– Paper size:

– 2-hole: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 12"x18", 11"x17",8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K

– 4-hole: A3, B4, A4, B5, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x11", 8K, 16K– Paper weight: 50 - 209 g/m2

- Paper specifications for folding

– Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8K– Paper weight:

– Z-Fold / Letter Fold-in / Letter Fold-out / Folding: 50 - 130 g/m2

– Double Parallel / Gate: 50 - 91 g/m2

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




1 Place paper in the upper tray of thepost inserter.

- 1 or 2 stapling:

Place paper face up.- Punching:

Place paper face up.- Folding:

Place the surface to be inside the

fold face up.

Align the guide plate with the paper.

1 Stapling 2 Holes Punch Z-Fold Letter Fold-in Gate

2 Stapling 3 Holes Punch Letter Fold out

FoldingDoubleParallel

Function

FunctionON

Multi-Feed

OFF

Detection

Multi-Feed

Staple Selection

Punch selectionbutton

Fold Selection

Start/Stop buttonDetection button

button button

Upper tray

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Press the [Start/Stop] button.

If multi-feeding is detected and the

machine stops even if single sheet isfed, press the Multi-Feed Detectionbutton to turn on the lamp below.

!Details

To interrupt the operation, press the

Start/Stop button again.

Start/Stop button

Multi-Feed Detection button

ON

OFF

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


10 Advanced Information

Copier

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Advanced Information 10



10.1 Checking Feature Selections by Proof CopyingUse Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before making multi-

ple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the resultsof the copying selections.

Specifications for Proof Copy:

- Proof copy is available when using ADF, or when using Memory Scan

mode for multiple originals or originals to be scanned from original glass.

1 Select the desired copy conditions on the Copy Screen, then position

originals in the ADF.

Or, use Memory Scan mode to scan all originals.

2 Press [Proof Copy] on the control panel.

A sample copy will be output while scanning originals in the ADF.

If Memory Scan mode has been used, a sample set will be delivered

immediately.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




10.2 Checking Feature Selections Before Copying (CheckMode)

Display the Check Screen to check the feature selections you made, and useProof Copy to make a sample copy if needed, before making multiple copies.

This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the cop-ying selections.

Specifications for Check Mode:

- Proof copy is available when using ADF, or when using Memory Scanmode for multiple originals or originals to be scanned from original glass.

1 Select the desired copy conditions on the Copy Screen.

2 Press [Mode Check] on the control panel to display the Check Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- Check the job settings on the screen.

- If [Next] is active on the screen, touch it to proceed to the nextpage.

- If making any setting change from the Check Screen, proceed to

the next step.

- If releasing any application function from the Check Screen, pro-ceed to step 4.

- If a sample copy is needed, proceed to step 5.

- If settings are OK, proceed to step 7.

3 Change the settings from the Check Screen.

- Touch the desired copying condition key (Basic Setting/ Output Ap-

plication/ Special Image/ Application) on the Check Screen, thentouch [Change Setting].

- The touch panel will display an appropriate screen to change the

copying condition selected. Change the setting as desired, thenpress [Check] to restore the Check Screen to return to the checkingsteps.

!Details

When [Bookmark] has been checked on a subsequent screen, selecting

the application function key will jump to that screen. See p. 11-6 for de-

tails.

2

ReminderDo not press [Stop] or [Reset] to change the setting, or all the settings will

restore the initial condition.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- If making a set or sample copy, proceed to step 5.

- To start printing without proofcopying, proceed to step 7.

4 Release Application functions.

- Touch the desired application function key on the Check Screen tohighlight it, then touch [Release Setting].

- The confirmation screen will appear on the Check Screen.

- Touch [Yes] to cancel the function, or [No] to restore.

!Details

The following application functions can be released by touching [Release

Setting]: Program Job, No Image Area Erase, Neg. Pos. Reverse, Image

Centring, All-Image Area, Overlay.

- If making a sample copy, proceed to the next step.- To start printing, proceed to step 7.

5 Make a sample copy.

- Position originals in the ADF. Or, use Memory Scan mode to scanall originals.

- Press [Proof Copy] on the control panel or touch [Proof Copy] onthe Check Screen.

- A sample copy will be output.

!DetailsPress [Stop] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the scanned im-

age data will not be deleted from memory.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- You cannot change or release selections that appeared dimmed af-

ter proof copying.

!Details

If the desired selection cannot be changed, press [Stop] to delete all thedata in memory, then press [Reset] to restart the job setting.

- If any setting change is required, return to step 3, then repeat proofcopying, as required.

- If the copy result is satisfactory, touch [Close] on the Check Screen

to return to the Copy Screen, then proceed to the next step.

6 Change the print quantity, as required.

7 Position originals, then press [Start].

If proof copying has been made, the machine will simply start printingwithout scanning originals.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




10.3 Interrupt Copying

Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple

job. When interrupt copying is completed, the settings for the previous jobrestore automatically and the Copy Screen displays.

Specification for Interrupt Mode:- The Interrupt mode cannot be selected with the following copier condi-

tions:– Machine is not operating printing or scanning job.

– Overlay Memory is in use.– he Call for Service message displays or a paper misfeed occurs.– Already using Interrupt mode.

- Reserve job cannot be operated in Interrupt mode.

- Auto Low Power or Auto Shut-off will not function during Interrupt mode.

1 Press [Interrupt] on the control panel.

- The [Interrupt] LED starts flashing, then keeps lighted when ma-

chine is ready for Interrupt mode.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- The Copy Screen for Interrupt copying will be displayed.

2 Set copy conditions, as desired.

All copy conditions except Reserve mode can be specified.

3 Position original(s), then press [Start] to start the interrupt copying.

4 When Interrupt copying is completed, press [Interrupt] again.

The [Interrupt] LED turns out and the settings of the initial job will be re-stored on the Copy Screen.

5 Press [Start] to resume copying.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




10.4 Storing and Recalling Job Conditions (Mode Memory)

Use Mode Memory to store up to 30 frequently used copy job settings, which

can be recalled at any time. The stored jobs can be given alphabeticalnames.

10.4.1 Storing Job Conditions

Follow the procedure below to store the copy job setting.

Specifications for Storing Job Conditions:

- Available settings: Basic setting, Original Setting, Special Image, Appli-

cation, Output Application, Print quantity

- Stored job is given a job number (01 ~ 30) and alphabetical name (dis-

pensable).

- Up to 30 jobs can be stored.

1 Make job selections from the Copy Screen.

2 Press [Mode Memory] on the control panel.

The Mode Memory Screen will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Touch [Store].

The Job Store Check Screen will be displayed.

4 Review the settings, then touch [OK].

The Mode Memory Screen will be restored.

!Details

If any correction is required, touch [Cancel] to return to the Copy Screen.

Make new selections, then restart the operation from step 2.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5 Touch the desired job key, then touch [OK].

- The job keys numbered from 01 to 18 are displayed on the screen.- Touching [Next] will display the keys from 19 to 30.- A blank keys without a lock icon indicate that no job is stored under

that key, and a named job without a lock icon displayed can beoverwritten.

- The key with a lock icon displayed is locked and cannot be select-ed.

- Touch [OK] to proceed to the Name Input Screen.

6 Enter a job name, then touch [OK].

- Enter a job name in up to 16 characters, using the touch panel al-phabet keypad.

- Use arrow keys* and) to move the cursor, and use Shift to enter

upper case letters or symbols.

Lock icon

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- Touch [OK].

- The Mode Memory Screen will be restored.- Check that the job name has been correctly entered.

!DetailsIf you do not wish to enter a name, simply touch [OK]. The key displays

16 asterisks (*) in place of a name.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




10.4.2 Recalling Stored Job Settings

Follow the procedure below to recall jobs that are already stored.

Specifications for Recalling Job Conditions:

- The Mode Memory Screen can be displayed only from the Copy Screen.

If any other screen such as Machine Status Screen is displayed, pressing[Mode Memory] will be ignored.

1 Touch [COPY] tab to display the Copy Screen, then press [Mode Mem-

ory] on the control panel.


2 Touch a job number key to select a job you want to recall.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- The job keys numbered from 01 to 18 are displayed on the screen.

- Touching [Next] will display the keys from 19 to 30.- The desired job can also be selected by entering two-digit number

from the control panel keypad.

3 Touch [Job Check].

The Job Recall Check Screen displays to enable you to review the set-tings.

4 Touch [OK].

The settings of the selected job will be recalled on the restored Copy

Screen.

5 Position original(s), then press [Start] to print.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




10.5 Recalling Previous Job Settings

Follow the procedure below to copy with a previous job settings.

Specifications for Recalling Previous Job Settings:

- Only the last-completed output job settings can be recalled as the previ-

ous job settings. Non-completed job or reserve job settings cannot be re-called, even if the setting operations have been made last.

- The previous job settings can be recalled even after the machine power

is turned off then on.

1 Press [Mode Memory] on the control panel.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Touch Pre-Job Recall.

The [Job Check] key will appear on the screen.

3 Touch [Job Check] to review the settings.

- The Job Recall Check Screen will be displayed.

- Check the settings of the previous job on the screen.

2

Note

Recalled settings can be altered from this screen. For details, “Change

the settings from the Check Screen.” on page 10-6 .

4 Touch [OK].

The settings of the previous output job will be recalled on the Copy

Screen.

5 Position original(s), then press [Start].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




10.6 Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode)

The Help Screen provides you with the information about copy job setting

procedure, toner and paper supply, and control panel and touch panel keyoperation.

Help Screen comprises the following menu items.- 01 Copy

provides information on function and operation of the keys on CopyScreen.

- 02 Scanner provides information on function and operation of the keys on Scanner

Screen.

- 03 Store

provides information on function and operation of the keys on Store

Screen.- 04 Recall

provides information on function and operation of the keys on RecallScreen.

- 05 Job List provides information on function and operation of the keys on Job List

Screen.

- 06 Machine

provides information on function and operation of the keys on Machine

Status Screen.- 07 Hard keys

provides information on function and operation of the keys on control

panel.

- 08 Parts and supplies provides information on adding toner, loading paper, adding staples, and

emptying punch trash basket.

The items 01~08 will be displayed on top page of the Help Screen.

Screen key information (01~06) can also be displayed from each screen bypressing [Help] on the control panel.

To reach item 07 or 08 from any subordinate Help Screens, touch [Top Menu]

to display the top page, then select the desired item.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




10.6.1 To Display Help Screen

% Pressing [Help] when Machine Status Screen is displayed:

% Pressing [Help] when Copy Screen is displayed:

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Top Page of the Help Screen:

This screen appears when [Top Menu] on the subordinate Help Screen istouched.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




10.7 Adjusting Response Time of Touch Keys(Accessibility)

This machine can sets the desired interval between touching the screen keyand machine response in advance.

Pressing the Accessibility key on the control panel will select this interval, sothat the machine will respond to the touch key operation only when the key

is kept touched for a specified period of time.

This function is convenient for physically handicapped users who have diffi-culty in touching keys with accuracy.

!Details

For details, refer to “06 Key Response Time” on page 16-11 .

Specifications for Accessibility:

- Response time can be selected from Normal/ 0.5 second/ 1 second/ 2

seconds/ 3 seconds.

1 Press [Accessibility] on the control panel.

The Accessibility LED lights in green to indicate that the specified re-sponse time is set on the machine.

!Details

If Normal is selected as response time, pressing [Accessibility] will not

make any change in the touch key operation.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 To deactivated this function, press [Accessibility] for one second or

longer.

The Accessibility LED goes off, and normal response time will be re-

stored in touch key operation.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


11Machine Status Screen

Setting

POD Administrator

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Machine Status Screen Setting 11


11 Machine Status Screen Setting

11.1 Machine Status Screen Setting OutlinesThe [Paper Set], [Adjustment], and [Controller] keys are located at the bottom

of the Machine Status Screen, to display each setting screen.

Paper Set

The Paper Set popup screen is displayed.

Set the tray size, paper type/weight, air assist on/off of the tray that paper is

loaded. For the details, refer to “Paper Setting Outlines” on page 12-3.

!Details

You may set the other settings on another screen while specifying the paper setting. Press the tab key to switch the screens.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


11 Machine Status Screen Setting


Adjustment

The Adjustment mode menu screen is displayed.

Adjust the settings of Image Control and Output options. For the details, refer

to “Machine Adjustment Outlines” on page 13-3.

After completing the Adjustment mode settings, touch [Return] to exit the Adjustment mode.

You cannot set the other settings while specifying the Adjustment mode.

Controller

The Controller Setting Menu Screen is displayed.

Specify the settings concerning the Print Controller. For the details, refer to“Function Overview” on page 14-3.

Touch the [MACHINE] tab to exit the Controller Setting mode.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


12 Paper Setting

How to operate Paper Setting to be designated for paper tray

12.1 Paper Setting Outlines

This machine provides the optimum print result according to each character-istics of copy paper by specifying paper size, paper type/weight, and air as-

sist function for each tray (Tray Setting).

The paper type/weight can be programmed in advance, and then applied to

each tray as required (Register Type/Weight).

The programmed properties can also be altered and newly registered at anytime.

12.1.1 Setting Items in Paper Setting

Paper Setting includes three setting items; paper size, paper type/weight,and air assist function.

Select one of the following four items as paper size.

1. Standard Size

2. Custom Size3. Wide Size Paper

4. Tab Paper

Set paper type/weight by specifying the following five items and paper name.

1. Type

Select one of the following nine types.Coated A, Coated B, Fine, Normal, Book/News, Embossed, User, Blank

Insert, OHP

2. WeightSelect one of the following eight types.50-61g, 62-71g, 72-91g, 92-130g, 131-161g, 162-209g, 210-244g, 245-

300g

!Details

For details of paper type specifications, refer to “Paper type and weight”

on page 12-6 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


3. Colored Paper

Select one of the following six types.White, Transparent, Yellow, Pink, Blue, Green

4. Hole-Punch

Select either condition.

With Punch Hole or No Punch Hole5. Both Sides Adjustment

Specify the Vertical zoom, Horizontal zoom, Up/Down shift amount, and

Right/Left shift amount for both front and back pages.- Vertical zoom : 0.5% to -0.5% (in 0.05% increments)- Horizontal zoom : 10% to -10% (in 0.1% increments)

- Up/Down shift amount : 10 to -10mm (in 0.1mm increments)- Right/Left shift amount : 10 to -10mm (in 0.1mm increments)

Use the Air Assist function to blow air to the paper from the guide plate inside

the tray in order to prevent feeding troubles which a specific paper typetends to cause.

Select one of the following three conditions.

- Auto: Activate the function according to the paper feed timing.

- On: Always activate the function.

- Off: Always deactivate the function.

Paper Type Specifications

The following six paper types are provided according to the plainness of pa-per.

- Coated A

- Coated B

- Fine, Normal

- Book/News

- Embossed

The special paper types that are not included in the above six types are set

separately.- Blank Insert

- OHP, User

The following describes the specifications of each paper type.

Coated A

The coated paper is an art paper or coated paper, applied approximately 20

to 40g of coating per 1 m2 to on top of both side of fine paper. The coated

paper is mostly used for luxury art books, calendars, car brochures, books,magazines, leaflets, and posters. Always specify [Coated A] to a tray towhich the coated paper is loaded.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


Coated B

Specify [Coated B] when overlay printing on the offset printed coated paper.If a trouble occurs in feeding the coated paper when [Coated A] is specified,

select [Coated B].

!Details

When using the overlay printed paper, you are required to specify specific

settings besides [Coated B] to the tray to which this type of coated paper

is load. Contact your sales representative.

Fine

The Fine paper is a non-coated paper generally used for offset printing. The

fine paper has a high degree of whiteness and used for various purposes.Specify [Fine] to a tray to which the fine paper is loaded.

Normal

The Normal paper is used for copying in general and is called "PPC paper."The normal paper is usually not a recycled paper. Specify [Normal] to the tray

to which the normal paper or the recycled paper for copying is loaded.

Book/News

The Book/News paper is used for a body part of a book. It is a highly opaquepaper to prevent prints to be seen from the back, or a cream-colored paperfor ease of reading. Specify [Book/News] to a tray to which this type of paperis loaded.

Embossed

The Embossed paper has a non-smooth surface on which a toner is hard tobe fixed. Specify [Embossed] to a tray to which this type of paper is loaded.

Blank InsertBlank Insert is not a category of the paper type. This is only fed without being

printed. When the Cover With Blank Sheet, Blank Insert, or OHP interleaveblank function is used, specify [Blank Insert] to a tray to which a paper al-

ready printed and not copied by this machine is loaded, or a blank paper onlyto be fed is loaded.

User

When a paper type other than that of which can be specified on this machine

is used, use this function. For the details, contact your service representa-tive.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


OHP

Specify [OHP] to a tray to which transparent films are loaded.

Weight is classified into eight types as shown in the following table.

Paper type and weight

Coated A Coated B Fine Normal Book/ News

Embossed

50 ~61g/m² (Disable) (Disable)

62 ~71g/m²

72 ~91g/m²

92 ~130g/m²

131 ~161g/m²

162 ~209g/m²

210 ~244g/m² (Disable)

245 ~300g/m² (Disable)

Pattern Description

Air Assist becomes activated.

Tray adjustment (installing an assist plate, etc.) is required by your service repre-sentative.

Able to be specified only to Tray 4.

Copying speed becomes a little slow. Printing speed is 90 sheets per minute whenprinting A4 in the simplex print mode.

Copying speed becomes slow. Printing speed is 63 sheets per minute when print-ing A4 in the simplex print mode.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


Paper Weight Conversion Chart

Inch Paper type, Basic size

Bond17x22

432x559

Cover20x26

508x660

Index25.5x30.5

648x775

Bristol22.5x28.5

572x724

Tag24x36

610x914

Book25x38

635x965

g/m² lb lb lb lb lb lb

50.0 13.3 18.5 27.7 22.8 30.8 33.8

52.3 13.9 19.4 29.0 23.9 32.2 35.4

54.2 14.4 20.1 30.0 24.7 33.3 36.7

60.2 16.0 22.3 33.3 27.5 37.0 40.7

64.0 17.0 23.7 35.4 29.2 39.4 43.3

66.3 17.7 24.6 36.7 30.3 40.8 44.9

68.7 18.3 25.4 38.0 31.4 42.3 46.5

72.3 19.3 26.8 40.0 33.0 44.5 48.9

75.9 20.2 28.1 42.0 34.7 46.7 51.3

80.0 21.3 29.6 44.3 36.5 49.2 54.1

83.7 22.3 31.0 46.4 38.2 51.5 56.6

88.0 23.4 32.6 48.7 40.2 54.1 59.5

90.0 24.0 33.3 49.8 41.1 55.4 60.9

98.3 26.2 36.4 54.4 44.9 60.5 66.5

100.0 26.6 37.0 55.4 45.7 61.5 67.6

104.7 27.9 38.8 58.0 47.8 64.4 70.8

108.0 28.8 40.0 59.8 49.3 66.4 73.1

110.0 29.3 40.7 60.9 50.2 67.7 74.4

120.0 32.0 44.4 66.5 54.8 73.8 81.2

127.9 34.1 47.4 70.8 58.4 78.7 86.5

130.0 34.6 48.1 72.0 59.4 80.0 87.9

140.0 37.3 51.8 77.5 63.9 86.1 94.7

150.0 39.9 55.5 83.1 68.5 92.3 101.5

160.0 42.6 59.2 88.6 73.1 98.4 108.2

170.0 45.3 62.9 94.2 77.6 104.6 115.0

180.0 47.9 66.7 99.7 82.2 110.7 121.8

190.0 50.6 70.4 105.2 86.8 116.9 128.5

200.0 53.3 74.1 110.8 91.3 123.1 135.3

210.0 55.9 77.8 116.3 95.9 129.2 142.1

220.0 58.6 81.5 121.8 100.5 135.4 148.8

230.0 61.3 85.2 127.4 105.0 141.5 155.6

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


240.0 63.9 88.9 132.9 109.6 147.7 162.4

250.0 66.6 92.6 138.5 114.2 153.8 169.1

260.0 69.2 96.3 144.0 118.7 160.0 175.9

270.0 71.9 100.0 149.5 123.3 166.1 182.7

280.0 74.6 103.7 155.1 127.9 172.3 189.4

290.0 77.2 107.4 160.6 132.4 178.4 196.2

300.0 79.9 111.1 166.1 137.0 184.6 202.9

Inch Paper type, Basic size

Bond17x22432x559

Cover20x26508x660

Index25.5x30.5648x775

Bristol22.5x28.5572x724

Tag24x36610x914

Book25x38635x965

g/m² lb lb lb lb lb lb

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


12.1.2 Recommended Setting of Paper Type/Weight

It is recommended that paper type/weight should be registered for each pa-

per to be used, so that the setting change can be made according to the en-vironment (temperature, humidity, paper condition, etc.) on the basis ofregistered settings for each tray.

Recommended Setting Procedure

1. Register the paper type/weight according to the paper type to be used.

2. Specify the paper size, registered condition, and whether to use the air

assist function for each tray.

3. Make setting change on the paper type/weight for each tray, as required,according to the environment and paper condition.

4. If the changes made are considered to be a new standard, make change

in registration or make it a new registration.

!Details

Service representative can make adjustments for all trays at the same

time. Contact your service representative, if desired.

Refer to a label on a paper package when registering the paper condi-

tions.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


12.2 Register Paper Type/Weight

Follow the procedure below to register paper type/weight according to the

paper type to be used.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


Procedure

1 Touch [Paper Set] - [Register Type/Weight].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


2 Touch the key to be registered. The Input Condition Screen will be dis-

played.

3 Touch [Type] to display the Type popup menu, then select the desiredpaper type.

!Details

For details, refer to “Paper Type Specifications” on page 12-4 .

4 Touch [OK] to complete the setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


5 Touch [Name] on the Input Condition Screen, then enter the name of

the paper to be used.

!DetailsThe same name as the paper type specified is displayed on the screen.

To alter it, enter the new paper type name. For details on entering texts

in the field, see the appendix.


7 Touch [Weight] on the Input Condition Screen, then select the desiredpaper weight.

!Details

For details, refer to “Paper type and weight” on page 12-6 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting



9 Touch [Colored Paper] on the Input Condition Screen, then select thecolor of the paper to be used.


11 Touch [Hole-Punch] on the Input Condition Screen, then touch [With

Punch Hole] if the paper has punch holes.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


13 Touch [Both Sides Adj.] on the Input Condition Screen, then enter the

adjustment value as follows.

- Touch [Front] or [Back] on the Front and Back Page Adjustment

Screen to select the printed side.- Select the adjustment item (vertical zoom, horizontal zoom, vertical

shift, and horizontal shift.)

- Touch [+ 5 -] to specify the value to be positive or negative.- Use the touch panel keypad or arrow keys ( , ) and ( + ) to enter the

desired adjustment value.

!Details

For details, refer to “Setting Items in Paper Setting” on page 12-3 .

14 Touch [OK].

15 Touch [OK] on the Input Condition Screen to complete the setting.The

Input Condition Screen will be restored.

16 Touch [Close]. The Machine Status Screen will be restored.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


12.3 Set Paper Size, Conditions, Air Assist Function for aTray

Specify the paper sizes, programmed paper type/weight, air assist functionfor each tray.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


Procedure

1 Touch [Paper Set] - [Tray Setting].

2 Touch the tray key (Tray 1 to 5) to be specified.

3 Touch [Size Setting]. The Size Setting Screen will be displayed.

4 Follow the procedure for each setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


Setting Standard Size

1. Touch [Standard Size] to highlight it.

2. If selected tray will be loaded with one of the following sizes, touch[Search Size Set] to display the Search Size Set Screen, then touch the

desired size key.

5.5x8.5, 8.5x11R, 8x13, 8.12x13.2, 8.25x13, 8.5x13

!Details

If 5.5x8.5 is selected on the Search Size Set Screen, the machine will au-

tomatically detect 5.5x8.5 instead of A5. Similarly, 8.5x11R will be de-

tected instead of A4R, 8x13/8.12x13.2/8.25x13/8.5x13 will be detected

instead of 8.5x14.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


3. Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The Tray Setting Screen will be re-

stored.

4. Touch [OK] on the Size Setting Screen to complete the setting.

5. Proceed to step 5. ( p. 12-24 )

Setting Custom Size

1. Touch [Custom Size] to highlight it.

2. Touch the vertical/horizontal size key, then use the touch panel keypad

orarrow keys ( , ) and ( + ) to enter the desired size. From the minimum sizeof 100 x 140 mm to the maximum size of 324 x 460 mm can be set.

3. Touch [Lead Edge], [Rear Edge], or [Centre] to specify the desired imageposition.

4. Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The Tray Setting Screen will be re-stored.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


Setting Wide Size Paper

1. Touch [Wide Size Paper] to highlight it.

2. Touch the desired wide size key to highlight it.

3. Touch [Lead Edge], [Rear Edge], or [Centre] to specify the desired image

position.4. Touch [Input Size] to display the Size Input Screen.

5. Touch the vertical size key, then use the touch panel keypad or arrowkeys ( + ) and ( , ) to enter the vertical size.

The entered number should fall within the range from the vertical size ofthe standard size corresponding to the selected wide size, to a maximumof 324 mm.

6. Touch the horizontal size key, then use the touch panel keypad or arrowkeys ( + ) and ( , ) to enter the horizontal size.

The entered number should fall within the range from the horizontal sizeof the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size, to a maxi-mum of 460 mm.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


!Details

When setting wide size, be sure to specify the precise dimensions of pa-

per to be used. The dimensions of the wide size selected in step 2 are not

correctly set in the initial setting.

7. Touch [Select Size] to return to the Select Size Screen.

8. Touch [OK] on the Size Setting Screen to complete the setting. The TraySetting Screen will be restored.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


Setting Tab Paper

1. Touch [Tab Paper] to highlight it.

2. Touch the desired tabbed paper size key to highlight it.

3. If setting the custom tabbed paper size, touch [Custom Size] to display

the Size Setting Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


4. Touch the vertical/horizontal/index size key, then use the touch panel

keypad or arrow keys ( + ) and ( , ) to enter the desired size.

5. Touch [Number of Tabs] to display the Number of Tabs Screen, then usethe touch panel keypad or arrow keys ( + ) and ( , ) to enter the number of

tabs. Setting range is from 1 to 5.

6. Touch [OK] to complete the setting.

7. Touch [OK] on the Size Setting Screen to complete the setting. The Tray

Setting Screen will be restored.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


5 Touch [Type/Weight] on the Tray Setting Screen.

6Use [Next] or [Previous] to scroll to the desired paper type/weight fromthe list, then touch the key to highlight it.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


7 Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The Tray Setting Screen will be re-

stored.

8 Touch [Air Assist ]on the Tray Setting Screen.

9 Touch [Auto,] [On], or [Off] to highlight it.


stored.

11 Touch [Close] on the Tray Setting Screen. The Paper Set Screen will berestored.

12 Touch [Close] on the Paper Set Screen. The Machine Status Screen willbe restored.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


12.4 Change Paper Type/Weight Specified for a Tray

The paper size and air assist function can be changed with the same proce-

dure as setting.

To change paper type/weight already designated for a tray, follow the proce-

dure below.

!Details

Front and Back Page Adjustment is required to execute every time the

paper type is changed or as daily maintenance, because a shrinkage ratio

varies depending upon the paper type, paper brand, and the temperature

and/or humidity of a storage location.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Paper Setting 12


Procedure

1 Touch [Paper Set] - [Tray Setting].

2 Touch [Change] to display the Change Setting Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


3 Touch the key of the setting item to be changed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting



stored.

6 To newly register the modified setting, touch [Register]. To simplychange the setting, proceed to step 10.

7 Touch the desired registration key on the Register Screen.

8 The Input Name Screen will be displayed. Enter the desired name.

9 If selected key has already been named, that name will be displayed.Change it in this step, if desired. For details of entering texts in the field,

see the appendix.

10 Touch [OK]. To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel].


stored.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


12 Paper Setting


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment

POD Administrator

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13 Adjustment

13.1 Machine Adjustment OutlinesThe following adjustments for image control are included in the Machine Ad-

justment functions.

- 01 Magnification Adjustment

Provide controls for image magnification.

- 02 Timing Adjustment

Provide controls for image timing.

- 03 Centring Adjustment

Provide the centring control to the direction of paper feed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.2 01 Magnification Adjustment

13.2.1 01 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1>

In the printer control, perform this adjustment to control the magnification for

Side 1 to the direction of paper feed.

!Details

This adjustment is a baseline for both sides adjustment enabled in Tray

Setting and Register Type/Weight.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [01 Magnification Ad-

justment].

2 Touch [01 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1>] to display the

Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE1> Screen.

3 Touch the [COPY] tab to display the Copy Screen.

4 Load A3 paper into the tray, then press [Start] to output the sample pat-tern (No. 16).

5 Measure the resultant magnification to the direction of paper feed.

6 If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tabto return to the Adjustment Screen.

Paper feed

205.7

direction

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


7 Use the touch panel keypad to enter an appropriate value, then touch

[Set].

Available range: -10 (short) to +10 (long), 1 step = 0.05 %.

8 Repeat steps 3 to 7 until the desired result is obtained.

9 Touch [Return] to restore the Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.3 02 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2>


Side 2 to the direction of paper feed.

!Details

This adjustment is a baseline for both sides adjumstment enabled in Tray

Setting and Register Type/Weight.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [01 Magnification Ad- justment].

2 Touch [02 Printer Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2>] to display thePrinter Drum Clock Adjustment <SIDE2> Screen.

3 Select the required paper size using [Next] or [Back]. With [Next] select-

ed each time, the display will switch as follows:

Tray1 – Tray2 – PFU upper tray – PFU middle tray – PFU lower tray

4 Touch the [COPY] tab.

5 Load A3 paper into the tray, then press [Start] to output the sample pat-tern (No. 16).

6 Measure the resultant magnification to the direction of paper feed.

7 If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab

to return to the Adjustment Screen.


[Set].

Available range: -10 (short) to 0 (long), 1 step = 0.05 %.



Paper feed

205.7

direction

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.4 03 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1>


Side 1 perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure


2 Touch [03 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1>] to display the Print-er Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE1> Screen.


4 Select A3 paper, then press [Start] to output the sample pattern (No.

16).

5 Measure the resultant magnification perpendicular to the direction of

paper feed.


7 Use the touch panel keypad to enter an appropriate value, then touch[Set].

Available range: -10 (short) to +10 (long), 1 step = 0.1 %.



Paper feed190direction

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.5 04 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2>


Side 2 perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure


2 Touch [04 Printer Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2>] to display the Print-er Horizontal Adjustment <SIDE2> Screen.

3 Select the required paper size using [Next] or [Back]. With [Next] select-

ed each time, the display will switch as follows:

Tray1 – Tray2 – PFU upper tray – PFU middle tray – PFU lower tray


5 Select A3 paper, then press [Start] to output the sample pattern (No.16).

6 Measure the resultant magnification perpendicular to the direction ofpaper feed.



Available range: -5 (short) to 0 (long), 1 step = 0.1 %.



Paper feed190direction

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.6 02 Timing Adjustment

13.6.1 01 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1>

Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing for Side 1.

2

Reminder

Perform this adjustment after completing Printer Drum Clock Adjustment

<SIDE1>.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [02 Timing Adjust-

ment].

2 Touch [01 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1>] to display the

Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE1> Screen.

3 Select the required tray using [Next] or [Back]. With [Next] selectedeach time, the display will switch as follows:

All – Tray1 offset – Tray2 offset - PFU upper tray offset – PFU middletray offset – PFU lower tray offset



6 Measure the resultant restart timing.

Paper feed

20

direction

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


7 If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab

to return to the Adjustment Screen.


[Set].

Available range: -30 (short) to +30 (long), 1 step = 0.1 mm.


10 Touch [Return] to restore the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.6.2 02 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2>

Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing for Side 2.

2

ReminderPerform this adjustment after completing Printer Drum Clock Adjustment

<SIDE2>.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [02 Timing Adjust-ment].

2 Touch [02 Printer Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2>] to display thePrinter Restart Timing Adjustment <SIDE2> Screen.

3 Select the required tray using [Next] or [Back]. With [Next] selected

each time, the display will switch as follows:

All – Tray1 offset – Tray2 offset - PFU upper tray offset – PFU middletray offset – PFU lower tray offset



6 Measure the resultant restart timing.



Available range: -30 (short) to +30 (long), 1 step = 0.1 mm.



Paper feed

20

direction

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.6.3 03 Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing in scanning the original

with the original glass.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


Procedure


2 Touch [03 Scanner Restart Timing Adjustment] to display the ScannerRestart Timing Adjustment Screen.


4 Select A3 paper, place the original of which a misalignment can be eaily

monitored on the original glass, then press [Start].

5 Check the misalignment by comparing the original and the output.

6 If there is the misalignment between the original and the output, touchthe [ADJUSTMENT] tab to return to the Adjustment Screen.


[Set].

Available range: -40 (fast) to +40 (slow), 1 step = 0.1 mm.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.6.4 04 ADF Restart Timing Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control the restart timing in scanning the original

with ADF.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


Procedure


2 Touch [04 ADF Restart Timing Adjustment] to display the ADF RestartTiming Adjustment Screen.

3 Select the desired paper side using [Next] or [Back]. Each time [Next]

is selected, the display will switch as follows:

SIDE 1 - SIDE 2

2

Note

"SIDE 1" refers to the right side of the paper, while "SIDE 2" refers to thereverse side.


5 Select A3 paper, place the original of which a misalignment can be eas-ily monitored, then press [Start].

6 Check the misalignment by comparing the original and the output.

7 If there is the misalignment between the original and the output, touchthe [ADJUSTMENT] tab to return to the Adjustment Screen.


[Set].

Available range: -50 (fast) to +50 (slow), 1 step = 0.1 mm.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.7 03 Centring Adjustment

13.7.1 01 Printer Centring Adjustment

Perform this adjustment to control image centring to the direction of paper

feed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [01 Machine Adjustment] - [03 Centring Adjust-ment].

2 Touch [01 Printer Centring Adjustment] to display the Printer Centring Adjustment Screen.


4 Select A3 paper, then press [Start] to output the sample pattern (No.

16).

5 Fold the output sheet at the centre to the direction of paper feed and

measure the distance between the lines on both sides.



Available range: -64 (forward) to +63 (backward), 1 step = 0.1 mm.


9 Touch [Return] to restore the Centring Adjustment Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.8 Finisher Adjustment

Use this function to make fine adjustments on Finisher options.

!Details

The target adjustment items vary depending upon the configuration of in-

stalled options.

- 01 Stapler Position Adjustment

Adjust the dislocation of sheets delivered to the tray and centre position

of staples processed by the FS-503 Staple Finisher.

- 02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adjustment

Make adjustments on punching functions operated by the FD-501 Fold-

ing Unit.- 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adjustment

Make adjustments on folding functions operated by the FD-501 FoldingUnit.

- 04 Stacker Adjustment

Make adjustments on the LS-501/502 Large Capacity Stacker.

- 05 Saddle Stitcher Adjustment

Not supported in this version.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.9 01 Stapler Position Adjustment

13.9.1 01 Stapling Centre Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the centre position of copied/printed sheets and

of staples processed by the FS-503 Staple Finisher.The paper width adjustment is supposed to be completed before this adjust-ment.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [01 Stapler Position Adj.].

2 Touch [01 Stapling Centre Position Adjustment] to display the StaplingCentre Position Adjustment Screen.


4 Press [Start]. A sample copy will be output.

5 Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, thentouch [Set].

Available range: -20 (forward) to +20 (backward), 1 step = 0.1 mm

6 Fold the output sheet in two on the centre to the direction of paper feed

and check misalignment (a) of the stapling centre position.

7 If the test desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT]

tab. Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 6 until the desired result isobtained.

8 Touch [Return] to restore the Stapler Position Adjustment Mode MenuScreen.

2

a

1

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.9.2 02 Paper Width Adjustment

Perform this adjustment if stapled sheets are not aligned neatly processed

by the FS-503 Staple Finisher.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment ]- [01 Stapler Position Adj.].

2 Touch [02 Paper Width Adjustment] to display the Paper Width Adjust-ment Screen.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, touch [Staple]

and then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.

5 Check misalignment (a), in which misalignment occurs if the paper

width setting is larger than the actual width, or paper curving (b), in

which a sample set is curved if the paper width setting is smaller thanthe actual width has occurred.

6 If the desired result cannot be obtained, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab.

7 Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the paper size to be adjusted. Touching

[Next] continuously will change the paper size as follows.

11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8.5x11 - A4 - B5 - A5 -

5.5x8.5 - 8x13 - 8.125x13.25 - 8.5x13 - 8.25x13 - 8K - 16K - 12x18 - A3W - B4W - A4W - A4WR - B5W - A5W - 12x18W - 11x17W -

8.5x11W - 8.5x11WR - 5.5x8.5W - Non-Standard

8 Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, then

touch [Set].

Available range: -20 (wide) to +20 (narrow), 1 step = 0.1 mm

9 Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 8 until the desired result is ob-tained.

a

b

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


10 Touch [Return] to restore the Stapler Position Adjustment Mode Menu

Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.10 02 Multi Folder (Punch) Adjustment

13.10.101 Paper Width Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the specific paper size if punch holes processed

by the FD-501 Folding Unit dislocate largely.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].

2 Touch [01 Paper Width Adjustment] to display the Paper Width Adjust-ment Screen.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify the set

number to 10, then press [Start]. A sample pattern will be output.

5 Check the diameter of penetrated holes when output sheets are piled

up.


7 Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the paper size to be adjusted.

Touching [Next] continuously will change the paper size as follows.

All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - B5R - 8.5x11 - A4 - A5R - B5 - A5 - 5.5x8.5 - 8x13 - 8.12x13.2 - 8.5x13 - 8.25x13 - 8K -

16K - 16KR - 12x18



2

Note

If the setting is too wide, the centre position of punch holes may dislo-

cate. If the setting is too narrow, the position of punch holes may vary.


10 Touch [Return] to restore the Multi Folder (Hole-Punch) AdjustmentMode Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.10.202 Hole-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the position of punch holes to the direction of pa-

per feed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [02 Multi Folder(Punch) Adj.].

2 Touch [02 Hole-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment] to display theHole-Punch Vertical Position Adjustment Screen.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify

[Punch], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.

5 Check the distance (a) from the edge of the feeding sheet to the centre

position of the punch hole.


7 Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the paper size to be adjusted.Touching [Next] continuously will change the paper size as follows.

All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - B5R - 8.5x11 - A4 - A5R - B5 - A5 - 5.5x8.5 - 8x13 - 8.12x13.2 - 8.5x13 - 8.25x13 - 8K -16K - 16KR - 12x18

8 Select the desired hole type.



10 Repeat the adjustment steps from 3 to 9 until the desired result is ob-

tained.

a

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


11 If adjustment in any other hole type or paper size is required, repeat

steps from 3 to 10.

12 Touch [Return] to restore the Multi Folder (Hole-Punch) Adjustment

Mode Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.11 03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adjustment

13.11.101 Folding Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the folding position processed by the FD-501

Folding Unit.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [03 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj.].

2 Touch [01 Folding Position Adjustment] to display the Folding Position Adjustment Screen.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [Fold-

ing], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.

5 Check the misalignment (a) of the edge of the feeding sheets.


7 Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the paper size to be adjusted.Touching [Next] continuously will change the paper size as follows:

All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18

8 Use the touch panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value, then

touch [Set].

Available range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1 mm

2

Note

When misalignment (a) of step 5 has occurred, enter the "+" value.


10 If adjustment in any other size is required, repeat steps 3 to 9.

Paper feed

a

direction

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


11 Touch [Return] to restore the Multi Folder (Fold) Adjustment Mode

Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.11.202 Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Letter Fold-in mode proc-

essed by the FD-501 Folding Unit.

2Reminder

When adjusting both Single Fold and Double Fold, be sure to start with

the Double Fold adjustment.

The baseline of Single Fold is calculated from the edge of the sheet, while

that of Double Fold is calculated from the position of the first fold line,

therefore a distance (b) in step 5 will be altered by changing the position

of either Single Fold or Double Fold.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [03 Multi Folder (Fold)

Adj.].

2 Touch [02 Letter Fold-in Position Adjustment] to display the Letter

Fold-in Position Adjustment Screen.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [LetterFold-in], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.

5 Check a distance (a) and distance (b) on the output sheet.



All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18

Paper feed

a

direction b

1

2

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


8 Touch [Double Fold].



2

Note

The distance (a) in step 5 will increase when the "+" value is entered, and

decrease when the "-" value is entered.

10 Touch [Single Fold]. Repeat step 9.

2

Note

The distance (b) in step 5 will increase when the "+" value is entered, and




Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.11.303 Letter Fold-out Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Letter Fold-out mode

processed by the FD-501 Folding Unit.

!Details





8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure


Adj.].

2 Touch [03 Letter Fold-out Pos. Adjustment] to display the Letter Fold-

out Position Adjustment Screen.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [LetterFold-out], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.




All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18

Paper feed

a

direction

b2

1

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


8 Touch [Single Fold].



2

Note



10 Touch [Double Fold]. Repeat step 9.

2

Note




12 If adjustment in any other size is required, repeat steps from 3 to 11.


Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.11.404 Double Parallel Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Double Parallel folding

mode processed by the FD-501 Folding Unit.

2Reminder


the Single Fold adjustment.





8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


Procedure


Adj.].

2 Touch [04 Double Parallel Position Adjustment] to display the Double

Parallel Position Adjustment Screen.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [DoubleParallel], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.




All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18

Paper feed

adirection

b

2

1

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment





2

Note

The distance (a) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value is entered, and

increase when the "-" value is entered.


2

Note

The distance (b) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value is entered, and





Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.11.505 Z-Fold Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Z-Fold mode processed

by the FD-501 Folding Unit.

2Reminder


the Single Fold adjustment.





8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure


Adj.].

2 Touch [05 Z-Fold Position Adjustment] to display the Z-Fold Position

Adjustment Screen.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [Z-Fold], then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.




All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18

Paper feed

a

direction

b

1

2

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13





2

Note




2

Note






Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


13.11.606 Gate Position Adjustment

Perform this adjustment for the folding positions in Gate folding mode proc-

essed by the FD-501 Folding Unit.

2Reminder

When adjusting Single Fold, Double Fold and Triple Fold at a time, be

sure to start with the Single Fold adjustment.


that of Double Fold is calculated from the position of the first fold line, and

that of Triple Fold is calculated from the position of the second fold line,

therefore a distance (a), distance (b) and distance (c) in step 5 will be al-

tered by changing the position of any fold position.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment ]- [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [03 Multi Folder (Fold)

Adj.].

2 Touch [06 Gate Position Adjustment] to display the Gate Position Ad-

justment Screen.


4 Load the desired size of paper to be adjusted on a tray, specify [Gate],then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.

5 Check a distance (a), distance (b) and distance (c) on the output sheet.



All - 11x17 - A3 - B4 - 8.5x14 - A4R - 8.5x11R - 8K - 12x18

Paper feed

a

direction

b2

1

c

3

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment





2

Note

The distance (a) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value is entered, and


10 Touch [Double Fold] and [Triple Fold] to set in the same manner re-

spectively.

2Note

In Double Fold, the distance (b) in step 5 will increase when the "+" value

is entered, and decrease when the "-" value is entered.

In Triple Fold, the distance (c) in step 5 will decrease when the "+" value

is entered, and increase when the "-" value is entered.




Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.12 04 Stacker Adjustment

13.12.101 Paper Width Adjustment

Perform this adjustment when output sheets are not aligned in a perpendic-

ular position to the direction of paper feed processed by the LS-501/502Large Capacity Stacker.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [04 Stacker Adj.].

2 Touch [01 Paper Width Adjustment] to display the Paper Width Adjust-

ment Screen.


4 Specify [A3] then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.

5 If output sheets are misaligned, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab.

6 Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the desired Stacker No..


Available range: -20 (narrow) to +20 (wide), 1 step = 0.1 mm



10 Touch [Return] to restore the Stacker Adjustment Mode Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Adjustment 13


13.12.202 Paper Length Adjustment

Perform this adjustment when output sheets are not aligned to the direction

of paper feed processed by the LS-501/502 Large Capacity Stacker.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


13 Adjustment


Procedure

1 Touch [Adjustment] - [02 Finisher Adjustment] - [04 Stacker Adj.].

2 Touch [02 Paper Length Adjustment] to display the Paper Length Ad-

justment Screen.


4 Specify [A3] then press [Start]. A sample pattern (No. 16) will be output.

5 If output sheets are misaligned, touch the [ADJUSTMENT] tab.

6 Touch [Next] or [Back] to select the desired Stacker No..


Available range: -20 (narrow) to +20 (wide), 1 step = 0.1 mm



10 Touch [Return] to restore the Stacker Adjustment Mode Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


14Controller Setting

POD Administrator

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Controller Setting 14



14.1 Function OverviewSetting change concerning the printer controller is available from the Con-

troller Setting Menu Screen.

Touch [Controller] on the Machine Status Screen. The Controller SettingMenu Screen will be displayed.

The menu comprises the following settings.

01 Report Type

Use this function to print out the report type selected from the screen. For

details, refer to “01 Report Type” on page 14-3.

Menu Items Description Setting Options

Configuration Page Print Print the configuration page tocheck the firmware versionand network settings.

---

PCL Demo Page Print Print the PCL demo page. ---

PS Demo Page Print (machinewith option)

Print the PS demo page. ---

PCL Font List Print the PCL font list. ---

PS Font List (machine withoption)

Print the PS font list. ---

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




02 Printer Setting

Various printer settings are available from this screen. For details, refer to “02Printer Setting” on page 14-9. It may not operate properly depending upon

the combination of settings selected.

Menu Items Description Setting Options (default is un-derlined)

No. Specify the default output settingfor each number.

1-6 ( 1 )

01 Basic Setting The following default settings are used unless otherwise specified by the printer driver.

01 PDL Select the page description lan-guage to be initially used.

Auto , PCL, PS, TIFF

02 Paper Feed Tray Select the paper feed tray to be in-

itially used.The selectable items vary de-pending upon the configuration ofinstalled options.

Auto , Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray

4, Tray 5

03 Output Tray Select the exit tray to be initiallyused.

Auto, Stacker Auto, Stacker 1Main, Stacker 1 Sub, Stacker 2Main, Stacker 2 Sub, Multi FolderMain, Multi Folder Sub, SaddleStitcher, Stapler Main, StaplerSub

04 Duplex Select to allow double-sidedprinting.

OFF , ON

05 Binding Select the binding position to beinitially used.

Top, Left , Right

06 Staple Select the staple position to be in-itially used.

OFF , 1 Staple (Left), 1 Staple(Right), 2 Staple

07 Punch Select the punch position to be in-itially used.

OFF , 2 Holes, 4 Holes

08 Center Staple/Center Fold/ Trim-ming

Select the initial setting for eachfunction.(Folding & Stapling and Trimmingare not supported in this version.)

OFF , Z-fold (A3/B4/11x17/8K), Z-fold (8.5x14), Fold&Staple,Fold&Staple/Trim, Center fold,Center fold OUT, Letter fold, Let-

ter fold OUT, Zigzag, Zigzag OUT,Double parallel, Double parallelOUT, Gate fold, Gate fold OUT,Multi letterfold, Multi letterfoldOUT, Multi center fold

09 Offset Select to use the offset function. ON, OFF

10 Output Order Select to exit face up or face downin initial state.

Face Down , Face Up

11 Image Order Select the print page order in ini-tial state.

1 to N , N to 1

12 Print Number Specify the print quantity in initialstate.

1 to 9999

13 Sort Select to use the Sort mode. Collated , Uncollated

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




14 Paper Size Select the paper size to be initiallyused.When specifing tabs, select thenumber of tabs as well.

A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 8x13, 8.25x13,8.125x13, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14,8.5x13, 8.5x11, 5.5x8.5, A3W,B4W, A4W, B5W, 12x18W,11x17W, 8.5x14W, 8.5x11W,5.5x8.5W, 8K, 16K, 8.5x11Tab,

A4Tab

15 Orientation Select the orientation of the imageprinted on copy paper.

Portrait , Landscape

16 Banner Option Select to print the banner page. OFF , ON

17 Banner Tray Select the paper feed tray forprinting banner page.The selectable items vary de-pending uponn the configurationof installed options.

Auto , Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray4, Tray 5

18 Convert Paper Size Select to change the paper size. OFF , 8.5x11/11x17 to A4/A3, A4/ A3 to 8.5x11/11x17

19 Combination Specify the desired combinationfunction.

OFF , 2 in 1, 2 repeat, 2 repeat-re-versal(L), 2 repeat-reversal(R), 2repeat-reversal(U), 2 repeat-re-versal(D)

20 Booklet Select to use the Booklet function. OFF , ON

21 Adhesive Binding Select to use the Adhesive bind-ing mode.

OFF , ON

22 Print Position Select the initial print position. Rear Edge , Center, Lead Edge

02 PCL Setting

01 Font Source Select the medium of font source.Internal: Standard fontDisk: Downloaded fontSoft: Software font

Internal , Disk, Soft

02 Font Number Specify the area of available fontnumber according to the fontsource.

0 to 999

03 Symbol Set Specify the symbol set. DESKTOP, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17,

ISO21, ISO4, ISO6, ISO60, ISO69,ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, LEGAL,MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL,PC8, PC8DN, PC8TK, PC850,PC852, PIFONT, PSMATH, PS-TEXT, ROMAN8 , VNINTL, VN-MATH, VNUS, WIN30, WINL1,WINL2, WINL5

04 Form lines Specify the number of lines perpage.

5 to 128 ( 64 )

05 Font point size Specify the font size by point. 0.44 to 99.75 ( 12.00 )

06 Font pitch Specify the font pitch. 0.44 to 99.95 ( 10.00 )

07 CR/LF Mapping Select the line feed code. OFF , CR, LF, CRLF


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




03 Select Printer Setting

Select the default port number, and specify the output format for each port.For details, refer to “03 Select Printer Setting” on page 14-6.

* 1: Port No. (9100, etc.) is the initial setting. For details, refer to “02 Printer Setting” on page 14-4.

04 Spool

Select to spool the job to HDD. For details, refer to “04 Spool” on page 14-6.

05 Interface Setting

Set the timer to terminate the interface. For details, refer to “05 Interface Set-

ting” on page 14-6.

03 PS Setting(Option)

01 Print to PS Error Select to print the error reportwhen an error occurs while raster-

izing PostScript data.

OFF, ON

04 TIFF Setting

01 Auto Paper Select Select to use APS function. OFF, ON

02 Image Position Select the image position to beprinted on a page.

Left , Center



Default (9100)*1 Select the default port number. 1 to 6 ( 1 )

Port 2 (9112)*1 Select the number for Port 2. 1 to 6 ( 1 )






Spool Select to spool the job to HDD. Auto, Enable, Disable


Parallel Timeout Set the timer to terminate the par-allel port.

10 to 300 seconds ( 60 )

Network Timeout Set the timer to terminate the net-work port.

10 to 300 seconds ( 60 )

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




14.2 01 Report Type

Use this function to print out the report type selected from the screen.

Procedure

1 Touch [Controller] - [01 Report Type].

2 Touch the desired report type key to select it.

3 Touch [Execute].

The Controller Setting Menu Screen will be restored, and the Data LED

on the control panel blinks to indicate that the printing operation is inprogress.

To return to the previous screen, touch [Return].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




4 If further changes are required, touch the desired key.

Touch the [MACHINE] tab to complete the setting and restore the Ma-chine Status Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




14.3 02 Printer Setting

Use this function to register the desired output form. Six types can be spec-

ified at maximum.

Specify the setting number (1 to 6) first, then specify the following four printer

settings for that number.

- 01 Basic Setting specifies basic settings for printer.

- 02 PCL Setting specifies the settings concerning printer protocol.

- 03 PS Setting allows the machine to output the PS error print.

- 04 TIFF Setting specifies the settings concerning TIFF image.

Procedure

1 Touch [Controller] - [02 Printer Setting].

2 Specify the setting number.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




% Use the touch screen keypad to enter the setting number for your set-

ting. Available range is from 1 to 6.

% Touch [Set] to complete the setting. If wrong number is entered, touch

[Reset] to reenter the correct number.

3 Perform the Basic Setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




% Touch [01 Basic Setting]. The Basic Setting Menu Screen will be dis-

played.

% Make the desired setting. Touch [Next] or [Forward] to scroll to the de-sired item.

The following settings are used unless otherwise specified by the print-

er driver.- 01 PDL:

Select the page description language to be initially used.- 02 Paper Feed Tray:

Select the paper feed tray to be initially used.- 03 Output Tray:

Select the exit tray to be initially used.

- 04 Duplex: Select to allow double-sided printing.

- 05 Binding: Select the binding position to be initially used in double-sided print-ing.

- 06 Staple:

Select the staple position to be initially used.- 07 Punch:

Select the punch position to be initially used.

- 08 Center Staple/Center Fold/Trimming: Select the initial setting for each function.

- 09 Offset:

Select to use the offset function.- 10 Output Order:

Select to exit face up or face down in initial state.- 11 Image Order:

Select the print page order in initial state.

- 12 Print Number: Specify the print quantity in initial state.

- 13 Sort: Select to use the Sort mode.

- 14 Paper Size: Select the paper size to be initially used.- 15 Orientation:

Select the orientation of the image printed on copy paper.- 16 Banner Option:

Select to print the banner page.- 17 Banner Tray:

Select the paper feed tray for printing banner page.- 18 Convert Paper Size:

Select to change the paper size.

- 19 Combination: Specify the desired combination function.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- 20 Booklet:

Select to use the Booklet function.- 21 Adhesive Binding:

Select to use the Adhesive binding mode.

- 22 Print Position:

Select the initial print position.% Touch [Return] to complete the setting and restore the Printer Setting

Screen.

4 Perform the PCL Setting.

% Touch [02 PCL Setting]. The PCL Setting Menu Screen will be dis-played.

% Make the desired setting.- 01 Font Source:

Select the medium of font source.- 02 Font Number:

Specify the font number available from the font source.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- 03 Symbol Set:

Specify the symbol set.- 04 Form lines:

Specify the number of lines per page.

- 05 Font point size:

Specify the font size by point.- 06 Font pitch:

Specify the font pitch.

- 07 CR/LF Mapping: Select the line feed code.

% Touch [Return] to complete the setting and restore the Printer SettingScreen.

5 Perform the PS Setting (option).

% Touch [03 PS Setting]. The PS Setting Screen will be displayed.

% Touch [01 Print to PS Error].

% Touch [On] to allow the printing, or [Off] to cancel.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




% Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The PS Setting Screen will be re-

stored.


6 Perform the TIFF Setting.

% Touch [04 TIFF Setting]. The TIFF Setting Menu Screen will be dis-played.

% Make the desired setting.- 01 Auto Paper Select:

Select to use APS function.- 02 Image Position:

Select the image position to be printed on a page.

% Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The TIFF Setting Menu Screen willbe restored.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




7 Touch [Return] on the Printer Setting Screen. The Controller Setting

Menu Screen will be restored.


Touch the [MACHINE] tab to complete the setting and restore the Ma-

chine Status Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




14.4 03 Select Printer Setting

Select the default port number, and specify the output format for each port.

Procedure

1 Touch [Controller] - [03 Select Printer Setting].

2 Touch the key to be specified, then use the touch screen keypad to en-ter the desired number. Available range is from 1 to 6. To designate the

default port number, touch [Default(9100)], then enter the desired portnumber.

3 Touch [Set] to complete the setting. If wrong number is entered before

touching [Set], touch [Reset] to reenter the correct number.

4 Touch [Return]. The Controller Setting Menu Screen will be restored.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





Touch the [MACHINE] tab to complete the setting and restore the Ma-chine Status Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




14.5 04 Spool

Select to enable, disable, or automatically perform the spool function.

Procedure

1 Touch [Controller] - [04 Spool].

2 Touch the desired key to select it.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the setting. The Controller Setting MenuScreen will be restored.


Touch the [MACHINE] tab to complete the setting and restore the Ma-


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




14.6 05 Interface Setting

Set the time for Parallel Timeout and Network Timeout.

Procedure

1 Touch [Controller] - [05 Interface Setting].

2 Touch [Parallel Timeout] or [Network Timeout].

3 Use the touch screen keypad to enter the time, then touch [Set].

4 The available range is from 10 to 300. When the time outside this range

is entered as touching [Set], the time initially entered is designated.

5If the wrong number is entered before touching [Set], touch [Reset] toreenter the correct number.

6 Touch [Return]. The Controller Setting Menu Screen will be restored.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





8 Touch the [MACHINE] tab to complete the setting and restore the Ma-chine Status Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


15Utility Screen Settings

POD Administrator

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Utility Screen Settings 15



15.1 Utility Screen Setting OutlinesPress [Utility/Counter] on the control panel to display the Utility Menu

Screen.

The Utility Screen includes two types of setting items: one in which a user

can set and the other in which a machine manager is required to enter apassword.

This section describes the user setting and the machine manager settingseparately in two parts.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




!Details

The machine manager setting can be established by the user in the initial

setting.

It is recommended to assign the machine manager who will be the sole

person to control the machine manager setting. Please contact your

service representative to set up your password.

Return and Exit in the Utility screen

Touch [Return] to return to the previous screen.

Touch [Exit] to return to the screen before pressing [Utility/Counter] on the

control panel.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Lists of the function settings

01 System Setting Setting options(underlined: default)

01 Language Setting

Select the language used in the LCD.

American English

02 Buzzer Setting

01 Buzzer On/Off, Volume SettingSet the buzzer sound (the touch key sound) as touch-ing the screen.

ON/ OFF , Big/Small

02 Buzzer for Job Stop SettingSelect the duration of the buzzer sound when the ma-chine stops due to no paper and mishandled paper.

OFF /3 seconds/5 seconds/10 sec-onds

03 1SHOT Indication TimeSelect the SHOT indication time to be displayed in the

message indication area of the touch panel.

3 seconds /5 seconds

04 Default Screen SettingSelect the initial screen to be displayed when the powerswitch is turned on.

Machine /JOB List/Copier

05 Auto Reset SettingSet the reset interval starting from the completion of acopying job until the machine returns to the initial condi-tion, without selecting any key on the touch panel or thecontrol panel.

Off/ 60 seconds /120 seconds/180seconds/240 seconds/300 sec-onds/360 seconds/420 seconds/ 480 seconds/540 seconds

06 Key Response TimeSelect the key response time.

Normal /0.5 seconds/1 seconds/ 2seconds/3 seconds

07 Change User PasswordChange a user password which the user has registeredfor user authentication.

Enter new password

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




02 Function Setting Setting options(underlined: default)

01 Feed Tray Setting

01 Feed Tray Auto SelectionSelect ATS for each tray and the priority of the detec-tion when ATS functions.

ATS/APS Switch (Trays 1 to 5): Off ,Tray Priority: Tray1/Tray2/Tray3/ Tray4/Tray5

02 ATS PermitSet ATS on or off.

ON/OFF

03 Auto Paper TypeSet the paper type to be selected when ATS func-tions.

Paper Type ( Normal )/ Weight ( 62-71g, 72-91g )/ Colored Paper ( White )/ Hole-Punch ( No Hole-Punch )

02 Each Function Setting

Image Shift Decimal PointSelect On/Off to enter a decimal point for image shift.

Decimal On/ Decimal Off

Printer Prohibit TimerSelect the interval time that printing via PC is prohib-ited after touching the touch keys.

Off/15 seconds/ 30 seconds /60seconds/90 seconds

03 Density Setting

01 Density Shift for Enhance ModeSelect the default density setting for each EnhanceMode.

0 - 5 (Text & Photo:2, Low Con-trast:3 , Photo:2 , Text:2 )

02 User Density SettingPreset the density level which is frequently used. Two levels

03 Photo Mode Density SettingSelect the density level set in EE (Auto Density Set-ting) when the Photo Mode is selected.

Lighter/ Normal /Darker

04 Image Density SelectionSet the image density lighter or set the maximum darklevel darker, without degrading the image quality.

+1 - -5 (7 levels)

04 Preset ZoomPreset the magnification ratio which is frequently used.

Three types

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




03 Copy Setting Setting options(underlined: default)

01 Reset Setting

01 Initial SettingSet the initial setting when the machine is reset.

Copy Initial Setting (Original Setting/ Special Image/Zoom/Output Appli-cation/Copy Mode/Paper Preset-ting/Rotation/ADF)

02 Reset Function Setting

01 AUTO RESET Key SettingSet the on-screen indication which is displayed whenpressing [Reset].The factory default setting is Full Auto, and the initialsetting is the settings defined in ”01Initial Setting”.

Full Auto /Initial Setting

02 Each Reset SettingThis setting is enabled when Initial Setting is selectedin “01 AUTO RESET Key Setting”. Set the copyingconditions preset to either Mode Memory 30 or CopyInitial Setting.

Initialize Set /Mode Memory(30)

03 Finisher Mode for Full AutoSelect the Finisher mode when Full Auto is selectedas pressing [Reset].

Uncollated/ Collated /Staple & Col-late/Fold & Staple/Folding/Face UP/ Face Down

03 Initial by Key Counter InsertSelect to reset the copying conditions to the initialsetting when inserting the key counter and the copy

card.

On /Off


Auto select of Booklet copy Set the machine to automatically select the Bookletmode when Stapling & Folding or Folding mode is se-lected. This function is not supported.

Auto Select /Not Auto Select

Original Glass AMSSet the machine to detect the size of the original andselect the appropriate magnification ratio to corre-spond to the selected paper size.

On /Off

ADF AMSSet the machine to automatically select an appropri-ate ratio for copying when detecting the original sizeplaced on the ADF.

On /Off

Orig. Glass Auto Size SelectSet the machine to automatically select the same sizeof copy paper as the original placed on the originalglass.

On /Off

ADF Auto Size SelectSet the machine to automatically select the same sizeof copy paper as the original placed on the ADF.

On /Off

Select Tray when APS CancelSelect the tray to be automatically selected when APSis released.

APS Select Tray /Tray1/Tray2/ Tray3/Tray4/Tray5

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Org./Out Bind Direction SetSet the machine to conform the binding direction ofthe originals and printed sets each other.

On /Off

Stapling Auto ResetSet the stapling setting on or off when pressing [Re-set].

On/ Off

Original Binding DirectionSelect to reset or save the original direction settingmade on the Special Original Screen and the bind po-sition setting made on the Output Mode Screen aftercompletion of each copying job.

Not Release/ Release Per JOB

Status Hold When Auto ResetWhen Auto Reset functions, select to reset the Platen/ RADF mode to the initial setting, or save the previoussetting.

Hold/ Not hold

03 Copy Setting Setting options(underlined: default)

04 Scanner Setting Setting options(underlined: default)

01 Default Address SettingSelect the default destination to be displayed when se-lecting the Scanner Screen.

E-Mail /HDD/FTP/SMB


File Form Setting (E-Mail)Select the default file form when transmitting in E-Mail.

Package PDF /Division PDF/Pack-age TIFF/Division TIFF

File Form Setting (HDD)Select the default file form when saving in HDD.


File Form Setting (FTP)Select the default file form when transmitting to FTP.


File Form Setting (SMB)Select the default file form when transmitting in SMB.


Default Resolution Setting

Select the default scanning quality.

600dpi/ 400dpi /300dpi/200dpi

05 Touch Screen Adjustment

Check the touch screen and realign the position of the touch sensor that may have shifted.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





01 System Setting

01 Power Save Setting Auto Low Power/ Auto Shut OffSet the interval time of Auto Low Power and AutoShut Off modes.

Auto Low Power: 5 min. to 240 min.:15 min ., Auto Shut Off: OFF to 240min.: OFF/90 min.

02 Time and Date SettingTime/Summer Time/Diff. Time SettingSet the present time, summer time, and difference inthe time setting.

Setting Time

03 Weekly Timer Setting

01 Weekly Timer On/Off Setting

Enable or disable the weekly timer function.

Weekly Timer Off

02 Timer SettingSet the On/Off times in hours and minutes.

03 Timer Action On/Off SettingSet the On/Off condition of the machine for a givenmonth.

04 Lunch Hour Off SettingSet the machine to turn off and then on during thelunch break.

05 Set Password for Timer Interrupt

The password is required to enter when using the ma-chine by interrupting the Weekly Timer mode. Use thisfunction to set the password.

0000 (4 digits)

04 Management List Print

Mode Memory ListOutput the list of programmed contents of Modememory.

User Management ListOutput the list of contents registered by the user.

Use Management ListOutput the list of service modes, account values, andROM version of the machine.

Font Patter ListOutput the list of font patterns used with this machine.

Audit Log ReportOutput the audit log report of the security mode.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




05 Operation Prohibit Set

Lock/Delete Mode Memory Lock/unlock or Delete a mode memory that has been

programmed.

Permit /Prohibit

Change Send AddressPermit/prohibit to enter send address manually on theScanner Screen.

Permit/ Prohibit

Change Preset ZoomPermit/prohibit to alter already programmed magnifi-cation ratio.

Permit/ Prohibit

Change Overlay Memory Permit/prohibit to delete or overwrite a title of pro-grammed overlay image.

Permit /Prohibit

Scanner Function (E-Mail)Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data via E-Mail.

Permit /Prohibit

Scanner Function (HDD)Permit/prohibit to save scanned data in HDD.

Permit /Prohibit

Scanner Function (FTP)Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data to FTP.

Permit /Prohibit

Scanner Function (SMB)Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data in SMB.

Permit /Prohibit

06 Expert Adjustment

01 Original Scan Area SettingSet to delete the outside area of the original.

Erase Outside of Original /On - APS/AMS Only/Except Orig. Glass(1:1)

02 ADF Frame Erasure SettingSet to erase the frame when copying in ADF mode.

None/1mm/2mm/ 3mm /4mm/5mm

03 Non Image Area Erase SettingSet the detail settings to erase the outside area of theoriginal.

Erase Mode:Oblique Erase/Recta-ble Erase/ Auto Original Density:Five levels/ Auto

07 Size Setting

Original Size SearchSet the detected paper type of the original.

A/B Series/Inch Series/ Only A series /Full Size

Orig. Glass Small SizeSet the smallest size when copying by placing theoriginal on the original glass.

A5 /5.5x8.5/B5/A4/8.5x11

02 Manager/Machine Register

01 Machine Manager RegisterRegister the name of the machine manager and theextention number. The registered contents are dis-played on the Counter Screen.

Name Input: 8 digits/ExtensionNumber Input: 5 digits


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




03 User Auth./Volume Track

01 Authentication Method

01 Authentication SettingSet the authentication method and the number ofsections to be managed.

User Authentication ( Off ), Section Authentication ( Off ), Section NameInput ( Off ), User/Section Auth.Con-nect ( Off ), Password Input Timing( At JOB Complete ), Section Dirstib-ute Number ( 1000 )

02 Section Management SettingSet the section management against each mode andthe machine condition when reaching the copy limit.

Copy/Printer, Scanner, LimitReached Stop Setting ( Immediate- ly /After Print/Warning Only

02 Volume TrackSet the volume track setting. Change, Add or Deleteis available.

Section No./Section name/Pass-word/Limit

03 User Authentication SetRegister, Change, Add or Delete the user authentica-tion when the User Authentication is set in "01>01 Au-thentication Setting."

User No./User Name/Password/Be-long Section/Useable Function(Copy, Scanner, Store/Recall, Print-er)

04 Non register/Output SetSet to count the output of non-registered users andsections.

On /Off

04 Network Setting

01 Machine NIC Setting (For details, p. 17-55 )Set the NIC settings.

IP Address/Subnet Mask/Gateway Address/IP Address (Server PC)/

Line Speed Setting

02 Controller NIC Setting (For details, p. 17-57 )

01 TCP/IP (For details, p. 17-71 )Set the TCP/IP settings.

02 NetWare (For details, p. 17-75 )Set the NetWare settings

03 IPP (For details, p. 17-79 )Set the IPP settings.

04 FTP (For details, p. 17-82 )Set the FTP settings.

05 SNMP (For details, p. 17-84 )Set the SNMP settings.

06 SMB (For details, p. 17-86 )Set the SMB settings.

07 AppleTalk (For details, p. 17-88 )Set the AppleTalk settings.

08 E-Mail (For details, p. 17-90 )

09 HDD (For details, p. 17-96 )Set the duration for which scanned data is stored be-fore automatically deleted.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




06 System Connection

01 User CallTouch [Start] when calling CSRC.

Start

07 Security Setting

01 Machine Manager PasswordChange the machine manager password which is reg-istered in the Service mode menu.

00000000

02 HDD Management Setting

01 Folder Box List/DeleteList the details of the folder box, and delete it.

List and delete the details.

02 HDD Data Auto Delete Period SettingSet the period of time to keep data so that it will be

deleted automatically when specified period haspassed.

Not Delete /12 hours/1 day/2 days/3days/7 days/30 days

03 Change HDD Lock PasswordChange the password when accessing data stored inHDD.

03 Security Strengthen modeSet the Security Strengthen mode.

On/ Off

08 Scanner Address Register Edit or delete the registered scanneraddress.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16User Setting

POD Administrator

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


16 User Setting

16.1 01 System Setting

16.1.1 01 Language Setting

Select the language used in the touch panel.The initial setting is English.

Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [01 Language Setting].

2 Select the desired English mode.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Utility Menu

Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.1.2 02 Buzzer Setting

Use this function to adjust the volume of the touch key, or to select the du-

ration of the buzzer when the machine has stopped at the time of no paperor mishandled paper.

01 Buzzer ON/OFF, Volume Setting

Set the buzzer sound (the touch key sound) as touching the screen, and also

select the buzzer volume.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [02 Buzzer Setting].

2 Touch [01 Buzzer On/Off, Volume Setting].

3 Touch [On] to highlight it. Adjust the Buzzer volume, as desired. Touch[Small] or [Big] to regulate the buzzer volume of the touch keys. Touch

[Off] to highlight it. The buzzer will go off.

4 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Buzzer SettingScreen.

5 Touch [Return] to restore the Utility Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


02 Buzzer for Job Stop Setting

Select the duration of the buzzer sound when the machine stops.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [02 Buzzer Setting].

2 Touch [02 Buzzer for Job Stop Setting].

3 Select the desired time to highlight it.

4 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Buzzer SettingScreen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.1.3 03 1SHOT Indication Time

Select the SHOT indication time to be displayed in the message indication

area of the touch panel, such as “Original size A4.”

Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 1 SHOT Message Indication Time].

2 Touch [3 seconds] or [5 seconds] to highlight it.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Utility MenuScreen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


16.1.4 04 Default Screen Setting

Select the initial screen to be displayed when the power switch is turned on.

Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [04 Default Screen Setting].

2 Select the desired initial screen to highlight it.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.1.5 05 Auto Reset Setting

Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a copying job until the

machine returns to the initial screen, without selecting any key on the touchpanel or the control panel.

Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [05 Auto Reset Setting].



Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


16.1.6 06 Key Response Time

Select the response time between touching the key and the machine re-

sponses to it.

Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [06 Key Response Time].



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.1.7 07 Change User Password

Change a user password which the user has registered for user authentica-

tion.

!Details

The changed password is reflected to the user authentication setting de-

scription.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [07 Change User Password].

2 Enter the user name and the password then touch [OK].

3 Enter a new user password in [New Password]. Reenter the new userpassword in [Check Input].


Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.2 02 Function Setting

16.2.1 01 Feed Tray Setting

When the selected paper tray becomes empty while copying is in progress,

automatic tray switching detects the same copy paper size loaded in anothertray to allow copying to continue without interruption. (Auto Tray Switching: ATS)

01 Feed Tray Auto Selection

Select the tray size setting to be detected when ATS functions. You may alsoselect the priority of the detection for each tray.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


Procedure

1 Touch [02 Function Setting] - [01 Feed Tray Setting].

2 Touch [01 Feed Tray Auto Selection].

3 Touch to highlight the desired tray key under [ATS/APS Switch]. The

selected tray is automatically detected when ATS functions. The traysnot selected will not be detected even when ATS functions.

The selected tray will be displayed under [Tray Priority] as the tray key.

4 Touch to highlight the desired tray key under [Tray Priority], then

change its priority by using the arrow keys ( , ) and ( + ).

5 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Feed Tray SettingMenu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.2.2 02 ATS Permit

Set ATS On or Off.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


Procedure


2 Touch [02 ATS Permit].

3 Select [On] when ATS is used, and [Off] when ATS is not used.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.2.3 03 Auto Paper Type

Select the paper type setting of the tray which is automatically selected when

ATS functions. When the paper type that is not specified with this function isdesignated to the tray that is automatically selected by ATS, the machine in-dicates the paper type unmatched.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


Procedure


2 Touch [03 Auto Paper Type].

3 Select the paper type of the tray which is automatically selected when ATS functions. Touch to highlight the desired type of keys under [Paper

Type], [Weight], [Colored Paper], and [Hole-Punch]. You may choosemore than one key for each item.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.2.4 02 Each Function Setting

Select to enter a decimal point for image shift, and select the interval time

that printing via PC is prohibited after touching a touch key on the touch pan-el.

Procedure

1 Touch [02 Function Setting] - [02 Each Function Setting].

2 Touch [Decimal On] or [Decimal Off] to specify image shift in decimalpoint or not. Select the desired interval time key of the right side of[Printer Prohibit Timer] to set the timer.


Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


Procedure

1 Touch [02 Function Setting] - [03 Density Setting].

2 Touch [01 Density Shift for Enhance Mode].

3 Touch the desired numeric key (from 0 to 5) for each Enhance mode to

specify the desired Density shift.

4 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Density SettingMenu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


02 User Density Setting

The copy density level is divided into 16 levels between Darker and Normal,and between Normal and Lighter, respectively. Select and preset two levels

from the 32 levels. The preset density level setting can be recalled from Spe-cial Image on the Copy Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


Procedure


2 Touch [02 User Density Setting].

3 Touch [User Density 1] or [User Density 2]. Touch [Darker] or [Lighter]to select the desired density level to preset either between the darkest

and normal or between normal and the lightest.

4 Output density level sample sheet. Select the sample sheet from eachsample output level of [1-4], [5-8], [9-12], and [13-16], and touch the[COPY] tab. Place the original on the original glass, and press [Start] on

the control panel. Repeat this step when outputting more than onesample sheet for each level. Check the sample sheet and enter the de-

sired density level using the touch panel keypad on the right side. Thenumber entered will be displayed in the box above [Set Density].To output the sample sheet of the specified density level, touch [Set

Density] then touch the [COPY] tab. Place the original on the originalglass, and press [Start] on the control panel.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


16.2.6 03 Photo Mode Density Setting

Set the density level of Photo Mode to be specified in AE.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


Procedure


2 Touch [03 Photo Mode Density Setting].

3 Select the desired density key from [Lighter], [Normal] and [Darker].



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


16.2.7 04 Image Density Selection

Select the image density on the Copy Screen. Adjust the image density of

any dark part of the original to darker (maximum dark) or lighter, just like off-set printing. Similar to printing materials such as books, this feature is usefulto make texts lighter in order to ease the eye strain.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


Procedure


2 Touch [04 Image Density Selection].

3 Touch the desired density key to highlight it.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


16.2.8 04 Preset Zoom

Set three types of the preset zoom on the Preset Zoom Screen. The initial

setting for Preset Zoom1 is 4.000, Preset Zoom2 is 2.000, and Preset Zoom3is 0.500.

Procedure

1 Touch [02 Function Setting] - [04 Preset Zoom].

2 Touch the desired preset key (from 1 to 3) and display the desiredzoom ratio on the right side of the keys using the touch panel kyepad.


Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.3 03 Copy Setting

16.3.1 01 Reset Setting

Set the copying condition as desired when the machine is reset. Also select

whether to reset the machine or not when inserting a key counter or a copycard under the following reset conditions.

Resetting the machine:

- when the power is turned off

- when Auto Reset is on

- when Power Save is on

- when copying becomes available by entering the password when User Authentication/Section Authentication is on

- when a key counter or a copy card is inserted

- when pressing [Reset] on the control panel

01 Initial Setting

Besides the factory default setting (Full Auto), you may set the copying con-

dition as the initial setting as desired.

Full Auto copying condition:

- Original Setting: standard

- Special Image: standard

- Auto Zoom: On

- Zoom: 1.000

- Output Application: See “02 Reset Function Setting”

- Copy Mode: 1-1

- Auto Paper Select: On

- Rotation: On

- ADF: On

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


Procedure

1 Touch [03 Copy Setting] - [01 Reset Setting].

2 Touch [01 Initial Setting].

3 Set the following setting items in initial conditions: Original Setting,Special Image, AE On/Off, Zoom, Output Application, Copy Mode,

Auto Paper Select/Paper Presetting, and Rotation On/Off.Follow the same procedure as setting it on the Copy Screen.

Touch [ADF] to select the ADF mode as the initial setting.

4 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Reset Setting

Menu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


02 Reset Function Setting

When the machine is reset, select the copying conditions from the factorydefault setting (Full Auto), Initial Set which is set at “03 Copy Setting - 01 Re-

set Setting - 01 Initial Setting”, or the copying condition which is preset toMode Memory 30. In addition, alter Output Application of Full Auto as de-

sired.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


Procedure


2 Touch [02 Reset Function Setting].

3 Select the copying conditions when resetting the machine.

- AUTO RESET Key Setting:

Touch [Full Auto] to set to the factory default setting (Full Auto).- Touch [Initial Setting] to set as “03 Copy Setting - 01 Reset Setting

- 01 Initial Setting”.

- Each Reset Setting:Touch [Mode Memory(30)] to set to the copying conditions presetto Mode Memory 30.

- In order to specify the setting selected in [01 Initial Setting] of [03Copy Setting] as the copying conditions when reset, select [Initial-

ize Set].

2

Note

When [Initial Setting] is selected for [AUTO RESET Key Setting], [Each

Reset Setting] becomes enabled.

4Select Output Application for Full Auto.Touch any key on the right side of [Finisher Mode for Full Auto].


Menu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


03 Initial by Key Counter Insert

Select to reset or not when inserting the key counter and the copy card.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


Procedure


2 Touch [03 Initial by Key Counter Insert].

3 Touch [On] to reset and [Off] not to reset, when inserting the key coun-ter or the copy card.


Menu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16



The following features can be provided by switching the setting.

- Auto select of Booklet copy

Set the machine with SD-501 mounted to automatically select the Book-

let mode when Stapling & Folding or Folding mode is selected. This func-tion is not supported in this version.

- Original Glass AMS

The machine detects the size of the original and selects the appropriate

magnification ratio to correspond to the selected paper size.

- ADF AMS

After detecting the original size placed in the ADF, the copier automati-cally selects an appropriate ratio for the copy when copy size is selected

manually.

- Original Glass APS The machine automatically selects the same size of copy paper as the

original placed on the original glass.

- ADF APS

The machine automatically selects the same size of copy paper as theoriginal placed in the ADF.

- Select tray when APS cancel

Select the tray to be automatically selected when APS is released.

- Orig./Out Bind Direction Set

Set the machine to conform to the binding direction of the originals andprinted sets each other.

- Stapling Auto Reset

Staple mode is automatically canceled after a job is completed with Sta-

ple sort mode On.

- Original Binding Direction

Select to reset or save the original direction setting made on the SpecialOriginal Screen and the binding position setting made on the OutputMode Screen after completion of each copying job.

- Status Hold When Auto Reset When Reset functions, select to reset the Platen/ADF mode to the initial

setting, or save the previous setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


Procedure

1 Touch [03 Copy Setting] - [02 Each Function Setting].

2 Select On/Off or touch the desired key to each item on the left side of

the screen.There are two setting screens. Touch [Next] and [Previous] to switchbetween the screens.


Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.4 04 Scanner Setting

16.4.1 01 Default Address Setting

Select the default destination of the image scanned when selecting the

Scanner Screen.Select one from the following four destinations:

- E-Mail (E-Mail address)

- HDD (Box No.)

- FTP (FTP server address)

- SMB

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


Procedure

1 Touch [04 Scanner Setting] - [01 Default Address Setting].

2 Touch the desired key for the destination.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting



Select the default settings for the file form and the resolution when selecting

the Scanner Screen.

- File Form Setting (E-Mail)

Select the data form for transmitting scanned data attached to an e-mail,from Package PDF, Division PDF, Package TIFF, and Division TIFF.

- File Form Setting (HDD)

Select the data form for saving scanned data to HDD from Package PDF,

Division PDF, Package TIFF, and Division TIFF.

- File Form Setting (FTP)

Select the data form for transmitting scanned data to an FTP server fromPackage PDF, Division PDF, Package TIFF, and Division TIFF.

- File Form Setting (SMB)

Select the data form for transmitting scanned data to a public folder fromPackage PDF, Division PDF, Package TIFF, and Division TIFF.

- Default Resolution Setting

Select the default scanning quality from 600dpi, 400dpi, 300dpi, and

200dpi.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


User Setting 16


Procedure

1 Touch [04 Scanner Setting] - [02 Each Function Setting].

2 Touch the desired key to each item on the left side of the screen.


!Details

When transmitting simultaneously to multiple destinations, the file form

setting cannot be specified individually.

When transmitting simultaneously, the file form setting will be selected inthe following priority: E-Mail>HDD>FTP>SMB

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


16 User Setting


16.5 05 Touch Screen Adjustment

Use this function to check the touch screen and realign the position of the

touch sensor that may have shifted.

!Details

The Touch Screen Adjustment Screen can be displayed on the Utility

Menu Screen by pressing [5] of the control panel keypad.

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Touch Screen Adjustment].

2 Touch the “+” symbol at the upper right corner, then lower left corneron the screen. The present coordinates will be displayed in the mes-

sage area of the screen.

3 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first lineof the message area fall within the standard value displayed in the sec-ond line.

4 Touch each [Check Button] at the upper left and lower right corners onthe screen to check if the buzzer tone functions normally.

5 If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 3,or the buzzer tone does not sound in step 4, repeat the adjustment pro-

cedure from steps 2 to 4 or contact your service representative.

6 Press [1] of the control panel keypad to return to the screen beforepressing [Utility/Counter] on the control panel.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


17Machine Manager Setting

POD Administrator

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Machine Manager Setting 17



17.1 Machine Manager Setting OutlinesThis section describes the items which the machine manager can set on the

Utility/Counter Screen, and the procedure of setting these items.

In the initial condition, the machine manager setting can be specified withoutentering the machine manager password.

The machine manager setting associates with changing of touch panel ex-pansion and machine management. It is recommended to assign the ma-chine manager who will be the sole person to execute operations that are

explained in this section.

!Details

Please contact your service representative to set up your machine man-

ager password.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




How to access the Machine Manager Setting Menu

1 Press [Utility/Counter] on the control panel to display the Utility MenuScreen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2 Touch [06 Machine Manager Setting].

The Machine Manager Setting Menu is displayed.

When the Password Input Screen is displayed, enter the eight-digit ma-chine manager password then touch [OK].

3 Set each function items.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.2 01 System Setting

17.2.1 01 Power Save Setting

Specify Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off when setting the Power Save

mode manually, and select the interval of time that must elapse before AutoLow Power and Auto Shut Off.

Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [01 Power Save Setting].

2 Specify the Power Save mode to be set manually by pressing [Power

Save] on the control panel, by selecting [Auto Low Power] or [Auto ShutOff].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Select the interval of time that must elapse before turning to Auto Low

Power automatically.

- Touch the arrow keys ( , ) and ( + ) in each area to select a specific

waiting period before activating Auto Low Power.- The initial setting is 15 minutes.

2

Note

The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto

Shut Off setting.

If the same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto Low Pow-

er, Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power.

4 Select the interval of time that must elapse before turning to Auto ShutOff automatically.

- Touch the arrow keys ( , ) and ( + ) in each area to select a specificwaiting period before activating Auto Shut Off.

- The initial setting is 90 minutes.

2

Note

If the period of time selected for Auto Shut Off is shorter than that of for

Auto Low Power, the period of time for Auto Low Power will be forciblyreset to the same period of time as Auto Shut Off. Auto Low Power will

not function.

5 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Machine ManagerSetting Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.2.2 02 Time and Date Setting

Set the current date and time, the summer time, and also the time difference.

The default setting for the summer time is off.

Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [02 Time and Date Setting].

2 Adjust the time.

The time indicated by the machine is displayed in the upper line and or-dered by date, month, year, and time (in 24-hour expression).

- Enter the time by using the touch panel keypad.- Touch [Set] to move the highlighted section to the number to be

changed. Repeat the same procedure for month, date, and time.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Set the summer time.

- The summer time is initially deactivated.- To activate the summer time (Daylight Savings Time) function,

touch [Summer Time] to highlight it. The Present time will gain onehour.

4 The Difference in time setting is provided in order to give the time dif-ference information at the same time when an e-mail is received.

To set this function, follow the procedure below.

- Touch [Diff. time setting] to display the Difference in Time SettingScreen.

- Touch [+ 5 -] to display “+” when the local time is earlier than the

Universal time, or “-” when the local time is later.- Use the touch panel keypad to enter the time difference between

the Universal time and the local time in the machine setting area.(e.g. Enter “-0600” for six hours later than the Universal time.)

- Touch [OK] to return to the Time and Date Setting Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.2.3 03 Weekly Timer Setting

This function can be accessed only by the machine manager.

The Weekly Timer is a machine management function that shuts down power

to the machine on a daily or hourly basis, and can be programmed specifi-

cally for lunch breaks, weekends and holidays, or any time the copier is notrequired.

In addition, Timer Interrupt can be enabled (with or without a password re-

quirement) to allow temporary use of the machine during periods when pow-er is shut down by the Timer function.

If the Weekly Timer needs to be activated on your machine, contact yourservice representative.

Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer

- The power plug is inserted into the socket.- The power switch is turned on.

- The current date and time are correctly set.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




01 Weekly Timer On/Off Setting

Enable and disable the Weekly Timer function.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [01 WeeklyTimer On/Off Setting].

2 Touch [Weekly timer On] to activate Weekly Timer, or touch [Weeklytimer Off] to deactivate Weekly Timer. The default setting is [WeeklyTimer Off].

The selected key will be highlighted.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Set-

ting Menu Screen.

4 Touch [Return] to restore the Machine Manager Setting Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




02 Timer Setting

Use this function to set the On/Off times in hours and minutes for each dayof the week or set the collective time for the entire week, i.e., the same On/

Off time for a certain day of the week.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [02 Timer Set-ting].

2 When the Timer Setting Screen is displayed, the On-time of Monday is

always highlighted.

Enter a two-digit On-hour (ex. 8 a.m. is 08) and a two-digit On-minute

(ex. 7 min. is 07) using the touch panel keypad, and then touch [Set].

3 Touching [Set] repeatedly will shift the input section from Monday On,Monday Off, Tuesday On, Tuesday Off.

2

Note

If On-time and Off-time are the same, the power will not be turned on.

If the setting is 00:00~00:00, you will not be able to set the machine off/ on condition for specific days.

When setting Sunday Off-time, Monday On-time is highlighted again.

4 To set the On/Off time collectively for more than one day of the week,touch [Block Set] to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Time CollectiveSetting Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




5 When this screen is displayed, the On and Off times are always set at

00:00~00:00.

- Touch to highlight the day(s) of the week to be set. More than one

can be selected at a time.- Enter the On-time and Off-time using the touch panel keypad, and

then touch [Set] after each entry.

6 Touch [OK] on the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen or on the

Weekly Timer On/ Off Time Collective Setting Screen to complete thesetting, and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. If otherWeekly Timer setting changes are required, select the desired menu

item from 1 to 5.


ting Menu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




03 Timer Action On/Off Setting

Use this function to set the timer On/Off for a given day of a given month. Setthe On-Off condition for specific days individually or collectively for all Mon-

days through Sundays of the given month.

2Note

The default setting is collective: On for Mondays through Saturdays, and

Off for Sundays.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [03 Timer Ac-tion On/Off Setting].

2 Use the arrow keys ( , ) and ( + ) to scroll to the desired month. Touch

the key for the desired day to activate the timer on the calendar dis-played on the center of the screen.

3 To collectively set the on/off data for the entire month by the day of theweek, touch [On] or [Off] for the desired day at the bottom of thescreen. If you touch an already-highlighted key, it will not be changed.

4 If any change is made in the collective setting area, the Timer Action

Change Confirmation popup screen will be displayed.

- Touch [Yes] to change the timer action, or touch [No] to cancel.

- The Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen will be restored.

5 Touch [OK] on the Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen to complete the

setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




04 Lunch Hour Off Setting

The Weekly Timer function turns the machine On and Off once a day. Use theLunch Hour Off Setting to shut down the power during the lunch break and

then turn it on again according to the Weekly Timer function setting. Only oneoff-time interval can be programmed.

2

Note

The factory default setting is [Function Invalid].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [04 Lunch HourOff Setting].

2 Touch [Function Valid] to activate the Lunch hour off function. Set Off-time and Restart time using the touch panel keypad, and then touch[Set] after each entry.

Touch [Function Invalid] to deactivate the Lunch Hour Off function. Thetime setting area will appear grayed out and cannot be selected.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Set-ting Menu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




05 Set Password for Timer Interrupt

Use this password setting mode to establish a four-digit password requiredfor using the Timer Interrupt function. The default password of 0000 allows

the timer function to be interrupted without entering the password.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [03 Weekly Timer Setting] - [05 Set Pass-word for Timer Interrupt].

2 Use the touch panel keypad to enter a four-digit password.

2

Note

When the password setting is 0000, Timer Interrupt can be used simply

by turning the machine off, then on. In this case, you will be asked to en-

ter the duration of use (a period of time to turn the machine power on).


ting Menu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.2.4 04 Management List Print

Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items.

Mode memory list

Programmed contents of Mode memory

User management list

Home position settings selected by user

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Use management list

Information controlled by user authentication or division authentication

Font pattern list

Font patterns used in the machine

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Audit log report

Audited log

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [04 Management List Print].

2 Touch any key to print the list.

3 Press the [COPY] tab to display the Copy Screen.

4 Press [Start] on the control panel to start printing the selected list.

To suspend printing, press [Stop]. Touch the [UTILITY] tab to return tothe Management List Print Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.2.5 05 Operation Prohibit Set

Use this function to permit or prohibit programmed contents of Mode mem-

ory.

- Lock/Delete mode memory:

Lock/unlock or delete a mode memory that has been programmed. Thesettings of a locked mode memory cannot be changed.

- Change send address:

Permit/prohibit to enter send address manually on the Scanner Screen.

- Change preset zoom:

Permit/prohibit to alter already programmed magnification ratio.

- Change overlay memory:

Permit/prohibit to delete or overwrite a title of programmed overlay im-age.

- Scanner function (E-Mail): Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data via E-Mail.

- Scanner function (HDD):

Permit/prohibit to save scanned data in HDD.

- Scanner function (FTP):

Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data to an FTP server.

- Scanner function (SMB):

Permit/prohibit to transmit scanned data to a public folder.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [05 Operation Prohibit Set].

2 Select [Permit] or [Prohibit] of Mode memory.

- Touch [Lock/Delete Mode Memory].- The programmed name is displayed on the right side of the Mode

memory number, when the setting is already programmed.Touch the key on the left side of the desired Mode memory number.

Use the arrow keys to scroll to the desired Mode memory number,if required.Touching the locked key will clear the locking mark and release

locking.Touching the key with a name not entered will not lock the key and

will not display the lock mark.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- Touch the Mode memory number you want to delete. Use the arrow

keys to scroll to the desired Job number, if required. Touch [Delete].Selected programs and the name will be deleted from the Modememory.

2Note

Locked Mode memory is deleted and a lock is canceled. Note that Mode

memory once deleted cannot be recalled.

30 Mode memory can be stored. Use [Next] or [Previous] to display the

desired Mode memory.

- Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Operation Pro-hibit Setting Screen.

3 Touch to highlight [Permit] or [Prohibit] for each item.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.2.6 06 Expert Adjustment

Use this function to set the following items for scanning the original.

- Original Scan Area Setting

- ADF Frame Erasure Setting

- Non Image Area Erase Setting

01 Original Scan Area Setting

Select to delete or not the outside area of the original from the following threeways:

- Erase Outside of Original:

Set the machine any time to delete the outside area of the original.

- On – APS/AMS Only:

Set the machine to delete the outside area of the original only when APS

or AMS is activated.

- Except Orig. Glass (1:1):

Set the machine to delete the outside area of the original except when

copying in real size on the original glass.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [06 Expert Adjustment] - [01 Original Scan Area Setting].

2 Touch the desired key to highlight it.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Expert AdjustmentMenu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




02 ADF Frame Erasure Setting

Set Frame Erasure to function anytime when copying in ADF mode, and setthe amount of the outside area to be deleted.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [06 Expert Adjustment] - [02 ADF FrameErasure Setting].

2 Touch the desired amount of outside area to be deleted. Touch [None]if deleting the outside area is not necessary.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




03 Non Image Area Erase Setting

Use this function to select the erase mode, and set the density level of theoriginal (five levels). The default setting is [Auto].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [01 System Setting] - [06 Expert Adjustment] - [03 Non Image Area Erase Setting].

2 Select the erase mode and the density level of the original.

- Touch [Auto] to automatically select the appropriate settings for theoriginal placed on the original glass for either mode.

- Touch [Oblique Erase] or [Rectangle Erase] to manually select theerase mode.

- Touch any key from five exposure levels to manually select the den-

sity level.

2

NoteIt may not function appropriately depending upon the original even when

selecting [Oblique Erase] or [Rectangle Erase]. In this case, select [Auto].



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.2.7 07 Size Setting

Use this function to select the detected paper type of the original and the

minimum size of the original placed on the original glass.

Procedure

1Touch [01 System Setting] - [07 Size Setting].

2 Select the paper type to be detected in ADF mode or when the originalis placed on the original glass.Touch any key on the right side of [Original Size Search].

3 Select the minimum size of the original to be detected in APS mode.Touch the desired key to highlight it on the right side of [Orig. Glass

Small Size].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.3 02 Manager/Machine Register

17.3.1 01 Machine Manager Register

Use this function to register the machine manager name and the extension

number which are displayed on the left side of the Utility Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [02 Manager/Machine Register] - [01 Machine Manager Regis-ter].

2 Touch [Name Input] to display the Machine Manager Name InputScreen. Use the touch panel keypad to register the machine managername. The eight characters including a hyphen (-) can be entered.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the setting to return to the previous screen.

4 Enter the extension number of the machine manager on the right sideof [Extension Number Input] using the touch panel keypad.

- The five-digit numbers including a hyphen (-) can be entered.

- When the extension number is below five digits, enter hyphens tomake it five. If the hyphen is entered as the first number, it is dis-

played as a space on the Utility Menu Screen. The number which isentered will be displayed from the last digit, and it is shifted leftwardas a next number is entered.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.4 03 Use Auth./Volume Track

17.4.1 01 Authentication Method

Use this function to select any function of User Authentication and Volume

Track. Authentication settings can be altered according to the user authen-tication and volume track settings.

01 Authentication Setting

Establish the authentication settings by combining the following six ele-

ments.

- User Authentication:

Enter the user name and the user password.

- Section Authentication:

Enter the section password.- Section Name Input:

Enter the section name. (Section Name Input cannot be selected whenSection Authentication is set to Off.)

- User/Section Auth. Connect:

When User Authentication and Section Authentication are set to On and

User/Section Auth. Connect is set to On, Section Authentication is not re-

quired to enter.

- Password Input Timing:

Set the timing of entering the password.- Section Distribute Number:

Enter the number of sections. The total number of authentication to bedistributed is 1,000 for both a user and a section. The remaining number

from which the number of sections is subtracted from 1,000 will be dis-tributed as user authentication.

!Details

It is recommended to distribute authentication for both the user and thesection, otherwise either party cannot be assigned authentication if it is

distributed to only one party.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track] - [01 Authentication Method] - [01 Authentication Setting].

2 Select [On] or [Off] on the right side of [User Authentication], [Section

Authentication], [Section Name Input], and [User/Section Auth. Con-nect].

3 Select [At Auto Reset] or [At JOB Complete] on the right side of [Pass-word Input Timing].

4 Touch [Section Distribute Number] to display the touch panel keypad.

Enter the number to distribute using the keypad or the arrow keys ( , )and ( + ), then touch [OK].

5 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the AuthenticationMethod Setting Menu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




02 Section Management Setting

Use this function to set Copy/Printer or Scanner jobs managed by the sec-tion, and select the machine condition in which the machine stops due to

reaching the copy limit.

!Details

If [Copy/Printer] or [Scanner] is set to Off when Section Authentication is

set to On on the Authentication Method Setting Screen, the section pass-

word is not required to enter for authentication. In this case, job count

and copy limit count will be suspended.

When [Immediately] of [Limit Reached Stop Setting] is selected, the job

is immediately suspended as soon as the copy limit is reached. In this

case, copying conditions, output data, and scanned data will not be hold.In order to continue the job with the same section password, change the

number of the copy limit which is set to the section password or reset

counting.

When [After Print] is selected, the machine stops after completing the job asreaching the copy limit. The message “Copy limit reached” is displayed, and

the machine stops its operation.

When [Warning Only] is selected, the message “Copy limit reached” is dis-

played as reaching the copy limit, and the next job can be continuously ex-ecuted.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track] - [01 Authentication Method] - [02Section Management Setting].

2 Select [On] or [Off] on the right side of [Copy/Printer] and [Scanner], re-spectively.

3 Select [Immediately], [After Print], or [Warning Only] on the right side of[Limit Reached Stop Setting].



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.4.2 02 Volume Track

Use this function to assign a number to each section, and set a section

name, password and limit value to each number. The registered sectionmanagement setting is listed on the screen. Select the section managementsetting from the list and change, reset or delete the setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track] - [02 Volume Track].

2 Follow the instructions below for adding, changing and deleting thesection setting, and also resetting the copy count.

To change section settings:

- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the section name to be

changed and touch to highlight it.- Touch [Change] to display the Change Registered Section Screen.

- Touch the desired item to be changed and display the input screen.- Enter the new setting. For the details on entering texts in the input

screen, see the appendix. You may enter eight digits for the pass-

word, eight characters for the section name, and eight digits for thecopy limit.


- The message will be displayed when the changed password or sec-tion name is duplicated. Touch [No] to accept the duplication, ortouch [Yes] to enter another password or section name.

To add section settings:

- Touch [Add] to display the Add Registered Section Screen.- Touch [Section No.] to display the input screen, and enter the sec-

tion number. Touch [OK]. You may enter four digits for the sectionnumber.

- Touch [Section Name] to display the input screen. Enter the section

name and touch [OK]. You may enter eight characters for the sec-tion name. For the details on entering texts in the input screen, seethe appendix.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- Touch [Password] to display the input screen. Enter the password

and touch [OK]. You may enter eight digits for the password. Forthe details on entering texts in the input screen, see the appendix.

- Touch [Limit] to display the input screen. Enter the copy limit value

and touch [OK]. You may enter eight digits for the copy limit.

- Touch [OK] to complete the setting.- The message will be displayed when the changed password or sec-

tion name is duplicated. Touch [No] to accept the duplication, or

touch [Yes] to enter another password or section name.

To delete section settings:- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the section name to be deleted

and touch to highlight it.- Touch [Delete] to display the Delete Confirmation popup screen.

- Touch [Yes] to delete, or touch [No] to cancel.

To reset section count:

- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the section name to reset thecount and touch to highlight it.

- Touch [Count Reset] to display the Reset Confirmation popup

screen.- Touch any key to reset. Touch [Cancel] when not resetting.

To reset all count:- Touch [All Count Reset] to display the Reset Confirmation popup

screen.- Touch any key to reset. Touch [Cancel] when not resetting.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.4.3 03 User Authentication Set

Use this function to assign a number to each user, and set a user name,

password and limit value to each number. The registered user setting is listedon the screen. Select the user setting from the list and change, reset or deletethe setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track - [03 User Authentication Set.

2 Follow the instructions below for adding, changing and deleting the

user setting, and also resetting the copy count.To change user settings:

- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the user name to be changedand touch to highlight it.

- Touch [Change] to display the Change Registered User Screen.- Touch [User Name] to display the input screen. Enter the user name

and touch [OK]. You may enter eight letters for the user name. For

the details on entering texts in the input screen, see the appendix.- Touch [Password] to display the input screen. Enter the password


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- Touch [Belong Section] to display the screen to select a section be-

long to. Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the desired sectionname, touch to highlight it, then touch [OK].

!DetailsWhen [User/Section Auth. Connect] is set to On on the Authentication

Method Setting Screen, [Belong Section] can be specified.

- Touch any key on the right side of [Useable Function] to select the job necessary to authenticate a newly registered user.


To add user settings:

- Touch [Add] to display the Add Registered User Screen.- Touch [User No.] to display the input screen. Enter the user number

and touch [OK. You may enter four digits for the section number.

- Touch [User Name] to display the input screen. Enter the user nameand touch [OK]. You may enter eight letters for the section name.

For the details on entering texts in the input screen, see the appen-dix.

- Touch [Password] to display the input screen. Enter the password


- Touch [Belong Section] to display the screen to select a section be-long to. Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the desired sectionname, touch to highlight it, then touch [OK].

!Details

When [User/Section Auth. Connect] is set to On on the Authentication

Method Setting Screen, [Belong Section] can be specified.

- Touch any key on the right side of [Useable Function] to select the job necessary to authenticate a newly registered user.


To delete user settings:- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the user name to be deleted

and touch to highlight it.

- Touch [Delete] to display the Delete Confirmation popup screen.- Touch [Yes] to delete, or touch [No] to cancel.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




To reset user count:

- Touch [Next] or [Previous] to display the user name to reset thecount and touch to highlight it.

- Touch [Count Reset] to display the Reset Confirmation popup

screen.

- Touch any key to reset. Touch [Cancel] when not resetting.

To reset all count:- Touch [All Count Reset] to display the Reset Confirmation popup

screen.

- Touch any key to reset. Touch [Cancel] when not resetting.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.4.4 04 Non register/Output Set

Use this function to limit the output setting of an unregistered user or section.

When this function is set to On, only the initial output setting can be set to

any job under a condition of which user authentication and/or section au-

thentication is set to Off.

Procedure

1 Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track] - [04 Non register/Output Set].

2 Touch [On] to activate this function, or touch [Off] to deactivate this

function.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Authentication

Method Setting Menu Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.5 04 Network Setting

17.5.1 01 Machine NIC Setting

Control the NIC settings such as the IP address and line speed of the ma-

chine.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [01 Machine NIC Setting].

2 Specify the following items.

Enter numeric values using the touch panel keypad. After entering a

value, touch [Set]. The next item becomes highlighted for setting. Con-tinue in this manner.

- IP Address

Enter the IP address of the machine.- Subnet Mask

Enter the subnet mask.- Gateway Address

Enter the gateway address.

- IP Address (Server PC) Enter the IP address of the PC on which PageScope Job Editor

Server is installed.- Line Speed Setting

Specify the line speed of the network. Choose from the options pro-

vided.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the Machine Manager

Setting Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.5.2 02 Controller NIC Setting

Specify the controller settings. Various default settings or network settings

can be customized as required.

List of the Network SettingsSpecify the settings for connecting a network printer and network scanner,and the settings for TCP/IP, RAW port numbers, IP Filter (permission/denial),

and ping.

For details, refer to “01 TCP/IP” on page 17-71.

Specific setting and Description Setting options (underlined: de-fault)

01 TCP/IP

TCP/IPSpecify enable or disable TCP/IP. Enable /Disable

DHCPSpecify enable or disable Dynamic Host ConfigurationProtocol (DHCP). If Enable is selected, the IP addressis automatically obtained from the DHCP server, inwhich case it is not necessary to enter it.

Enable/ Disable

IP AddressSpecify the IP address. 0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)

Subnet Mask

Specify the subnet mask. 0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)

Default Gateway Specify as required. 0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)

DNS Server1 to 3Specify DNS server addresses. 0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)

DNS Host NameSpecify the DNS host name.

**********Varied from machine to machine.Max. 63 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics canbe used.

DNS Domain NameSpecify the DNS domain name. Max. 63 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics canbe used.

LPDWhen Enable is selected, LPD/LPR printing becomesavailable.

Enable /Disable

Network SpeedSpecify the network transfer rate.

Auto Negotiation /10M Half Du-plex/10M Full Duplex/100M HalfDuplex/100M Full Duplex

TCP/IP RAW port settings (1 to 6)Specify RAW port numbers and to be used or not.

Use /Not Use(Set between 1 - 65535.)

TCP/IP Filter permission settings * 1 *2

Specify to use the permission settings or not, and therange in which to permit connections.

On/ Off 0.0.0.0 - 0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




* 1: f the range of the permission setting is the same as that of the denial setting, the latter settingoverrides the former.

* 2: The functions that are affected by the permission and denial settings are as follows:HTTP servers (PSWC, IPP), HTTP servers (PSWC with SSL), printing over the network (LPD,RAW Port, SMB), FTP servers (access to Scan to HDD jobs), SNMP

TCP/IP Filter denial settings * 1 *2

Specify to use the denial settings or not, and the rangein which to deny connections.

On/ Off 0.0.0.0 - 0.0.0.0 (0 - 255)

Network Test Ping AddressPerform ping.

Max. 255 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics canbe used.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Specify the settings for connecting network printer, and the NetWare set-

tings. For details, refer to “02 NetWare” on page 17-75


02 NetWare

NetWare

NetWareIf Use is selected, Novell NetWare (IPX/SPX) is en-abled as the print server protocol.

Use/ Not Use

Frame TypeSelect the frame type.

Auto Detect /IEEE802.2/ IEEE802.3/Ethernet2/ IEEE802.2SNAP

Operation ModeSelect the required operation mode. Pserver /Nprinter/Rprinter

NetWare Pserver Setting

Print Server NameEnter a print server name.

*********Varied from machine to machine.Max. 47 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics canbe used.

Print Server Password * 1

Specify a password for the Novell print server. Thispassword is shared among all the servers that areallocated to the print server.


Polling IntervalSpecify the interval with which to poll. 1 - 65535 (1)

Bindery DisableWhen Novell NetWare 4.x or later is used, specify toenable the bindery service. If On is selected, theprint server does not support other print serversthat are connected to the bindery file server.

On /Off

Bindery File Server NameSpecify the bindery file server name.


NDS Context NameIf Novell Directory Service (NDS) is used, specify apriority NDS context name. It should be specified asa full context name, and you cannot use “.” (period)at the beginning of the context pass. It is not neces-sary to enter the container name (print server name).


NDS Tree NameIf NDS is used, specify the NDS tree name.


NetWare Nprinter / Rprinter, NetWare Status Setting

Printer Name

Specify the printer name. It is initially set to a partic-ular printer name allocated to the machine. **********Varied from machine to machine.Max. 63 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics canbe used.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




02 NetWare

NetWare Nprinter / Rprinter, NetWare Status Setting (continued)

Printer NumberSpecify the printer number.

Select between 0 and 255.

File Server NameSpecify file server names. Max. 10 servers can be displayed.

Queue NameSpecify queue names. Max. 10 queues can be displayed.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Specify the settings for connecting network printer and the IPP settings. For

details, refer to “03 IPP” on page 17-79.


03 IPP

IPP

IPPSpecify to use IPP or not. Use /Not Use

IPP Print Job AcceptSpecify to accept IPP print jobs. Permit /Prohibit

IPP Operation Support Information Setting

Print JobSpecify to enable the function or not. On /Off

Cancel JobSpecify to enable the function or not. On /Off

Job AcquisitionSpecify to enable the function or not. On /Off

Enable JobSpecify to enable the function or not. On /Off

Job Attribute AcquisitionSpecify to enable the function or not. On /Off

Print Attribute Acquisition

Specify to enable the function or not. On /Off

IPP Printer Information Setting, Printer URI Setting

Printer NameSpecify the printer name.


Printer Establishment PlaceSpecify the place in which to install the printer.


Printer InformationSpecify printer information.

Max. 127 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics can

be used.Printer URIPrinter URI's are set. Max. 8 addresses

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Specify to use Scan to HDD/Scan to FTP for transmission, the proxy server

setting, and the passive function. For details, refer to “04 FTP” onpage 17-82.

* 1: By selecting Not Use , access to bizhub PRO 1050 (TWAIN, Visual Count) will be prohibited.It is possible to save Scan to HDD jobs, but clients can no longer obtain them.

* 2: By selecting Not Use , Scan operations are executable, but the transmission from bizhub PRO1050 to FTP will be disabled.

Specific setting and Description Setting options (underlined: de-

fault)

04 FTP

Server *1

Specify to use the machine as an FTP server. If aTWAIN driver is used to access to Scan to HDD jobs,select Use .

Use /Not Use

Client *2

Specify to use the machine as a client. If Scan to FTPis used for transmission to the FTP server, select Use .

Use /Not Use

Proxy Server Address

Specify the proxy server address.

0.0.0.0


Proxy Server Port No.Specify the proxy server port number. 1 - 65535 ( 21 )

Passive FunctionSpecify to use the passive function. On/ Off

Connection Time Out TimeSpecify the time out value. 5 - 300 seconds ( 60 )

Port No.

Specify the number of the port that is used to commu-nicate with the FTP server.

1 - 65535 ( 21 )

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Specify the SNMP settings. For details, refer to “05 SNMP” on page 17-84.

* 1: Used when communicating with bizhub PRO 1050 using PageScope applications.

Specify the SMB printing setting, and to use Scan to SMB for transmission.For details, refer to “06 SMB” on page 17-86.


05 SNMP

SNMP * 1

Specify to use SNMP or not. Use /Not Use

Read Community NameSpecify a Read Community Name.

publicMax. 15 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics canbe used.

Write Community NameSpecify a Write Community Name.

privateMax. 15 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics canbe used.


06 SMB

PrintSpecify to use SMB printing functions. Use /Not Use

Net BIOS NameSpecify a NetBIOS name as required.

*********Varied from machine to machine.Max. 15 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics canbe used.

Print Service NameSpecify a print service name.


Work Group

Specify a work group name.

Max. 15 characters combining

symbols and alphanumerics canbe used.

ScanSelect Use when communicating with SMB servers us-ing Scan to SMB.

Use /Not Use

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Specify the settings for connecting network printer and the ApplieTalk settings.

For details, refer to “07 AppleTalk” on page 17-88.


07 AppleTalk

AppleTalkSelecting Use enables AppleTalk as the print serverprotocol.

Use/ Not Use

Printer NameSpecify the name of the printer that is used on the Ap-pleTalk network.

**********Varied from machine to machine.Max. 31 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics canbe used.

Zone NameSpecify a zone. If no zone exists in such a case as whenusing a machine on a network that has no seed router,leave the field blank.


Current ZoneSpecify the current zone.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Specify the settings for an e-mail send/receive, division for transmitted data

and authentication, and save the template of titles and bodies frequentlyused. For details, refer to “08 E-Mail” on page 17-90.

Specific setting and Description Setting options (underlined: de-

fault)

08 E-Mail

E-Mail Send Setting

E-Mail SendSpecify to use e-mail transmission. On /Off

SMTP Server AddressSpecify the address of the server that is used for e-mail transmission.

0.0.0.0Max. 255 characters combiningsymbols and alphanumerics canbe used.

Port No.Specify the port number. 1 - 65535 ( 25 )

Connection Time Out TimeSpecify the time out duration. 30 - 300 seconds ( 60 )

Binary DivisionSpecify to use binary division for transmitted data. On/ Off

Binary Division SizeSpecify the size by which to divide transmitted data. 1 - 150 (x100 Kb) ( 5 )

E-Mail Send Maximum SizeSpecify to set the maximum size for e-mail trans-

mission.

0(Off) - 100Mb ( 0 )

Authentication Setting POP before SMTPSpecify to use the POP before SMTP authentica-tion. Specify as required in your own environment.

On/ Off

Authentication Setting SMTP Authentication * 1

Specify to use the SMTP authentication. Specify asrequired in your own environment.

On/ Off

POP before SMTPSpecify the duration used for POP before SMTP.

0 - 60 seconds ( 0 )

SMTP Auth. User NameSpecify a user name if Authentication Setting SMTP

Authentication is set to On .


PasswordSpecify a password.


RealmSpecify a realm (domain name). If the SMTP serverwith which to communicate supports DIGEST-MD5,this field must be entered.


Machine Manager Mail AddressSpecify the e-mail address of the Machine Manag-

er.


be used.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




08 E-Mail

E-Mail Receive Setting

POP Server AddressSpecify an address of the POP server that is used toreceive e-mail.


User NameSpecify a user name that is used to connect to thePOP server.


PasswordSpecify a password that is used to connect to thePOP server.


APOP

Specify to use APOP or not. Use/ Not Use

Port No.Specify the number of port that is used to commu-nicate with the POP server.

1 - 65535 ( 110 )

Connection Time Out TimeSpecify the time out duration. 30 - 300 seconds ( 60 )

Title SettingMax. 5 e-mail titles can be saved for frequent use. Max. 64 characters can be used.

Sentence SettingMax. 5 e-mail bodies can be saved for frequent use. Max. 256 characters can be used.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Specify the duration before automatically deleting Scan to HDD data. For de-

tails, refer to “09 HDD” on page 17-96.

Specify the Alert Mail settings. For details, refer to “10 Alert Mail” onpage 17-98.


09 HDD

HDDSpecify the duration for which Scan to HDD data arestored in the printer controller HDD before they are au-tomatically deleted.

Not Delete/12 hours/ 1 day /2 days/ 3 days/7 days/30 days


10 Alert Mail

E-Mail TransmissionSpecify to use e-mail transmission for alert notification. On/ Off

Inform E-Mail Trans. AddressInform the e-mail address to which to send alert e-mail.


Information to transmit

Specify items to be included in alert e-mail.

8 items available: Service Call/

Jam/Paper Supply/Toner Supply/ PM Call/Staple Cartridge Supply/ Finisher Tray Full/Dispose of TrashBasketClear All

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Specify the CSRC settings. For details, refer to “11 CSRC” on page 17-100.


11 CSRC

CSRC Send Setting

CSRC SendSpecify to use CSRC Send or not. On /Off

SMTP Server AddressSpecify the SMTP server address.


Port No.Specify the port number. 1 - 65535 ( 25 )

Connection Time Out TimeSpecify the SMTP time out duration. 30 - 300 seconds ( 60 )

Machine Manager From AddressSpecify the From address that is used to send e-mail from Controller NIC.


Authentication Setting POP before SMTPSpecify to use the POP before SMTP authentica-tion. Specify as required in your own environment.

On/ Off

Authentication Setting SMTP Authentication *1

Specify to use the SMTP authentication. Specify asrequired in your own environment.

On/ Off

POP before SMTPSpecify the duration used for POP before SMTP. 0 - 60 seconds ( 0 )

SMTP Authentication User NameIf Authentication Setting SMTP Authentication isset to On , specify a user name.


PasswordSpecify a password.


RealmSpecify a realm (domain name). If the SMTP server

with which to communicate requires a realm, thisfield must be entered.


be used.

CSRC Receive Setting

CSRC ReceiveSpecify to use CSRC Receive or not. On /Off

POP Server AddressSpecify a POP server address.


User Name

Specify a user name to log in to the POP server.

Max. 63 alphanumerics can be

used.

PasswordSpecify a password to log in to the POP server.

Max. 15 alphanumerics can beused.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




APOPSpecify to use the APOP function. On/ Off

11 CSRC

CSRC Receive Setting(continued)

Port No.Specify the POP port number. 1 - 65535 ( 110 )

Connection Time Out TimeSpecify the POP time out duration. 30 - 300 seconds ( 60 )

Auto CheckSpecify to check incoming e-mail automatically. On/Off

Auto Check Interval TimeSpecify the interval by which to check incoming e-

mail automatically.

1 - 60 minutes ( 15 )

CSRC Communication Test Start


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Specify the settings for third party applications. For details, refer to “12 IS

OpenAPI” on page 17-105.

Specify the PSWC (Page Scope Web Connection) setting. For details, refer

to “13 PSWC” on page 17-107.

Specify the Network Setting Clear setting. For details, refer to “14 NetworkSetting Clear” on page 17-109.


12 IS OpenAPI

IS OpenAPISpecify to use IS OpenAPI. Use /Not Use

IS OpenAPI over SSLIf SSL is used for PSWC communication, this setting isenabled.

Use/ Not Use

IS OpenAPI AuthenticationEnable the setting to block access to this I / F. On /Off

IS OpenAPI Login NameRequired if the IS OpenAPI Authentication is set to On .

Max. 8 characters combining sym-bols and alphanumerics can be

used.

IS OpenAPI Login PasswordRequired if the IS OpenAPI Authentication is set to On .

Max. 8 characters combining sym-bols and alphanumerics can beused.

IS OpenAPI Port NumberIf SSL is not used, the port number specified in this fieldwill be used.

1 - 65535 ( 50001 )

IS OpenAPI Port Number (SSL)If SSL is used, the port number specified in this field willbe used.

1 - 65535 ( 50003 )


13 PSWC

PSWCSpecify to use the PSWC function. Use /Not Use


14 Network Setting Clear

Initialize ExecuteRestore the initial network settings specified at the timeof shipment.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




01 TCP/IP

Specify the settings for connecting a network printer and network scanner,and the settings for TCP/IP, RAW port numbers, IP Filter (permission/denial),

and ping.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [01 TCP/IP].

2 For each item, select or enter a required value. Use [Previous] or [Next]as required.

- TCP/IP

Select [Enable] or [Disable].

- DHCP Select [Enable] or [Disable].

- IP Address

Touch [IP Address] to display an address input screen. After enter-

ing in the field, touch [OK].

- Subnet Mask

Touch [Subnet Mask] to display an address input screen. After en-tering in the field, touch [OK].

- Default Gateway

Touch [Default Gateway] to display an address input screen. Afterentering in the field, touch [OK].

- DNS Server 1 to 3

Touch an appropriate key to display an address input screen. After

entering in the field, touch [OK].- DNS Host Name

Touch [DNS Host Name] to display the input screen. After entering

in the field, touch [OK].- DNS Domain Name

Touch [DNS Domain Name] to display the input screen. After enter-

ing in the field, touch [OK].- LDP

Select [Enable] or [Disable].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- Network Speed

Select an appropriate key.- TCP/IP RAW port settings

Touch an appropriate RAW port number to display a touch panel

keypad input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].

To specify to use individual ports or not, select [Use] or [Not Use] tothe right of each RAW port key.

- TCP/IP Filter permission settings

To specify to use the permission settings or not, select [On] or [Off]to the right of [Permission Setting]. To specify the range of permit-

ted connections, touch an appropriate setting range key to displayan address input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].

- TCP/IP Filter denial settings

To specify to use the denial settings or not, select [On] or [Off] [Off]to the right of [Denial Setting]. To specify the range of denied con-nections, touch an appropriate setting range key to display an ad-

dress input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].- Network Test Ping Address

To enter an address, touch [Network Test Ping Address] to displayan address input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].Touch [Send] to perform the network test. Any event of error

prompts [Error] in the message box.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the Controller NIC


4 Touch [Return] to specify other settings, or touch [Exit] to finish setting.

5 After you have changed the settings, turn off the sub power, then turn

off and on the main power.

!Details

When you turn off and on the main power, you need to wait at least 10seconds to turn on after turning off. If you do not allow a sufficient interval

in between, the machine may not run correctly.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




02 NetWare

Specify the settings for connecting network printer, and the NetWare set-tings.

Where Novell NetWare is not used, make sure that [Not Use] is selected.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [02 NetWare].

2 For each item, select or enter a required value. Use [Previous] or [Next]

as required.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




NetWare Setting

- NetWare

Select [Use].- Frame Type

Select a frame type.

- Operation Mode Select an appropriate operation mode.

NetWare Pserver Setting- Print Server Name

Touch [Print Server Name] to display an input screen. After enteringin the field, touch [OK].

- Print Server Password

Touch [Print Server Password] to display an input screen. After en-tering in the field, touch [OK].

- Polling Interval Touch [Polling Interval] to display an input screen. After entering in

the field, touch [OK].- Bindery Disable

Select [On] or [Off].- Bindery File Server Name

Touch [Bindery File Server Name] to display an input screen. After

entering in the field, touch [OK].- NDS Context Name

You cannot use “.” (period) at the beginning of the context pass. It

is not necessary to enter the container name (print server name).Touch [NDS Context Name] to display an input screen. After enter-

ing in the field, touch [OK].- NDS Tree Name

Touch [NDS Tree Name] to display an input screen. After entering

in the field, touch [OK].

NetWare Nprinter/Rprinter, NetWare Status Setting- Printer Name

Touch [Printer Name] to display an input screen. After entering in

the field, touch [OK].- Printer Number

Touch [Printer Number] to display an input screen. After entering inthe field, touch [OK].

- File Server Name

Maximum 10 file server names can be entered.

- Queue Name

Maximum 10 queue names can be entered.




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf






!DetailsWhen you turn off and on the main power, you need to wait at least 10

seconds to turn on after turning off. If you do not allow a sufficient interval


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




03 IPP

Specify the settings for connecting network printer and the IPP settings.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [03 IPP].

2 For each item, select or enter a required value. Use [Previous] or [Next]

as required.

IPP Setting- IPP

Specify to use IPP or not.- IPP Print Job Accept

Specify to accept IPP print jobs or not.

IPP Operation Support Information SettingThe following items can be specified by selecting [On] or [Off].- Print Job

- Cancel Job- Job Acquisition- Enable Job

- Job Attribute Acquisition- Print Attribute Acquisition

IPP Printer Information Setting, Printer URI Setting- Printer Name

Touch [Printer Name] to display an input screen. After entering in

the field, touch [OK].

- Printer Establishment Place Touch [Printer Establishment Place] to display an input screen. Af-

ter entering in the field, touch [OK].- Printer Information

Touch [Printer Information] to display an input screen. After enteringin the field, touch [OK].

- Printer URI

Maximum eight addresses are set automatically.

3 Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the Controller NICSetting Menu Screen.




!Details

When you turn off and on the main power, you need to wait at least 10



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




04 FTP

Specify to use Scan to HDD/Scan to FTP for transmission, the proxy serversetting, and the passive function.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [04 FTP].

2 For each item, select or enter a required value.

- Server

Select to use an FTP server.- Client

Select to use a client.- Proxy Server Address

Touch [Proxy Server Address] to display an input screen. After en-

tering in the field, touch [OK].- Proxy Server Port Number

Touch [Proxy Server Port No.] to display an input screen. After en-

tering in the field, touch [OK].- Passive Function

Select to use the passive function.- Connection Time Out Time

Touch [Connection Time Out Time] to display an input screen. After

entering in the field, touch [OK].

- Port Number

Touch [Port No.] to display an input screen. After entering in thefield, touch [OK].






!Details




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [05 SNMP].


- SNMP

Select to use SNMP.- Read Community Name

Touch [Read Community Name] to display an input screen. Afterentering in the field, touch [OK].

- Write Community Name

Touch [Write Community Name] to display an input screen. Afterentering in the field, touch [OK].





!DetailsWhen you turn off and on the main power, you need to wait at least 10



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




06 SMB

Specify the SMB printing setting, and to use Scan to SMB for transmission.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [06 SMB].


- Print

Select [Use] or [Not Use].- Net BIOS Name

Specify if required. Touch [Net BIOS Name] to display an inputscreen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].

- Print Service Name

Touch [Print Service Name] to display an input screen. After enter-ing in the field, touch [OK].

- Work Group

Touch [Work Group] to display an input screen. After entering in thefield, touch [OK].

- Scan

Select [Use] or [Not Use].






!Details




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




07 AppleTalk

Specify the settings for connecting network printer and the ApplieTalk set-tings.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [07 Apple-Talk].


- AppleTalk

Selecting [Use] enables AppleTalk as the print server protocol.

- Printer Name

Touch [Printer Name] to display an input screen. After entering inthe field, touch [OK].

The following characters cannot be used as part of the printername: (), *, @, -, =, :

- Zone Name

Touch [Zone Name] to display an input screen. After entering in thefield, touch [OK].

- Current Zone




5 After you have changed the settings, turn off the sub power, then turnoff and on the main power.

!Details




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




08 E-Mail

Specify the settings for an e-mail send/receive, division for transmitted dataand authentication, and save the template of titles and bodies frequently

used.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [08 E-Mail].

2 Touch [01 E-Mail Send Setting] on the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen to

display the E-Mail Send Setting Screen. Specify the following items,using [Previous] or [Next] as required. Touch [OK] to complete the set-tings and return to the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen.

- E-Mail Send

Specify whether to use e-mail transmission.- SMTP Server Address

Touch [SMTP Server Address] to display an input screen. After en-tering in the field, touch [OK].

- Port Number


- Connection Time Out Time

Touch [Connection Time Out Time] to display an input screen. Afterentering in the field, touch [OK].

- Binary Division Size

Select [Use] or [Not Use].- Binary Division Size

Touch [Binary Division Size] to display an input screen. After enter-ing in the field, touch [OK].

- E-Mail Send Maximum Size

Touch [E-Mail Send Maximum Size] to display an input screen. Af-ter entering in the field, touch [OK].

- Authentication Setting

Select [Off], [POP before SMTP], or [SMTP Auth]..- POP before SMTP

Touch [POP before SMTP] to display an input screen. After enteringin the field, touch [OK].

- SMTP Auth. User Name

Touch [SMTP Auth. User Name] to display an input screen. Afterentering in the field, touch [OK].

- Password

Touch [Password] to display an input screen. After entering in thefield, touch [OK].

- Realm

Touch [Realm] to display an input screen. After entering in the field,

touch [OK].- Machine Manager Mail Address

Touch [Machine Manager Mail Address] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




3 Touch [02 E-Mail Receive Setting] on the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen

to display the E-Mail Receive Setting Screen. Specify the followingitems. Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the E-MailSetting Menu Screen.

- POP Server Address

Touch [POP Server Address] to display an input screen. After enter-

ing in the field, touch [OK].- User Name

Touch [User Name] to display an input screen. After entering in thefield, touch [OK].

- Password


- APOP

Select [Use] or [Not Use].- Port Number



Touch [Connection Time Out Time] to display an input screen. After

entering in the field, touch [OK].

4 Touch [03 Title Setting] on the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen to displaythe E-Mail Title Setting Screen.

Save an e-mail title.- Select an appropriate Default Select number.

- Touch [Input] to display an input screen and enter a title.- After entering the title, touch [OK].

- Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the E-Mail Set-ting Menu Screen.

5 Touch [04 Sentence Setting] on the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen to dis-play the E-Mail Sentence Setting Screen.

Save an e-mail body.- Select an appropriate Default Select number.

- Touch [Input] to display an input screen and enter a body.- After entering the body, touch [OK].- Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the E-Mail Set-

ting Menu Screen.

6 Touch [Return] on the E-Mail Setting Menu Screen to specify other set-

tings, or touch [Exit] to finish setting.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




!Details




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




09 HDD

Specify the duration for which Scan to HDD data are stored in the printercontroller HDD before they are automatically deleted.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [09 HDD].

2 Touch an appropriate key to specify the duration for which data are

stored in HDD before they are automatically deleted.






!Details




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




10 Alert Mail

Specify the settings for e-mail error notification.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




11 CSRC

CS Remote Care includes service tools, which you do not necessarily haveto set. Contact your service representative for details.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [11 CSRC].

2 Touch [01 CSRC Send Setting] on the CSRC Setting Menu Screen to

display the CSRC Send Setting Screen. Specify the following items,using [Previous] or [Next] as required.

Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the CSRC SettingMenu Screen.

- CSRC Send

Select [On] or [Off].- SMTP Server Address

Touch [SMTP Server Address] to display an input screen. After en-tering in the field, touch [OK].

- Port Number Touch [Port No.] to display an input screen. After entering in thefield, touch [OK]. The range to be used is between 1 and 65535.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





Touch [Connection Time Out Time] to display an input screen. Afterentering in the field, touch [OK].The range to be used is between 30and 300 seconds.

- Machine Manager From Address

Touch [Machine Manager From Address] to display an inputscreen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].

- Authentication Setting [POP before SMTP]

Touch [POP before SMTP] under [Authentication Setting] to displayan input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].

- Authentication Setting [SMTP Authentication] - POP before SMTP

Touch [POP before SMTP] to display an input screen. After entering

in the field, touch [OK]. The range to be used is between 0 and 60seconds.

- SMTP Auth. User Name

Touch [SMTP Auth. User Name] to display an input screen. Afterentering in the field, touch [OK].

- Password


- Realm

Touch [Realm] to display an input screen. After entering in the field,

touch [OK].

3 Touch [02 CSRC Receive Setting] on the CSRC Setting Menu Screento display the CSRC Receive Setting Screen. Specify the following

items, using [Previous] or [Next] as required.

Touch [OK] to complete the settings and return to the CSRC SettingMenu Screen.

- CSRC Receive

Select [On] or [Off].- POP Server Address

Touch [POP Server Address] to display an input screen. After enter-ing in the field, touch [OK].

- User Name

Touch [User Name] to display an input screen. After entering in thefield, touch [OK].

- Password

Touch [Password] to display an input screen. After entering in the

field, touch [OK].- APOP

Select [On] or [Off].- Port Number


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





Touch [Connection Time Out Time] to display an input screen. Afterentering in the field, touch [OK]. The range to be used is between30 and 300 seconds.

- Auto Check

Select [On] or [Off].If [On] is selected, the interval must be specified.

- Auto Check Interval Time

Touch [Auto Check Interval Time] to display an input screen. Afterentering in the field, touch [OK].

4 Touch [03 CSRC Communications Test] on the CSRC Setting MenuScreen to display the CSRC Communications Test Screen.

Touch [Start] to perform the communication test. On completing thetest, touch [Return] to restore the CSRC Setting Menu Screen.




!Details




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




12 IS OpenAPI

Specify the settings for Imaging Solution OpenAPI (IS OpenAPI).

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [12 ISOpenAPI].


- IS OpenAPI

Select [Use] or [Not Use].

- IS OpenAPI over SSL

Select [Use] or [Not Use].- IS OpenAPI Authentication

Select [On] or [Off].- IS OpenAPI Login Name

Touch [IS OpenAPI Login Name] to display an input screen. After

entering in the field, touch [OK].- IS OpenAPI Login Password

Touch [IS OpenAPI Login Password] to display an input screen. Af-ter entering in the field, touch [OK].

- IS OpenAPI Port Number

Touch [IS OpenAPI Port Number] to display an input screen. After

entering in the field, touch [OK].- IS OpenAPI Port Number (SSL)

Touch [IS OpenAPI Port Number (SSL)] to display an input screen. After entering in the field, touch [OK].




!Details




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




13 PSWC

Specify to use PageScope Web Connection (PSWC).

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [13 PSWC].

2 Touch [Use] or [Not Use] to specify whether you want to use PSWC or

not.




5 After changing the settings, turn off the sub power, then turn off and on

the main power.

!Details




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




14 Network Setting Clear

Recover the initial network settings specified at the time of shipment.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [04 Network Setting] - [02 Controller NIC Setting] - [14 NetworkSetting Clear].

2 Touch [Initialize Execute] to recover the initial setting specified at thetime of shipment.




!Details




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6 05 Copy/Printer Setting

17.6.1 01 JOB Offset Operating

Set the machine to offset the copies/printouts of different jobs.

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [01 JOB Offset Operating].

2 Touch [On] or [Off] to highlight it.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6.2 02 Continuation Print(Print)

Set the machine to output multiple reserved print jobs in succession.

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [02 Continuation Print(Print)].



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6.3 03 Page No. Position (Booklet)

Set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside

edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp.

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [03 Page No. Position (Booklet)].

2 Touch [On Outside Page Print)] or [Off] to highlight it.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6.4 04 Fixing Prerotation Set

The fixing heat adjustment may be necessary as altering the paper type and

the weight. The machine rotates the fixing roller before printing starts in orderto print at the appropriate temperature for the specific paper type and theweight.

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting - [04 Fixing Prerotation Set.

2 Touch [Rotation On] or [Rotation Off] to highlight it.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




2

Note

If pressing [Start] after altering the paper type and weight when [Rotation

On] is selected, the message “Machine is warming up.” Is displayed.

Please wait until copying is enabled.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6.5 05 Image Auto Rotation

Set this function to activate always, only when APS or AMS is activated, or

only when APS, AMS or reduce is activated.

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [05 Image Auto Rotation].

2 Touch the desired key to highlight it.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6.6 06 Interruption Suspend

Select the timing to stop the job in progress when [Interrupt] is pressed. The

timing can be set either to suspend on completing the job in progress or tosuspend by interrupting the job in progress.

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [06 Interruption Suspend].

2 Touch [When Current Set Complete] or [Stop Immediately] to highlightit.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6.7 07 Copy Reserve Operation

Set the timing for the reserve job setting. The timing can be set to either when

specifying on the Copy Reserve Confirmation Screen navigated from the Ma-chine Status Screen, or when displaying the Copy Screen as placing theoriginal in the ADF.

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [07 Copy Reserve Operation].

2 Touch highlight [Enabled by Operation] or [Enabled by Set Original] tohighlight it.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




!Details

Copy Reserve by placing the original on the original glass

When the Machine Status Screen is displayed, the screen can altered to

the Copy Screen by placing the original in the ADF.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6.8 08 Scan Stop (pull out tray)

Select to prohibit scanning when pulling out the tray during scanning the

original.

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [08 Scan Stop (pull out tray)].



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6.9 09 Continuation Print (Copy)

Select the machine to output multiple reserve jobs in succession.

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [09 Continuation Print (Copy)].



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6.1010 Original Glass SDF

Select to set the exit direction when copying one set of the original placed


Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [10 Original Glass SDF].

2 Touch [Face Up] or [Face Down] to highlight it.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.6.1111 SDF Auto Setting

Set the machine to feed a single document automatically as placing it in the

ADF in the Memory Scan mode, or feed it by pressing [Start].

Procedure

1 Touch [05 Copy/Printer Setting] - [11 SDF Auto Setting].



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.7 06 System Connection

17.7.1 01 User Call

Use this function to call your service representative for maintenance. Your

service representative is monitoring the machine status as needed basis. Themonitored information will be useful for maintenance.

Procedure

1 Touch [06 System Connection] - [01 User Call].

2 Touch [Start].

3 Touch [Return] to restore the Machine Manager Setting Menu.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.8 07 Security Setting

17.8.1 01 Machine Manager Password

Set the new machine manager password.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [07 Security Setting] - [01 Machine Manager Password].

2 Touch [Input Manager Password] to display the Input Manager Pass-

word Screen.

3 Enter the new password.

4 Touch [OK].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.8.2 02 HDD Management Setting

Use this function to manage the folder box saved in HDD, and change the

HDD lock password.

01 Folder Box List/DeleteThe user can create a folder or a box when saving images in a personal, pub-lic or confidential folder. The machine manager can refer to the name, pass-

word, number or creation time of the folder created by the user, and deletethe folder or box if necessary.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [07 Security Setting] - [02 HDD Management Setting] - [01 Fold-er Box List/Delete].

2 Refer the detailed information of the folder and the box.

- Touch [Personal Folder], [Public Folder], or [Confidential Folder] torefer to the details of the desired folder or box.

- Touch the desired folder to highlight it.When referring to the information, touch to highlight the folderwhich contains the box to be referred to.

When the folder or box to be referred to is not displayed, touch thearrow keys ( , ) and ( + ) on the right side to highlight it.

- Confirm that the name of the desired folder or box is displayed at

the upper area of the screen.- Touch [Detail] to display the details.

- Touch [Return] to restore the Folder Box List/Delete Screen.

3 Delete the detailed information of the folder or box.

- Follow steps (1) and (2) of step 2 to select the folder or box to bedeleted.

- Confirm that the name of the desired folder or box is displayed atthe upper area of the screen.

- Touch [Delete] to display the Delete Confirmation popup screen.- Touch [Yes] to delete, or touch [No] to suspend deleting.

4 Touch [OK] to complete the setting and return to the HDD ManagementSetting Screen.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




02 HDD Data Auto Delete Period Setting

Specify the period of time (12 hours to 30 days) to keep data so that it will bedeleted automatically when specified period has passed. The initial setting is

Not Delete.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [07 Security Setting] - [02 HDD Management Setting] - [02 HDDData Auto Delete Period Setting].

2 Touch the desired period to highlight it.

3 Touch [Not Delete] to highlight it when not setting the automatically de-

leting period.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




03 Change HDD Lock Password

Change the HDD lock password.

2

NoteThe HDD Lock Password cannot be changed unless the Security

Strengthen mode is set to On.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [07 Security Setting] - [02 HDD Management Setting] - [03Change HDD Lock Password].

2 Touch [Current Password] to display the Password Input Screen. Enterthe current password and touch [OK].

3 Touch [New Password] to display the Password Input Screen. Enterthe new password and touch [OK].

4 Touch [Check Input] to enter the same new password, then touch [OK].



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [07 Security Setting] - [03 Security Strengthen mode].

2 Touch [On] when activating this mode, or touch [Off] when deactivating

this mode.

3 Touch [OK] at the lower right side of the screen to display the Confir-

mation popup screen.

4 Touch [Yes] to complete the setting. The machine power will be turnedoff, then on.Touch [No] to cancel the setting. Touch [Cancel] at the lower right side

of the screen to restore the Machine Manager Setting Menu Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




17.9 08 Scanner Address Register

17.9.1 01 Send Address Edit/Delete

Change or delete the destination of the scanned image. The following four

addresses can be registered:- E-Mail (mail address)

- HDD (box No.)

- FTP (FTP server address)

- SMB

The Group of registered E-Mail addresses can be deleted.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Procedure

1 Touch [08 Scanner Address Register] - [01 Send Address Edit/Delete].

2

Note

In order to delete the group or registered e-mail addresses, touch Group.

Touch the name of the group to be deleted, then touch Delete. The popup

message “Delete this destination address ?” is displayed. Touch Yes orNo and return to the previous screen.

2 Select the address type to be changed or deleted.

To change/delete the E-Mail destination address:- Touch [E-Mail].

- Display the Register Name of the destination address using thesearch key or the arrow keys ( , ) and ( + ).

- Touch the Register Name to highlight it.

- To change, touch [Change] to display the E-Mail Account Screen.Select the changing item from [Address], [Name] and [ReferenceName], and change it in the input screen. Set Daily Use by touching

[On] or [Off]. Touch [OK].- To delete, touch [Delete]. Touch [Yes] on the Delete Confirmation

popup screen. To suspend deleting, touch [No].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




To change/delete the HDD destination address:- Touch [HDD].



- To change, touch [Change] to display the HDD Description Screen.Select the changing item from [Profile], [Reference Name], [Host

Address], [File Path, [Login Name] and [Password], and change it in

the input screen. Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off]. Touch[OK].

- To delete, touch [Delete]. Touch [Yes] on the Delete Confirmation

popup screen. To suspend deleting, touch [No].- To delete the unregistered box, touch [Non Reg. Box.] Delete as fol-

lowing the step (5) above.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




To change/delete the FTP destination address:

- Touch [FTP].- Display the Register Name of the destination address using the

search key or the arrow keys ( , ) and ( + ).- Touch the Register Name to highlight it.- To change, touch [Change] to display the FTP Description Screen.

Select the changing item from [Profile], [Reference Name], [Host Address], [File Path], [Login Name] and [Password] ,and change itin the input screen. Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off]. Touch

[OK].- To delete, touch [Delete]. Touch [Yes] on the Delete Confirmation


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




To change/delete the SMB destination address:- Touch [SMB].

- Display the Register Name of the destination address using thesearch key or the arrows keys ( , ) and ( + ).


- To change, touch [Change] to display the SMB Description Screen.Select the changing item from [Profile], [Reference Name], [Host

Address], [File Path], [Login Name] and [Password], and change it

in the input screen. Set Daily Use by touching [On] or [Off]. Touch[OK].

- To delete, touch [Delete]. Touch [Yes] on the Delete Confirmation


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




To delete Group:- Touch [Group].



- Touch [Delete]. Touch [Yes] on the Delete Confirmation popupscreen. To suspend deleting, touch [No].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


18Browser Control Setting

POD Administrator

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Browser Control Setting 18



18.1 About PageScope Web ConnectionPageScope Web Connection is a device control utility program provided by

the HTTP server built into the image controller of the KONICA MINOLTAbizhub PRO 1050. This utility can be used with a Web browser to display thestatus of the bizhub PRO 1050 printer, scanner, and network, and to change

default and network settings.

!Details

When the Security Strengthen mode is set on, this utility function cannot

be used.

System Requirements

To fully access all of the features of PageSope Web Connection, the operat-

ing computer must meet the following requirements.

* 1: Download MSXML3.0 from Microsoft Download Center and install it on your system.

Operating System Web Browser

Windows 98, Me, NT4.0, 2000, XP,Server 2003

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 (recommended)Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.x, in which MSXML3 mustbe installed (*1)Netscape Navigator 7.02 or higher

Macintosh Mac OS 8.x, 9.x, X Netscape Navigator 7.02 or higher

Linux Netscape Navigator 7.02 or higher

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.1.1 Web Browser Settings

JavaScript

JavaScript must be active. For setting JavaScript, see the following proce-

dure.- Internet Explorer

Select [Internet Options] under [Tools]. Select the [Security] tab and thenclick [Custom Level]. Scroll down to the item that reads [Active Scripting].

Select the option marked [Enable].

- Netscape Navigator

Select [Preferences] under [Edit]. Click [Advanced] and then click [Scripts& Plug-ins]. Check [Navigator] under [Enable JavaScript for].

CookiesCookies must be active. For setting cookies, see the following procedure.

- Internet ExplorerSelect [Internet Options] under [Tools]. Select the [Privacy] tab and thenmove the slider to the [High] privacy setting.

- Netscape NavigatorSelect [Preferences] under [Edit]. Click [Privacy & Security] and then click

[Cookies]. Check [Allow cookies based on privacy settings] or [Allow allcookies] under [Cookie Acceptance Policy].

Cache

Confirm the following cache setting using the browser.

- Internet Explorer

Select [Internet Options] under [Tools]. Select the [General] tab and thenclick [Settings]. Check [Every visit to the page] under [Check for newer

versions of stored pages:].

- Netscape Navigator

Select [Preferences] under [Edit]. Click [Advanced] and then click[Cache]. Check [Every time I view the page] under [Compare the page in

the cache to the page on the network:].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.2 Access

PageScope Web Connection can be accessed directly from a Web browser.

Procedures

1 Start the Web browser.

2 In the Address bar, enter the IP address of the image controller as

shown below. Then press the [Enter] key.

http://IP address of the image controller/

(Example)

When the IP address of the image controller is 192.168.0.10:

http://192.168.0.10

3 The PageScope Web Connection screen appears.

Operation

PageScope Web Connection operation is identical to Internet Web pages.

You can click a link on the Web page to jump to the link destination.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.3 Screen Configuration

The screen shown below is called the User Mode screen: all users can view

this screen. By clicking [Admin Mode] and entering an appropriate AdminPassword in the User Mode screen, you can enter the Administrator Mode

screen. For details, refer to “Administrator Mode” on page 18-10.The configuration of the PageScope Web Connection screen is shown be-low.

!Details

If user authentication is set, the user name and password entry screen

will appear.

1. KONICA MINOLTA PageScope Web Connection Logo

Click the KONICA MINOLTA logo to jump to the Konica Minolta web site.http://konicaminolta.jpClick the PageScope Web Connection logo to jump to the About Screen,providing the version information and the copyright description.

Click the PageScope Web Connection logo on the About Screen to jumpto the following Web site.http://pagescope.com

2. Status Display

Icons and text indicate the current status of the main body's printer and

scanner. The message "Ready" appears when the main body's printerand scanner are operating normally.

3. Administrator Mode

21

3 4

6

7

5

8

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Logs into Administrator Mode. For details, refer to “Logging in Using Ad-

ministrator Mode” on page 18-8.

4. Language

Sets the display language for the browser. [Auto] indicates the same lan-

guage as the operating system being used and the other options indicate

the same language as displayed on the control panel.5. Tabs

Select the categories of items to be displayed.

- System- Job (User Mode only)- Print

- Scan (Administrator Mode only)- Network (Administrator Mode only)

For the details of each tab, see the following sections.

6. Menus Selects the information or setup item to be displayed. The menus that ap-pear vary depending on the tab selection.

For the details of each menu, see the following sections.

7. Information and Setting Details

Displays the details of the selected menu.

8. Help

If an online manual URL has been set, the online manual will appear. For

details, refer to “Online Assistance” on page 18-12.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.3.1 Logging in Using Administrator Mode

By logging into PageScope Web Connection in Administrator Mode, you can

configure or confirm the image controller system.

Procedures

1 Click the [Admin Mode] button in the upper left corner of the screen.

2 Enter the password for Administrator Mode and click the [Login] but-ton.

3 To log out, click [Logout].

!Details

The default value of the administrator password for PageScope Web

Connection is 00000000.

You can change the administrator password for PageScope Web Con-

nection using the browser in the [System] area of Administrator Mode.

See p. 6-6. You can also change it using the touch panel of the mainbody. Contact your service store for details.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




In order to ensure the security against data used in Administrator Mode,

set SSL. SSL can be set on the [Network] tab of Administrator Mode. For

details, “SSL/TLS” on page 18-43 .

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.4 Administrator Mode

By logging into PageScope Web Connection in Administrator Mode, you can

configure or confirm the image controller system.

For the details on the login procedure for Administrator Mode, refer to “Log-

ging in Using Administrator Mode” on page 18-8.

18.5 Administrator Mode – System Tab

On the [System] tab, information concerning the system configuration of themachine and settings is displayed.

18.5.1 Administrator Password

This screen appears when you click [Administrator Password] on the [Sys-

tem] tab. The screen is used to change the administrator password.

- Current Password:

Enter the current administrator password. The password is displayed inasterisks (*).

- New Password:

Enter a new administrator password. Maximum eight alphanumeric char-acters can used. The password is displayed in asterisks (*).

- Retype New Password:

Retype the new password as entered above for confirmation.

- [Apply] button:

Click the button to apply the new settings.

- [Clear] button:

Click the button to clear the settings that were entered or selected.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.5.2 Device Information

This screen appears when you click [Device Information] on the [System] tab.

The screen is used to enter the device name, device place, and the adminis-trator name.

- Device Name:

Enter the name of the device. Maximum 255 alphanumeric characterscan be used. Click [Detail] on the [System] tab of the User Mode Screento display this screen.

- Device Place:

Enter the location where the device is set up. Maximum 255 alphanumer-

ic characters can be used. Click [Detail] on the [System] tab of the User

Mode Screen to display this screen.

- Administrator Name:

Enter the device administrator. Maximum 255 alphanumeric characterscan be used. Click [Device Information] on the [System] tab of the User

Mode Screen to display this screen.

- [Apply] button:

Click the button to apply the new settings.- [Clear] button:

Click the button to clear the settings that were entered.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.5.3 ROM Version

This screen appears when you click [ROM Version] on the [System] tab. It

shows the ROM version of the copier, the firmware version of the controller,and other information.

18.5.4 Online Assistance

This screen appears when you click [Online Assistance] on the [System] tab.

You can use the screen to enter information concerning product support.

Click [Online Assistance] on the [System] tab of the User Mode Screen to dis-play information entered on this screen.

- Contact Name:

Enter the support contact for the product. Maximum 63 alphanumericcharacters can be used.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- Contact Information:

Enter the phone number of the support contact for the product. (Blank bydefault.) Maximum 127 alphanumeric characters can be used.

- Product Help URL:

Enter the URL of the product information Web site. (Blank by default.)

Maximum 127 alphanumeric characters can be used.- Corporate URL:

The URL of the manufacturer Web site. (Can be changed.) Maximum 127

alphanumeric characters can be used.

- Supplies and Accessories:

Enter the contact for ordering consumables. Maximum 127 alphanumeric

characters can be used.

- Online Help URL:

Enter the online manual URL. Maximum 127 alphanumeric characters

can be used.There are two choices:

– Accessing the manual on the Internet posted on the Konica Minolta web-site:

Enter: http://pagescope.com/download/webconnection/onlinehelp/ pro1050/help.html.

– Accessing the manual over the LAN:

Enter: http://(IP address for the PC)/pscw_help/****.pswc_help.html.

The administrator must have the online manual to make it available overthe LAN server.Use a PC on which Microsoft IIS or another Web server is running. TheWeb server must be set to have the folder " /pswc_help/" accessible.

Make sure to copy to the Web server the entire pswc_help folder whichis installed using the installer CD.

- [Apply] button:


- [Clear] button: Click the button to clear the settings that were entered or selected.

2

Note

If the online manual URLs are not used, users must save the online help

file on their PCs. In this case, the [Help] button will not function.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.5.5 Import/Export

This screen appears when you click [Import/Export] on the [System] tab. You

can use the screen to import a setting file from a PC to the device, and toexport a setting file from the device to a PC.

!Details

See appendix for exportable data.

- Import:

Enter the name of a file to which the setting value of the device will beentered (imported).You can click the [Browse] button and select a setting file to import.

– Click the [Import] button to import the setting file from PC to the device.

- Export:

Export the setting value of the device to PC.Click the [Export] button to display the file download screen.

– Click the [Save] button to select a place to save the file.

– The download completion screen will appear. Click the [Close] button. Adat file will be exported from the device. (The file format must be con-firmed.)

- [Apply] button: Click the button to apply the new settings.

- [Clear] button:

Click the button to clear the settings that were entered or selected.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.5.6 Maintenance

This screen appears when you click [Maintenance] on the [System] tab. You

can use the screen to operate maintenance of the machine. You can initializethe network settings (reset to factory default settings) or restart the networkonly to enable new parameters.

Network Setting Clear

This screen appears when you click [Network Setting Clear] under the [Main-tenance] menu. You can use the screen to initialize the network settings to

factory default.

Network Setting Clear:

1 Click the [Clear] button to display the confirmation screen.

2 Click [OK] to clear.

!Details

It may take few minutes for clearing the network settings. After clearing

the settings is completed, you can access the network again. When you

use the network, restart the Web browser.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Reset

This screen appears when you click [Reset] under the [Maintenance] menu.Restart on the controller to enable new parameters. In this case, the control-

ler will be initialized, however the main body will not.

!Details

If you want to initialize the main body after resetting the network, wait un-

til the controller restarts (about 2 minutes) and turn the main switch OFF.

Wait 10 seconds or longer before turning the device ON again.

Reset:

% Click the [Reset] button to restart the network only to enable new pa-

rameters.

!Details

It may take few minutes for resetting the network. After resetting the net-

work, you can access the network again. When you use the network, re-

start the Web browser.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.5.7 Alert Mail

This screen appears when you click [Alert] on the [System] tab. You can use

the screen to set sending notices to the selected e-mail addresses when analert occurs to your system. The alert items that are checked their checkbox-es will be sent as alert by e-mail.

- Notice of E-Mail:

Sets whether or not to enable alert mail notice function.

- Notice E-Mail Address:

Enter the e-mail address to which to send alert mail. Maximum 250 char-acters can be used.

- Alert:

Choose notification items.


- [Clear] button: Click the button to clear the settings that were entered or selected.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.6 Administrator Mode – Print Tab

The [Print] tab is used to configure the image controller.

18.6.1 Interface

This screen appears when you click [Interface] on the [Print] tab. The screenis used to set information concerning the interface timeout.

- Parallel Timeout:

Set parallel port timeout (10-300 seconds).

- Network Timeout:

Set receive network timeout (10-300 seconds).

- [Apply] button:

Click the button to apply the new settings.- [Clear] button:


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.6.2 Port Settings

This screen appears when you click [Port Settings] on the [Print] tab. You can

use the screen to see the list of port settings.

- RAW port number

List the RAW port numbers 1 to 6 that are set in [TCP/IP] on the [Network]tab.

- Status

Show enable or disable of each RAW port.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.6.3 Default Settings

General Settings

This screen appears when you click [General Settings] under the [DefaultSettings] menu. The screen is used to set default values for printer settings,that are not associated with PDL. If there is no command from the driver, this

setting will be applied. These settings also appear if you select ControllerSettings on the touch panel's Device Status screen - 02 Printer Settings - 01

Basic Settings.

- Enter for individual items.

PDL, Input Tray, Output Tray, Duplex, Binding, Staple, Punch, Center

Staple / Centerfold / Trimming, Offset, Output Order, Print Number, Col-late, Paper Size, Orientation, Resolution, Spool Setting, Banner Option,

Banner Page Tray, Convert Paper Size, 1 Page/Sheet, Booklet, Print Po-sition.


- [Clear] button:


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




PCL Settings

This screen appears when you click [PCL Settings] under the [Default Set-tings] menu. The screen is used to set PCL.

These settings also appear if you select Controller Settings on the touch pan-el's Device Status screen - 02 Printer Settings - 03 PCL Settings.

- [Apply] button:


- [Clear] button:


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




PS Settings (Option)

This screen appears when you click [PS Settings] under the [Default Settings]menu. The screen is used to set PS.

These settings also appear if you select Controller Settings on the touch pan-el's Device Status screen - 02 Printer Settings - 03 PS Settings.

- Print To PS Error:

Select whether or not to print the error report when an error occurs whilerasterizing PostScript data.

- [Apply] button:

Click the button to apply the new settings.- [Clear] button: Click the button to clear the settings that were entered.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




TIFF Settings

This screen appears when you click [TIFF Settings] under the [Default Set-tings] menu. The screen is used to set default values for TIFF settings. These

settings also appear if you select Controller Settings on the touch panel'sDevice Status screen - 02 Printer Settings - 04 TIFF Settings.


Auto Paper Select, Image Position.

- [Apply] button:


- [Clear] button: Click the button to clear the settings that were entered.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.6.4 Administrator Mode – Scan Tab

The [Scan] tab is used to enter, edit, or delete subject and body text for e-

mail.

18.6.5 Subject Registration

This screen appears when you click [Subject] on the [Scan] tab. You can usethe screen to enter, edit, or delete the subject for e-mail.


- [Edit] button: Click the button to open the editing screen.

- [Clear] button:

Click the button to set it to the default before changes were applied.

- [Delete] button: Click the button to delete a selected subject.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




To Enter / Edit Subjects

1 Check the number of the subject to enter or edit, and click the [Edit]

button.

2 Enter the subject on the Subject Registration screen, and click the [Ap-ply] button. You can use maximum 64 characters.

3 Click the [OK] button on the Completed screen. It will take you back to

the subject list screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




To Delete Subjects

1 Check the number of the subject to delete, and click the [Delete] but-ton.

2 Click the [OK] button on the Subject Deletion screen.

3 Click the [OK] button on the Completed screen. It will take you back tothe subject list screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.6.6 Body Registration

This screen appears when you click [Body] on the [Scan] tab. You can use

the screen to enter, edit, or delete the body text for e-mail.

- [Apply] button:


- [Edit] button:

Click the button to open the editing screen.

- [Clear] button:

Click the button to set it to the default before changes were applied.

- [Delete] button: Click the button to delete a selected body text.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




To Enter / Edit Body

1 Check the number of the body text to enter or edit, and click the [Edit]button.

2 Enter the text on the Body Registration screen, and click the [Apply]

button. You can use maximum 255 characters.

3 Click the [OK] button on the Completed screen. It will take you back to

the body text list screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




To Delete Bodies

1 Check the number of the body text to delete, and click the [Delete] but-

ton.

2 Click the [OK] button on the Body Deletion screen.

3 Click the [OK] button on the Completed screen. It will take you back tothe body text list screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.7 Administrator Mode – Network Tab

The [Network] tab shows settings concerning the printer controller network.

18.7.1 TCP/IP

TCP/IP

This screen appears when you click [TCP/IP] on the [Network] tab. The

screen is used to set a summary of the image controller interface (TCP/IPsettings).When TCP/IP is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sure to

enter parameters correctly.


TCP/IP, Speed, Auto IP, IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,

RAW Port Number 1-6, Host Name, Domain Name, DNS Server, LPD.

- [Apply] button:Click the button to apply the new settings.

- [Clear] button:


IP Filtering

This screen appears when you click [IP Filtering] under the [TCP/IP] menu.

The screen is used to specify the host address and restrict access permis-sion. You can also use the screen to enable or disable access permission,

access refusal, and their ranges of TCP/IP filtering. When the same range isspecified for the accept setting and the refuse setting, the refuse setting haspriority over the accept setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf





Access Permission Addresses and their ranges, Access Refusal Ad-

dresses and their ranges.

- [Apply] button:


- [Clear] button:

Click the button to clear the settings that were selected.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.7.2 NetWare

NetWare

This screen appears when you click [NetWare] on the [Network] tab. Thescreen is used to enter and confirm various settings concerning NetWare.When NetWare is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sure

to enter parameters correctly.


NetWare PrintFrame TypeMode

PserverPrint Server Name

Print Server PasswordPrint Queue Scan Rate

Bindery/NDS

BinderyPreferred File Server

NDSPreferred NDS Context NamePreferred NDS Tree Name

Nprinter/RprinterPrinter NamePrinter Number

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




- [Apply] button:


- [Clear] button: Click the button to clear the settings that were selected.

NetWare Status

This screen appears when you click [NetWare Status] under the [NetWare]

menu on the [Network] tab. This screen is used to confirm NetWare status.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.7.3 IPP

This screen appears when you click [IPP] on the [Network] tab. This screen

is used to enter and confirm settings concerning IPP.When IPP Print is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sureto enter parameters correctly.


IPP Print, Printer Name, Printer Location, Printer Information, Operations

Supported.

- [Apply] button:



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.7.4 FTP

FTP Client

This screen appears when you click [FTP] on the [Network] tab, then click[Client] under the [FTP] menu. The screen is used to enter and confirm vari-ous settings concerning the FTP client.

When FTP Client is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sureto enter parameters correctly.


FTP Client, Proxy Server Address, Proxy Server Port Number, FTP ServerTimeout, Port Number.


- [Clear] button:


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




FTP Server

This screen appears when you click [FTP] on the [Network] tab, then click[Server] under the [FTP] menu. The screen is used to enter and confirm var-

ious settings concerning the FTP server.

- FTP Server:

Select enable or disable.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.7.5 SNMP

This screen appears when you click [SNMP] on the [Network] tab. The screen

is used to enter and confirm settings concerning SNMP.

- SNMP:

Select enable or disable.

- [Apply] button:



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.7.6 SMB

SMB Scan

This screen appears when you click [SMB] on the [Network] tab, then click

[Scan] under the [SMB] menu. The screen is used to enter and confirm set-tings concerning SMB scan.

- SMB Scan: Select enable or disable.

- [Apply] button:



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Print

This screen appears when you click [Print] under the [SMB] menu. Thescreen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning SMB printing.

When SMB Print is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sureto enter parameters correctly.


SMB Print, NetBIOS Name, Print Service Name, Work Group.

- [Apply] button:



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.7.7 Apple Talk

This screen appears when you click [Apple Talk] on the [Network] tab. The

screen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning Apple Talk.When Apple Talk is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make sureto enter parameters correctly.


Apple Talk, Printer Name, Zone Name.

- [Apply] button:


- [Clear] button:


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.7.8 E-Mail

E-Mail Receive (POP) Configuration

This screen appears when you click [E-Mail] on the [Network] tab, then click[E-Mail Receive] under the [E-Mail] menu. The screen is used to enter andconfirm settings concerning receiving e-mail.

When E-Mail Receive is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Make

sure to enter parameters correctly.


Receive, Receiving Server Address, User Name, Password, APOP Au-thentication, Connection Timeout, Port Number.


- [Clear] button:


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




E-Mail Send (SMTP) Configuration

This screen appears when you click [E-Mail] on the [Network] tab, then click[E-Mail Send] under the [E-Mail] menu. The screen is used to enter and con-

firm settings concerning sending e-mail.

When E-Mail Send is set to disable, you still need to set parameters. Makesure to enter parameters correctly.


Send, SMTP Server Address, Port Number, Connection Timeout, MaxMail Size, SMTP Server Capacity, Administrator Mail Address, Authenti-

cation, POP Before SMTP, SMTP Authentication, User Name, Password,Realm, Binary Division, Division Size.

- [Apply] button:



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.7.9 SSL/TLS

This screen appears when you click [SSL/TLS] on the [Network] tab. The

screen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning SSL/TLS. You canconfigure them separately depending whether or not certificates are in-stalled.

Creating a self-signed certificate

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Requesting a certificate to install

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




1 Click [Setting].

The SSL/TLS Setting screen appears.

2 Check [Request a Certificate] and click [Next].

The Request a Certificate screen appears.

2

Note

Only [Create a Self-Signed Certificate], [Request a Certificate], and [In-

stall a Certificate] can be selected.

If you click [Cancel], it will take you back to the SSL/TLS Setting screen.

3 Enter necessary information, and click [Next].

Following the screen indicating that the certificate is being requested,another screen appears indicating the request has been completed.

4 Click [OK].

The Certificate Signing Request Data screen appears.

5 Click [Save].

The file will be saved.

6 Click [OK].

It will take you back to the SSL/TLS Information screen.

7 Click [Setting].


8 Check [Install a Certificate], and click [Next].

The certificate installation screen appears.

9 Enter the data of the certificate that you requested.

10 Click [Next].

The Encryption Strength Setting and the Mode using SSL/TLS screenappears.

11 Enter discretionary settings, and click [Create].

Creation results appear.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




12 Click [OK].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Requesting a certificate to switch information

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




1 Click [Setting].


2

NoteInitially [Request a Certificate] is checked.

Remove an already installed certificate first before requesting a new one.

For details, refer to “Removing a certificate” on page 18-56 .

2 Click [Next].

3 Enter necessary information, and click [Next].

Following the screen indicating that the certificate is being requested,

another screen appears indicating the request has been completed.

4 Click [OK].

The Certificate Signing Request Data screen appears.

5 Click [Save].

The file will be saved.

6 Click [OK].It will take you back to the SSL/TLS Information screen.

7 Check [Install a Certificate], and click [Next].

The certificate installation screen appears.

8 Enter the data of the certificate that you requested.

9 Click [Next].

10 The Encryption Strength Setting and the Mode using SSL/TLS screenappears.

11 Enter discretionary settings, and click [Create].

Creation results appear.

12 Click [OK].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




1 Click [Settings].


2 Check [Set a Encryption Strength], and click [Next].

The Encryption Strength Setting screen appears.

3 Select a discretionary value.

4 Click [Create].

The completion screen appears.

5 Click [OK].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Changing mode using SSL/TLS

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




1 Click [Settings].


2 Check [Mode using SSL/TLS], and click [Next].

The Mode using SSL/TLS screen appears.

3 Select a discretionary mode, and click [Create].

The completion screen appears.

4 Click [OK].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Removing a certificate

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




1 Click [Settings].


2 Check [Remove a Certificate], and click [Next].

The Remove a Certificate screen appears.

3 Click [Remove].

The removal confirmation screen appears.

4 Click [OK].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




18.7.10Authentication

Auto Logout

This screen appears when you click [Authentication] on the [Network] tab.

The screen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning logout time.

- Enter for individual items. Admin Logout Time, User Logout Time.


- [Clear] button:


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




IS OpenAPI

This screen appears when you click [IS OpenAPI] on the [Network] tab. Thescreen is used to enter and confirm settings concerning the IS OpenAPI.


Port Number, Use SSL/TLS, Port Number (SSL/TLS).

- [Apply] button:


- Clear] button: Click the button to clear the settings that were entered.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19Security

Security

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19

bizhub PRO 1050 19--1

19 Security

The Control Software version is as follows.(This software consists of Image control program and Controller control pro-gram.)

- Image control program (Image Control l1) version: 11-0000 or later

- Controller control program (IP Control P1) version: 10-0000 or later

About the ROM version display function:

The bizhub PRO 1050 Control Software (Image control program / Controllercontrol program) version mentioned above can be confirmed by using the

service representative (CE) service mode ROM version display function.

When you display the ROM version, the Image control program and Control-ler control program versions will be displayed as follows.

- Image control program (Image Control l1) version: 2 digits + 4 zeros fol-lowing the hyphen (Ex: 11-0000)

- Controller control program (IP Control P1) version: 2 digits + 4 zeros fol-lowing the hyphen (Ex: 10-0000)

Please keep this in mind when checking the software version.

Acknowledgements

bizhub PRO is a trademark of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLO-GIES, Inc.

Copyright © 2004 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, Inc.

Exemption

- No part of this manual may be used or duplicated without permission.

- Manufacturer and Sales Company will have no liability for any influencescaused by using the printing system and this Operator Manual.

- The information written in this Network Scanner User’s Guide is subjectto change without prior notice.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


19.1 Security Functions

The bizhub PRO 1050 device has two security modes.

Normal mode

Use this mode if the machine is used by a single person and there is a lowpossibility of illicit access and operations. This is the default mode whenshipped from the factory. To use regular mode, please see the Operator

Manual for each individual machine.

Security Strengthen mode

Use this mode if the machine is connected to a local area network, or to ex-ternal networks through a telephone line or other means. A machine manager

manages the device according to this Operator Manual, so that users can

have a safe operating environment.Your machine manager is the only one who can turn the Security Strengthenmode ON and OFF, and make other changes, and your service representa-tive will designate an machine manager.

To turn the Security Strengthen mode ON, the service representative should

set a CE authentication password and Machine Manager password for thedevice.

Security Strengthen mode is recommended to prevent data from being ac-

cessed or tampered with. Ask your machine manager if the Security Strengthen mode is turned ON.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


19.1.1 Environments in which Security Strengthen mode is rec-ommended

- The device is connected to an local network, the Internet through a fire-wall, or the external telephone line for maintenance.

- The device is monitored by a telephone line or a network.

19.1.2 Creating a secure environment

For security, we recommend that supervisors and a machine manager use

Security Strengthen mode and establish an environment as follows.

- Where to set up the device

Set up the device in a place where only designated personnel can oper-ate it.

- User training

The machine manager must provide training and information to users tomaintain the security of the device. Users should keep passwords set up

by the machine manager, and a password that they set up on their ownin a secure place.

- Qualifications to be a machine manager

A supervisor must select a reliable person who has adequate knowledge,

technical ability, and experience as a machine manager, to whom to del-egate administration of the device.

- Guarantee of service representative (CE)

A supervisor or a machine manager can use Security Strengthen modeafter confirming that a service contract was signed with the service rep-resentative (CE). Clearly state in the service contract that the service rep-

resentative will not engage in any fraudulent actions.

- Secure LAN

We recommend that you use an apparatus such as WEP code (802.11x)to prevent tapping during communication when setting up a local area

network.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


19.2 Security Strengthen Mode

19.2.1 Description of Security Strengthen mode

The following items will have enhanced security.

Protect and delete used data in memory and on the HDD

- There are two kinds of image data that will be saved in memory and on

the HDD: AHA compressed data and uncompressed data (TIFF and PDF

formats). Memory and HDD areas containing the AHA compressed datais freed up when data is deleted. However in normal mode data is not

completely deleted so it could be read through illicit means. In the Secu-rity Strengthen mode, data will be completely cleared before freeing upimage areas.

- Regardless of the data type (compressed or uncompressed), the image

area in memory and on the HDD where the data has been saved will befreed up after it is completely overwritten by the data disrelated to the im-age data.

Enhanced password

- The password is made up of 8 to 64 alphanumerical characters (case

sensitive).

- If a wrong password is entered, attempts to re-try cannot be made for fiveseconds.

Access to the Box with a password

- Set up a system that requires users to input an enhanced password as

described above, to save data or to print data saved in the Box on the

HDD.

- If an enhanced password is set up as above, security will be improvedwhen saving scanned data in the Box. No one other than the machinemanager can delete the Box or Personal Folder in which scanned data is

saved, and changing the Box's attributes requires authentication with the

enhanced password. In addition, authentication will be required to usescanned data saved in the Box.

External access prohibited

- No access is allowed over telephone lines other than CS Remote Care.

Create, save and analyze an audit log

- A history of security function operations will be created and saved. Date

and time, information identifying the person who made the operation, de-

tails of the operation, and results of the operation will be saved, enablinganalysis of unauthorized access. This log will be overwritten if the audit

area is depleted.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


Machine Manager authentication

- A service representative will set up an authentication data for a machinemanager.

- The machine manager must input a password to gain authorized access.Only one authentication string can be registered per machine.

Machine Manager Setting mode

- If the Machine Manager Setting mode has been entered by successful

Manager authentication, the setting change of various machine functionswill be available on the machine.

- Be sure to exit the Machine Manager Setting mode if you leave in front ofthe machine while using the Machine Manager Setting mode.

19.2.2 Data protected by Security Strengthen mode

Data protected by Security Strengthen mode (for users) is as follows.

- Data saved in the Personal Folder (with a password)

The following data administered by the machine manager will also receiveenhanced protection.

- User data

- Data controlling the machine

19.2.3 Data that is not protected in Security Strengthen mode

When the machine is connected to PCs on a local network, passwords inputin PCs are not subject to Security Strengthen mode.

To turn Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF

The machine manager can turn Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF.

If Security Strengthen mode is OFF, data can potentially be accessed, so becareful.

If data is accessed in Security Strengthen mode, the machine manager maynot notice until he/she analyzes the audit log. Be careful when the machine

manager is absent for a long time.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


19.3 Protect and Delete Data After Use

Data from each mode (copy / scan / printer) will be temporarily saved in

memory or on the HDD, and it will be deleted unless it is moved to a Box.

Data is compressed using a special method, so it cannot be decompressed

externally.

When deleting compressed data, a part of it will be destroyed or overwritten

to prevent decompression.

- Data saved temporarily in memory will be overwritten by unavailable data(NA) when the job is interrupted or ended.

- Data saved in several areas of memory will be overwritten simultaneous-ly.

- Data in the Box will be overwritten when a delete order is issued.

- If data is sent externally, it will be overwritten when the transmission iscomplete.

- If the machine manager issues a delete order for each Box, it will be over-written.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


19.4 User Authentication in Security Strengthen Mode

In Security Strengthen mode, setting up password conditions will be tougher

to improve security. The machine manager should set up a user name andpassword required for user authentication, as this is a machine manager op-

eration.- User Name:

1 to 64 alphanumerical characters

- Password:

8 to 64 alphanumerical characters (case sensitive)

If a wrong password is entered, attempts to re-try cannot be made for fiveseconds.

2

Reminder

Do not use your name, birthday, employee number, etc. for a password

that others can easily figure out.

If a password set in normal mode is fewer than 8 characters or more than 64characters, you cannot use it in Security Strengthen mode.

If this happens, contact the machine manager to turn OFF Security Strength-

en mode, and set a new password following the above conditions.

Even after a successful access has been made, authentication with username and password will be required under the following conditions.

- The main power switch is turned off.

- The sub power switch is turned off.

- Data output operation is complete in a Box.

- The [Power Save] on the control panel is pressed on the control panel for

one second or longer.

- The auto reset/auto shutoff function operates.

!Details

When a user accesses a Box for which a password has been set in the

HDD, all authentication operations with password will be saved in an au-

dit log.

Initially, the user authentication is not available on the machine. To acti-

vate this function, the distribution number for each section should be

changed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


19.4.1 To register a user

Follow the procedure below to setup a user name and password to be re-

quired for user authentication in Security Strengthen mode.

Procedure

1 Press [Utility/Counter] on the control panel to display the Utility Screen.


The Input Password Screen will be displayed.

3 Enter the password.

Use the touch screen keypad to enter the 8-digit Machine Managerpassword, then touch [OK]. The Machine Manager Setting MenuScreen will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


!Details

Passwords are case sensitive.

If a wrong password or fewer than 8 alphanumerical characters are entered and the [OK] key is touched, the warning message "Password does

not match" will appear, and no key will work for five seconds. Enter the

right password after five seconds.

If authentication fails, the information will be saved in the audit log.

4 Touch [03 User Auth./Volume Track].

5 Touch [03 User Authentication Set].

The User Authentication Setting Screen will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


6 Touch [Add] to display the User Registration Screen.

7 Touch [User No.], [User Name], [Password], or [Belong Section] to dis-play each subsequent screen, then make the desired setting.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


To enter the User No.:

- Touch [User No.] on the User Registration Screen.- Use the screen keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired

user number.

- Touch [OK] to return to the User Registration Screen.

To enter the User Name:

- Touch [User Name] on the User Registration Screen.

- Enter the desired user name from the screen keypad.- Touch [OK] to return to the User Registration Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


To enter the Password:

- Touch [Password] on the User Registration Screen.- Enter the desired password from the screen keypad.- Touch [OK] to return to the User Registration Screen.

To enter the Section:

- Touch [Belong Section] on the User Registration Screen.- Touch the desired section key to highlight it.

- Touch [OK] to return to the User Registration Screen.

8 Touch [OK].

When settings are completed, touch [OK] on the User Registration

Screen.The User Authentication Setting Screen will be restored.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


19.4.2 To change a user

Follow the procedure below to change a user name and password once reg-

istered.

Procedure


2 Touch [06 Machine Manager Setting]. The Input Password Screen will

be displayed.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


!Details









8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


6 Touch the user name to be changed.

7 Touch [Change]. The Change Registered User Screen will be dis-played.

8 Touch [User Name], [Password], or [Belong Section] to display eachsubsequent screen, then make the desired setting change.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


To change the User Name:

- Touch [User Name] on the User Registration Screen.- Enter the desired user name from the screen keypad.- Touch [OK] to return to the Change Registered User Screen.

To change the Password:

- Touch [Password] on the User Registration Screen.- Enter the desired password from the screen keypad.

- Touch [OK] to return to the Change Registered User Screen.

2

NoteThe current password cannot be used again.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


To change the Section:

- Touch [Belong Section] on the User Registration Screen.- Touch the desired section key to highlight it.- Touch [OK] to return to the Change Registered User Screen.

9 Touch [OK].

When settings are completed, touch [OK] on the Change Registered

User Screen.

The User Authentication Setting Screen will be restored.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


!Details









8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


6 Touch the user name to be deleted. The selected key will be highlight-

ed.

7 Touch [Delete].

The popup menu will be displayed to confirm that the selected user willbe deleted.

Touch [Yes] to delete the selected user name, password, and also thePersonal Folder that belongs to the deleted user.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


19.4.4 To change password by user

General users can change the password that has already been set for user

authentication.We recommend that a user himself/herself changes the password assignedby the machine manager for security.

Procedure


2 Touch [01 System Setting].

The System Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


3 Touch [07 Change User Password].

The User Authentication Screen will be displayed.

4 Touch [User Name], then enter your user name.

The entered name will be displayed on the screen.

5 Touch [Password], then enter your current password.

The entered password will appear as asterisks (********) on the screen.

!Details


If a wrong password or fewer than 8 alphanumerical characters are en-

tered and the [OK] key is touched, the warning message "Password does




8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


6 When user authentication is completed successfully, the Change User

Password Screen will be displayed.

Touch [New Password], then enter your new password. Touch [OK].

2

Reminder

Do not use your name, birthday, employee number, etc. for a password


7 Enter the new password again for confirmation.

Touch [Check Input], then enter your new password once more. Touch

[OK].

8 Touch [OK].

The System Setting Menu Screen will be restored.

!Details

If password setup doesn’t proceed successfully, the information will be

saved in the audit log.

The password currently used cannot be entered as a new password.

9 Touch [Exit].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


19.5 HDD Store Function in Security Strengthen Mode

A Box built on the HDD is used to store the scanned data. To prevent the

data from being accessed or tampered with, we recommend using the Boxwith a password specified.

Never fail to use the Security Strengthen mode when storing any secret doc-ument. If the Security Strengthen mode is turned off temporarily for some

reason, the machine manager should tell that to all users.

19.5.1 Access to the data in a Box

The following is a detailed explanation of how to access a Box in Security

Strengthen mode for which a user name and password have been set.

Procedure

1 On the User Authentication Screen, touch [User Name] and [Password]to enter your user name and password.

Touch [User Name] to display the Input User Name Screen.

Enter the user name, then touch [OK] to return to the User Authentica-tion Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


Touch [Password] to display the Input Password Screen.

Enter the password, then touch [OK] to return to the User Authentica-tion Screen.

!Details







8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


2 Touch [OK].

The Copy Screen will be displayed.


4 Touch [HDD Store] on the Output Application Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


5 The HDD Box List Screen will be displayed.

6 Select the desired personal Box.

7 Enter the password if selected Box requires one.

8 Touch [OK].

9 The File Selection Screen will be displayed.

Regarding subsequent operations for saving data in a Box and dataoutput, see the 1050 Operator Manual, Network Scanner.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


19.5.2 Save/Output scanned data

The following is a detailed explanation of how to save scanned data to a Box

and also to output the data in Security Strengthen mode.

Procedure


Touch [User Name] to display the Input User Name Screen.Enter the user name, then touch [OK] to return to the User Authentica-tion Screen.

Touch [Password] to display the Input Password Screen.Enter the password, then touch [OK] to return to the User Authentica-

tion Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


!Details







2 Touch [OK].


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


3 Touch [STORE] or [RECALL]. If you touch [STORE], then touch [Scan-

ner to HDD].

4 The HDD Box List Screen will be displayed.

To store data:

To recall data:

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19




7 Touch [OK].

8 The File Selection Screen will be displayed.

- To store the data to a Box, proceed to step 9.

- To recall and output the data, proceed to step 12.

9 To store the data in a Box, touch [Store], then enter the file name.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


19.5.3 Delete data in a Box

The following is a detailed explanation of how to delete the data stored in a

Box.

Procedure

1 On the User Authentication Screen, touch [User Name] and {Password]to enter your user name and password.

- Touch [User Name] to display the Input User Name Screen.- Enter the user name, then touch [OK] to return to the User Authen-tication Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


- Touch [Password] to display the Input Password Screen.

- Enter the password, then touch [OK] to return to the User Authen-tication Screen.

!Details






8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


2 Touch [OK].


3 Touch [RECALL].

The HDD Box List Screen will be displayed.



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


19.5.4 Output data in the Confidential Box

Confidential printing using a PC:

To set up data output using the confidential printing function on PC, a con-fidential folder with a specific password must be prepared. Enter the confi-dential folder name made up of max. 8 alphanumerical characters.

Outputting confidential printing on the machine:


- Touch [User Name] to display the Input User Name Screen.- Enter the user name, then touch [OK] to return to the User Authen-

tication Screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


- Touch [Password] to display the Input Password Screen.

- Enter the password, then touch [OK] to return to the User Authen-tication Screen.

!Details






8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


2 Touch [OK].


3 Touch [RECALL].

The HDD Box List Screen will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


4 Touch [Confidential] to display the Confidential Box List Screen.

5 Select the desired confidential box.

6 Enter the confidential password setup in confidential printing.

Touch [OK].

The Confidential File List Screen will be displayed.

7 Select the desired confidential file.

Confidential printing will start.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


19.6 Machine Manager Security Functions

The machine manager turns Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF.

To do so, an 8-digit CE authentication password and Machine Manager

password must be set for the machine. Ask your authorized service repre-

sentative to set up a Machine Manager password. To change this password,the machine manager himself should operate the procedure.

To protect data in the machine from access and tampering, it is recommend-

ed to designate a machine manager and use Security Strengthen mode.

19.6.1 Turn Security Strengthen mode ON/OFF

The following is an explanation of how to turn Security Strengthen mode ON/

OFF.

Procedure


2Touch [06 Machine Manager Setting].The Input Password Screen will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security



Use the touch screen keypad to enter the 8-digit Machine Managerpassword, then touch [OK].

The Machine Manager Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.

!Details







8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


4 Touch [07 Security Setting].

5 Touch [03 Security Strengthen mode].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


6 Turn Security Strengthen mode ON or OFF.

If you want to turn Security Strengthen mode ON, touch [On] to high-light it. If you want to turn it OFF, touch [Off] to highlight it.

7 Touch [OK].

The Restart Confirmation popup screen will appear.

Touch [Yes].

The machine will restart and the new setting will be activated.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


19.6.2 HDD lock password

While the Security Strengthen mode is turned ON, a lock password (8 to 32

alphanumerical characters, case sensitive) can be set up on the HDD to pro-tect the data stored on it.

If the HDD itself is externally accessed, the data readout will not be availableuntil the correct lock password is entered.

!Details

The HDD lock password functions only when the Security Strengthen

mode is ON. When turned OFF, the message “Please set Security

Strengthen mode” will be displayed.

Procedure


2Touch [06 Machine Manager Setting].The Input Password Screen will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security




!Details







8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


4 Touch [07 Security Setting].

5 Touch [02 HDD Management Setting].

The HDD Management Setting Menu Screen will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


6 Touch [03 Change HDD Lock Password].

7 Touch [Current Password] to enter the password currently used, thentouch [OK]. (The first password: 9-digit alphanumeric serial number ofthe main body)

!Details

The main body serial number will be printed at the upper right corner of

the audit log. For details, see the next section “Print audit log” and p. 47

for the sample log.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


8 If authentication is succeeded, touch [New Password] to enter the new

password. The key will not be active until authentication is succeeded.

2

ReminderDo not use your name, birthday, employee number, etc. for a password


!Details


The current password cannot be used again as a new password.

Touch [OK] to return to the previous screen.

9 Touch [Check Input] to re-enter the same password as above.

Touch [OK] to return to the previous screen.

10 Touch [OK].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


19.6.3 Print audit log

An audit log will be automatically created when the data saved in the ma-

chine have been accessed.

All the audit log data can be output as follows.

Procedure



The Input Password Screen will be displayed.


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


Use the touch screen keypad to enter the 8-digit Machine Manager

password, then touch [OK]. The Machine Manager Setting MenuScreen will be displayed.

!DetailsPasswords are case sensitive.


tered and the OK key is touched, the warning message "Password does




4 Touch [01 System Setting].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


5 Touch [04 Management List Print].

6 Touch [Audit Log Report], then touch [COPY].

7 Press [Start] on the control panel.

!Details

To stop printing, press [Stop] on the control panel, then touch [Cancel] on

the confirmation popup screen.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


19.6.4 Analyze audit log

Audit logs need to be analyzed by the machine manager regularly (once per

month) or when unauthorized access and tampering of data saved in the ma-chine in Security Strengthen mode is noticed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


Audit Log Information

The audit log contains the following information.

1. date/time:

date and time when an operation was made that results in the creation ofa log entry.

2. id: the person who made the operation or who is subject to security protec-

tion can be specified."-1": Operation by CE (service representative)."-2": Operation by the machine manager.

"-3": Operation by the unregistered user.Other integer: Indicates subjects for security protection, and the follow-ing action IDs narrow down the subject for protection.

User ID (1 to 1000 numerical symbols)

Confidential User ID (1 to 99999 numerical symbols)3. action:

Used to specify the operation.Check details of operation that action indicates in the following table.

4. result:

Result of an operation.

For password authentication, success or failure will be indicated as OKand NG.

For operations without password authentication, all log entries will be in-

dicated as OK.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


Table of items saved in audit log

No. Operation ID Stored action Result

1 CE authentication CE ID 01 OK/NG

2 Manager authentication Machine Manag-er ID 02 OK/NG

3 Set/change SecurityStrengthen mode

Machine Manag-er ID

03 OK

4 Print audit log Machine Manag-er ID

04 OK

5 Change/register CE pass-word

CE ID 05 OK

6 Change/register MachineManager password

CE ID/ MachineManager ID

06 OK

7 Create user by MachineManager

User ID 07 OK

8 Change/register user pass-word by Machine Manager

User ID 08 OK

9 Delete user by MachineManager

User ID 09 OK

10 Change attributes of user byMachine Manager

User ID 10 OK

11 Password authentication foruser

User ID/ Unregis-tered user ID

11 OK/NG

12 Change attributes of user byuser (user password, etc.)

User ID 12 OK

13 Access to file (documentdata readout)

User ID 13 OK

14 Delete file (document datadeletion)

User ID 14 OK

15 Change attribute of file User ID 15 OK

16 Password authentication forconfidential printing

Confidential userID

16 OK/NG

/ Unregistereduser ID

17 Access to confidential printfile

Confidential userID

17 OK

18 Delete confidential print file Confidential userID

18 OK

19 Change HDD lock pass-word

Machine Manag-er ID

19 OK

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


The purpose of analyzing the audit log is to understand the following and im-

plement countermeasures:

- Whether or not data was accessed or tampered with

- Subject of attack

- Details of attack- Results of attack

For specific analysis methods, see the next page.

Specify unauthorized actions: password authentication

If logs have NG as the result of password authentication (action: 01, 02, 11,16), items protected by passwords may have been attacked.

- Failed password authentication (NG) log entries specify who made theoperation, and show if unauthorized actions were made when password

authentication failed.

- Even if password authentication succeeded (OK), it shows whether a le-

gitimate user created the action. You need to check carefully when suc-

cessful authentication occurs after series of failures especially duringtimes other than normal operating hours.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Security 19


Specify unauthorized actions: actions other than password authentica-tion under security

All operation results other than password authentication will be indicated assuccessful (OK), so determine if there were any unauthorized actions by ID

and action.

- Since you cannot specify what was attacked only with an ID, you need tosee the action and the table on the previous page to determine whether

unauthorized actions were made on a personal box or confidential box.

- Check the time, and see if the user who operated the specific subjectmade any unauthorized actions.

Example

If a document saved in a box was printed using fraudulent authorization, the

following audit log entry will be created.

1. Password authentication for the box: Action = 11

ID = Box that authentication was made

Result = OK/NG

2. Access to the document in the box:

Action = 13

ID = Box that authentication was made

Check the date and time the above operation occurred, and see if the oper-ation on the document in the personal box or confidential box was made bya legitimate box user.

Actions to take if unauthorized operations are found

- If it's found that a password has been leaked after analyzing the audit log,change the password immediately.

- It's possible that a password may have been tampered with and legiti-mate users cannot access a box. The machine manager must contact the

user to confirm the situation, and if that's the case, the machine managermust change the password and delete the data saved in the box.

- If you cannot find documents that should be in a box or if you find a doc-

ument with changed content, unauthorized actions may have occurred.Similar countermeasures are needed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


19 Security


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


20Troubleshooting

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Troubleshooting 20


20 Troubleshooting

20.1 If “Please Call Service” Message Is Displayed A “Please Call Service” message indicates a machine condition that requires

the attention of your service representative.

The Call for Service Screen usually displays the telephone and facsimilenumbers of your service representative.

7 CAUTION% When the Call for Service Screen is displayed, be sure to contact your

service representative immediately by following the procedure below.

1 Make note of the report code number indicated in the second line ofthe message area.

!Details

The machine manager can call for service using the Utility setting. For de-

tails, “01 User Call” on page 17-124

In this case, you don’t have to make a call for the report code, because

your machine has been monitored automatically by your service representative.

After calling for service using the Utility setting, be sure to turn OFF the

power immediately, then unplug the machine as described here.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


20 Troubleshooting


2 Turn OFF the sub power switch and main power switch.

3 Unplug the machine.

4 Contact your service representative and report the condition and report

code number.

!Details

Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble

If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen,

you may continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and uti-

lize the trays and ADU that are not affected by the trouble. To obtain this

limited functionality of the copier, consult your service representative. Be

sure to utilize the limited function only temporarily, and arrange for machine repair immediately.

1. If the limited use of the copier is available, the following message is dis-

played in the message area instead of the report code.

ex.

2. Press [Reset].

Make note of the report code.

3. Turn OFF then ON the sub power switch. A copying job can continue without using the troubled portion of the ma-chine (ex. Tray 2).

7 CAUTION% EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE

OPERATION, BE SURE TO CONTACT YOUR SERVICE REPRESENT- ATIVE IMMEDIATELY WHEN THE CALL FOR SERVICE SCREEN IS

DISPLAYED.

-- Tray 2 failure --Press Reset to select except this tray

Please switch Off/OnE 18-2

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Troubleshooting 20


20.2 Clearing Mishandled Paper

When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine stops making copies and the

Jam Position Screen displays to indicate misfeed area(s).

The [Start] LED turns red on the control panel, and copying operation cannot

be continued until all the misfeed locations are cleared.

All the misfeed locations will be indicated by flashing/lighting numbers andarrows on this screen. Flashing number and arrow indicate the jammed po-

sition of the highest priority.

Action to remove mishandled paper is displayed in the message area, andtouching [Illustration] will display subsequent screens for the disposal action.

Follow the procedure below to remove mishandled paper.

!Details

A jam code can be displayed in the message area of the Jam Position

Screen. Contact your service representative, if desired.

1

2

3


1 Message area An action will be displayed.

2 Paper jam positiondisplay

Numbers flashing or lighting indicate the jammed positions.

3 Illustration key Touch to display the subsequent screens for the disposalaction.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


20 Troubleshooting


1 Touch Illustration on the screen.

The screen illustrating the method for the disposal action will be dis-played.

!Details

Touch [Next] to go to the next page of a series of illustrations, if provided.

Touch [Jam Position] to return to the Jam Position Screen.

2 Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.

When removing mishandled paper, be sure to leave no torn paper in-

side the machine.

Do not touch or damage the drum surface.

2

Reminder

Before performing the clearing procedure, refer to “Caution Labels andIndicators” on page 1-12 .

3 When completed, the Machine Status Screen will be restored.

If any misfeed location is left, the Jam Position Screen will be restored

with the next disposal procedure in the message area and the locationnumber in the jam position display. Repeat steps 1 to 2 until all the lo-cations are cleared.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Troubleshooting 20


7 CAUTION% The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT

TOUCH.

Be especially careful not to put your hand into the fixing unit area whenwithdrawing the fixing conveyance unit to remove mishandled paper.

% Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not toget injured.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


20 Troubleshooting


20.3 If MACHINE Tab Blinks in Orange

If any trouble occurs in the machine, one of the following messages will be

displayed in the message area and the [MACHINE] tab will blink in orange.

- Paper Misfeed: “Mishandled paper”

- Tray Empty: “Please load ## paper”- Inconformity in Paper Presetting: “Please set paper size and type set-

ting”, “Please set reserved size paper”, “Please load designated paper inTray”

With the above message, the [Detail Check] key will be displayed on the Ma-


% Touch [Detail Check], and follow the instruction on the screen.

20.3.1 Paper Misfeed

If a paper misfeed occurs with the print/scan job in progress while you aresetting a reserve job, the machine stops operation and the [MACHINE] tab

may blink in orange.

If the Jam Position Screen is displayed after touching [Detail Check], follow

the procedure “Clearing Mishandled Paper” on page 20-5 to remove mis-handled paper.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Troubleshooting 20


20.3.2 Tray Empty

If the popup screen shown below is displayed after touching [Detail Check],

the selected tray has become empty.

Follow the procedure below to change the tray selection for the current job,or supply the empty tray with copy paper.

To change the tray selection

1 Touch the desired tray key.

2 Touch [OK] to restore the Machine Status Screen.

3 Press [Start].Copy paper will be delivered from newly selected tray to continue the

printing operation.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


20 Troubleshooting


To supply the empty tray with paper

1 Load paper in the empty tray.

For details, refer to “Loading Paper” on page 4-3.

2 Touch [Close] to restore the Machine Status Screen.

3 Press [Start].

Printing operation will resume using the tray supplied with paper.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Troubleshooting 20


20.3.3 Inconformity in Paper Presetting

The machine automatically stops when copy paper in the selected tray

should be replaced according to the paper presetting specified in reservesetting, and displays either of the following popup screens.

Follow the procedure for each to continue the machine operation.

Using Custom size/Wide size/Tabbed standard size paper of differentsize or in different condition

Replace paper in the tray with that specified in the paper presetting, then

touch [Change].

Press [Start] to start the printing operation.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


20 Troubleshooting


Using Standard size paper of different size

Replace paper in the tray with that specified in the paper presetting.

Touch [Change], then press [Start] to start the printing operation.

!Details

If wrong size is loaded in the tray, the above popup screen will be dis-

played. Replace with the correct size, then touch [Close].

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Troubleshooting 20


20.4 If “Memory Full” Message Is Displayed (MemoryOverflow)

In certain modes, this machine uses memory to make operations convenientand smooth flowing.

Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory is inade-quate for the copy conditions selected, and the machine will stop its opera-

tion with the following popup screen displayed.

% Touch [Stop]. All the scanned data will be cleared to terminate the job.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


20 Troubleshooting


20.5 If Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed

When any trouble affects the electrical signal of the copier, “Please switch

Off/On” will be displayed in the message area.

Follow the procedure below to turn the machine power off then on.

1 Turn OFF the sub power switch.

2 Turn OFF the main power switch.

3 Wait about 10 seconds.

4 Turn ON the main power switch and

sub power switch.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Troubleshooting 20


20.6 Troubleshooting Tips

Copier does not operate when power switch is on

- Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket.

- Check to be sure main power switch is ON.

- Check to see if Weekly Timer function is activated. See p. 2-18 for details.

- Check to see if User Authentication is required on the screen. See p. 2-

20 for details.

Copy image is too light

- Manually adjust copy density to darker density.

- Check toner message and add toner, if required.

- Check paper for dampness. Do not leave paper in copier when humidity

is high.- Check to see if Photo, Text, or Low Contrast mode is required.

- Check the Density shift.

Copy image is too dark

- Manually adjust copy density to lighter density.

- Check to see if Photo, Text, or Low Contrast mode is required.

- Check the Density shift.

Copy image is not clean or shows spots

- Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied.

- Keep original glass and inner surface of document feeder clean.

- Call for service if “Please call service” is displayed in the message area.

- Check density indicator and lighten if required.

Copy paper mishandles during copying

- Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location. Do not ex-

ceed the tray capacity.

Magnification cannot be changed

- Reduce & Shift is incompatible with magnification.

- Press [Reset] and set desired copying conditions without using Reduce

& Shift.

Duplex modes cannot be selected

Fully close ADF, then select the desired duplex mode again.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


20 Troubleshooting


Copying does not begin after pressing [Start]

- Close Front door and left side door of main body.

- Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for paper size selected.

- Be sure the print quantity is entered.

- Close Finisher door/Folding unit door/Large capacity stacker door com-pletely.

Copying does not resume after mishandled paper is removed

Check copier diagram on touch panel for additional indications of mishan-

dled paper.

Copy quality is poor

- Check paper for dampness, and replace it if necessary.

- Contact your service representative.

Using user authentication, copies cannot be made after password is en-tered

- Check to see if the message “Copy limit reached” is displayed.

- Contact the machine manager to reset limit.

The original paper is mishandled or skewed in the document feeder

- Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight.

- Be sure originals are not stapled.- Align originals evenly in the ADF.

- Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals.

ADF cannot be used after [Reset] is pressed

- Fully close ADF.

- Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight.

- Position originals properly in the ADF.

- Set to use ADF in the Initial Setting.

Finisher/Folding unit does not operate

- Check for a paper misfeed and remove it, as required.

- Properly close finisher door/Folding unit door.

Add toner message is displayed

New toner supply is needed. Follow instructions for adding toner.

Call for PM is displayed in message areaContact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Troubleshooting 20


APS selects the wrong paper size

Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals.

In mixed original mode, a message to load a required paper size dis-plays, even though that size is loaded in one of the trays

Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size;

otherwise, the tray key on the Copy Screen will blink.

The copy screen does not display settings as described in OperatorManual

Check with the machine manager, as Initial Settings may have beenchanged.

“Please check original”

- This message appears when the copier detects a non-standard papersize on the original glass.

- Select paper size and press [Start]. 1.000 magnification will be selected

automatically.

- If this message continues to be displayed after selecting paper size, se-lect 1.000 magnification, even if it is already indicated, then press [Start].

If desired, ask your service representative to enable the machine to de-fault to 1.000 magnification in this situation.

Sheet insertion result is not as expected

- Blank insertion:Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in thelocations designated for sheet insertion.

- Print insertion:To ensure that chapter sheets in 1-2 mode always appear on the right

hand side in the finished set, insertion sheets must be designated on thepage setting screen with odd numbers, not even. If required, make aneven numbered original page odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of

that page, so that the blank sheet is even and the insertion sheet is odd.

Finisher staple result is not as expected

- The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loaded vertical-

ly (portrait style).

- Check to see if Rotation functions. Release it, if necessary.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


20 Troubleshooting


Copies skew in the stapled sets

- Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray. Reload thecopy paper upside down.

- Check to see if large-sized copies meet the secondary (sub) tray whenfully output before being stapled. Release the lock of the secondary (sub)

tray, then slightly lift it upward.

Using punch, copies cannot be punched

- Check to see if the Punch Dust indicator lights in red on the Machine Sta-tus Screen.

- Empty the trash basket.

Copies cannot be stapled or punched in position

Check to make sure the side guide plates are securely aligned to the copy

paper in the paper tray to be used.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


21Maintenance

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Maintenance 21


21 Maintenance

21.1 Cleaning Image Scanning SectionIn order to maintain optimum copy quality, always keep the following areas

clean.

21.1.1 Cleaning the ADF Scanning Glass

Keep the ADF scanning glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, re-sulting in dark lines on the copies.

Raise the document feeder, then clean the

glass with a clean soft cloth.

21.1.2 Cleaning the Original GlassRaise the document feeder, then clean the original glass with a clean softcloth.

The glass may also clean with a soft cloth

dampened slightly with water, if it is diffi-cult to clean.

2

ReminderNever use paint solvents, such as ben-

zene or thinners, to clean the original

glass.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


21 Maintenance


21.1.3 Cleaning the ADF Guide Cover

The ADF guide cover should be kept clean; otherwise soil marks may be cop-

ied or the original size cannot be detected correctly.

Raise the document feeder, then clean the

ADF guide cover with a clean soft cloth.

2

Reminder

Never use paint solvents, such as ben-

zene or thinners, to clean the ADF

guide cover.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Maintenance 21


21.2 Checking Copy Count

The Utility Menu Screen allows you to view the current indication of the fol-

lowing items as a list.

- Total count

- Feed paper count- Output paper count

- Printer total count

- Copier total count

- Scanner total count

- PM count, cycle, counter start date

- Developer count, cycle, counter start date

- Drum count, cycle, counter start date

Check the list, then print it from the Copy Screen, if desired.

1 Press [Utility/Counter] on the control panel.

The Utility Menu Screen will be displayed.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


21 Maintenance


!Details

The Utility Menu Screen can be displayed even when the job operation is

in progress.

The counter information will be displayed on the left side of the screen.

Touching [Exit] will return to the previous screen.

2 Touch Detail Check.

The PM count, Developer count, and Drum count will be displayed.

Touching [Exit] will exit the Utility mode and restore the previous

screen.

!Details

The Developer count and Drum count can be selected to indicate either

the cycle count or runtime count. Contact your service representative, ifdesired.

3 Print the counter list, if desired.

- Touch [COPY] tab to display the Copy Screen.- Select the desired paper size, then press [Start].- After the Counter list is printed out, the Utility mode will be released

automatically and the previous screen will be restored.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Maintenance 21


21.3 Preventive Maintenance

After a set number of copies (750,000 copies) have been made on your ma-

chine, Preventive Maintenance (PM) will be required for maintaining optimalperformance.

When preventive maintenance is due, amessage and the PM icon will prompt you

to contact your service representative formaintenance.

!Details

The machine manager can call for service using the Utility setting. For de-

tails, refer to “01 User Call” on page 17-124 .

In this case, you don’t have to make a call for preventive maintenance,

because your machine has been monitored automatically by your service

representative.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


21 Maintenance


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


22Machine Specifications

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Machine Specifications 22


22 Machine Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

22.1 Main Body Specifications

22.1.1 Main Body

Specifications

Name bizhub PRO 1050

Type Console type

Transfer method Indirect electrostatic method

Original glass Fixed

Light-sensitive unit OPC

Light source Xenon lamp

Developing method Dry, 2-component magnetic brush developing

Fixing method Heat roller

Density adjustment Automatic and manual (9 steps)

Magnification ratio • 1:1 ± 1.0%• Enlargement:

1:1.154 (115.4%), 1:1.224 (122.4%), 1:1.414 (141.4%),1:2.000 (200%)

• Reduction:1:0.866 (86.6%), 1:0.816 (81.6%), 1:0.707 (70.7%), 1:0.500(50%)

• Zoom/Special ratio magnification ratio:25% to 400% in 0.1% increments

Copy paper • Plain/Recycled paper: 60 to 90 g/m2

• Thick paper: 91 to 300 g/m2

• Thin paper: 50 to 59 g/m2

• Special paper: OHP, Tab, 3-hole, Coated

* Ink-jet paper is unavailable.

Copying speed • 105 copies/min. ( A4 ), 81 copies/min. ( A4R),• 105 copies/min. ( B5 ), 91 copies/min. (B5R),• 60 copies/min. ( A3 ), 68 copies/min. (B4)

Continuous copying 1 to 9,999 copies

Types of original Sheet, book originals

Original size A3 or 280 mm x 432 mm maximum

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




Paper size • Standard size: A3 to B6R size (image cutoff width: leading and trailingends 2 mm ± 2 mm, top and bottom 1.5 mm ± 1.5 mm)

• Wide size and non-standard size:Max. 324 mm x 460 mm

* Full-Image Area function is not provided on this machine.

Paper supply method Tray 1, 2 (universal); 1,500 sheets (80 g/m 2 )

Warm-up time Approx. 6 minutes @20°C; 50%RH

First copy time Approx. 3.0 seconds (A4)

Power AC 230V / 15A; 50Hz (This equipment selects the correct volt-age automatically.)

Power consumption 3.00 KW max. (with option)

Sound power level 80 dB max. (with option)

Weight Approx. 330 kg (main body + ADF)+ 142 kg w/Paper feeder unit (PF-701)+ 110 kg w/Large stacker (LS-501/LS-502)+ 80 kg w/Finisher (FS-503)+ 120 kg w/Folding unit (FD-501)

Size • 895 (W) x 780 (D) x 1020 (H) mm(main body excluding control panel)

• 2968 (W) x 780 (D) x 1020 (H) mm(main body + PF-701 + FD-501 + FS-503)

• 3272 (W) x 780 (D) x 1020 (H) mm(main body + PF-701 + LS-501 + LS-502)

Effective size* 200 mm or more from the back side; 100 mm or more fromboth right and left sides

* Space required for the safe operation

Specifications

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




22.1.2 ADF (DF-603)

22.1.3 Adobe Post Script3 Expansion kit

Specifications

Function Feed 1- and 2-sided originals automatically

Type of original 50 ~ 200 g/m2

Original size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, B6R, 11"x17", 8"x13", 8.5"x11"

Original capacity 100 sheets max. (80 g/m 2 )

Original insertion Automatic feed at a time

Dimensions 650 (W) x 570 (D) x 170 (H) mm(paper feed tray excluded)

Weight Approx. 22 kg

Power source Supply from main body

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




22.2 Option Specifications

22.2.1 PF-701 Paper Feeder Unit

22.2.2 LS-501/LS-502 Large Capacity Stacker

Specifications

Function: Paper feed into main body (3 trays)

Paper sizes A3, B4, A4, B5, B5R, F4, 12”x18”, 11"x17", 8.5"x14",8.5"x11", and those wide sizes (max. 324 mm x 460 mm)

Types of paper • 50 ~ 244 g/m 2 paper (tray 3 and 5)• 50 ~ 300 g/m 2 paper (tray 4)• PPC, HQ, coated, labels, tracing paper available

Capacity 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2 ) for each tray

Dimensions 807 (W) x 675 (D) x 1020 (H) mm



Specifications

Function Stack printed paper

Paper sizes A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, F4, 12”x18”, 11"x17”, 8.5"x14",8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR, and those wide sizes

(max. 324 mm x 460 mm)

Tabbed standard size is output to secondary (sub) tray

Type of paper • Stacker: 50 ~ 244 g/m 2 paper • Secondary (sub) tray: 50 ~ 300 g/m2 paper

Capacity • Stacker: 5,000 sheets (or 2,000 sheets for B5 and A5)• Secondary (sub) tray: 200 sheets



Power source • LS-501: Internal battery• LS-502: Supply from main body

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




22.2.3 FS-503 In-Bin Stapler Finisher

Specifications

Type Offset catch tray

Functions Staple, Straight delivery, Shift delivery, Output to secondarytray

Paper sizes • Staple: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, F4, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14",8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K and those widesizes (max. 324 mm x 460 mm)

• Straight/Shift delivery: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, F4, 12"x18", 11"x17",8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, 8K,16K, 16KR, and those wide sizes (max. 324 mm x 460 mm),Tab paper (STD size)

* B6R is available in straight delivery only.

Paper type • 50 ~ 244 g/m 2 paper • 50 ~ 300 g/m 2 paper (output to secondary tray)

Number of stapled sheet 100 sheets max. (80 g/m 2 paper)

Tray capacity • Primary (main) tray: 3,000 sheets max.• Secondary (sub) tray: 200 sheets max.

Staple cartridge 5,000 staples

Dimensions • 544 (W) x 656 (D) x 1020 (H) mm• Width including primaty (main) tray:

781 mm/ 866 mm (pulled out)



8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf




22.2.4 FD-501 Folding Unit

22.2.5 OthersMemory unit for Printer controller (EM-701)

Specifications

Functions Punch, Folding, Post inserting (PI), Straight delivery, Output tosecondary tray

Number of punch holes 2 or 4

Hole diameter 6.5 mm ± 0.5 mm (2 holes) / 8.0 mm ± 0.5 mm (4 holes)

Hole pitch 80 mm ± 0.5 mm (2 holes) / 80 mm ± 0.5 mm (4 holes)

Types of paper • 50 to 209 g/m 2 paper (Punch)• 50 to 130 g/m2 paper (Folding, Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-

out, Z-Fold)• 50 to 91 g/m2 paper (Double Parallel, Gate)• 50 to 300 g/m 2 paper when output to secondary (sub) tray,

or conforms to the specifications of selected output device(Straight delivery)

Output trays Output trays available for the sheets finished through Foldingunit:• Primary (main) tray / Secondary (sub) tray of FS-503 Finish-

er: For details, refer to “FS-503 In-Bin Stapler Finisher” onpage 22-7.

• Secondary (sub) tray on the left side of FD-501 Folding unit:200 sheets max.

Straight delivery or Punch:• Any tray mentioned above is available for Straight delivery

or Punch.• Any tray mentioned above is available for Folding or Z-Fold.• Secondary (sub) tray on the left side of FD-501 is available

only for Letter Fold-in, Letter Fold-out, Double Parallel, orGate.

Cover paper type PPC, HQ, coated, tracing (50 to 300 g/m2 paper)

Paper sizes • 4-hole punch: A3, B4, A4, B5, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x11", 8K, 16K

• 2-hole punch: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, F4, 12"x18", 11"x17",8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K

• Folding: A3, B4, A4R, 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8K

• Post inserting: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, F4, 12"x18", 11"x17",

8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K, 16KR,tabbed standard sizes, wide sizes (max. 324mm x 460mm)

• Straight delivery:conforms to the specifications of selected output device

Stack capacity using PI 500 sheets max. (80 g/m 2 paper) for each tray



Power source Internal battery

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


23 Appendix

23.1 How to Input Characters As touching the item where you can input characters, the character input

screen appears.

You can input alphanumerics and symbols. A character array is the samewith the computer keyboards.

23.1.1 About keys on the character input screen

Keys on the character input screen are described here.

* / )This key moves a cursor.

[Delete]

This key deletes the character on the left of the cursor.

[OK]

This key determines the characters you input, and the character input screencloses.

[Cancel]

This key cancels the characters you input, and the character input screencloses.

[Shift]

This key switches between an upper case letter and a lower case letter, andbetween numbers and signs.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


23.1.2 About character input

The followings describe basic steps to input characters on the character in-

put screen.

1 Touch the corresponding key to input the desired character.

2 Touch [OK].

The character input screen closes. The input characters are displayedon the corresponding column.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


23.2 Setting Data for Import/Export

[1] System

Main menus Sub menus Target items

Device Infor-mation

Device Infor-mation

Device Name Device Place Administrator Name

Online Assist-ance

Online Assist-ance

Contact NameContact InformationProduct Help URLCorporate URLSupplies and AccessoriesOnline Help URL

AlertMail AlertMail Notice of E-MailNotice of E-Mail Address

Item Paper EmptyPaper JamMaintenanceStaple EmptyToner EmptyOutput FullService CallPunch Waste Remove

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


[2] Print


Interface Interface Parallel TimeoutNetwork Timeout

Default Setting General PDLInput TrayOutput TrayDuplexBindingStaplePunchCenter Staple/CenterFold/TrimmingOffsetOutput OrderPage OrderPrint Number

CollatePaper SizeOrientationResolutionSpool settingBanner OptionBanner Page TrayConvert Paper Size1 Page/SheetBookletPrint Position

Default Setting-PCL

Font NameSymbol Set

Line/PageFont Point SizeFont PitchCR/LF Mapping

Default Setting-PS

Print To PS Error

Default Setting-TIFF

Auto Paper SelectImage Position

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


[3] Network


TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IPSpeed

Auto IPIP AdressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayHost NameDomain NameDNS ServerRAW Port Number1RAW Port Number2RAW Port Number3RAW Port Number4RAW Port Number5RAW Port Number6

LPD

IP Address Fil-tering

Access Permission AddressStart address 1 - Ending address 1Start address 2 - Ending address 2Start address 3 - Ending address 3Start address 4 - Ending address 4Start address 4 - Ending address 5

Access Refusal AddressStart address 1 - Ending address 1Start address 2 - Ending address 2Start address 3 - Ending address 3Start address 4 - Ending address 4

Start address 4 - Ending address 5NetWare Netware NetWare Print

Frame TypeModePserverPrint Server NamePrint Server PasswordPrint Queue Scan RateBindery/NDSBinderyPreferred File ServerNDSPreferred NDS Context

Preferred NDS Tree NameNprinter/RprinterPrinter NamePrinter Number

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


IPP IPP IPP PrintPrinter NamePrinter LocationPrinter InformationPrinter URIOperations SupportedPrint Job

Accept Print JobValidate JobCancel JobGet Job AttributeGet JobsGet Printer Attribute

FTP Client FTP ClientProxy Server AddressProxy Server Port NumberServer Timeout

Port Number

Server FTP Server

SNMP SNMP SNMP

SMB Scan SMB Scan

Print SMB PrintNetBIOS NamePrint Service NameWork Group

Apple Talk Apple Talk Apple Talk

Printer NameZone Name

E-Mail Email-Receive ReceiveReceiving Server AddressUser NamePassword

APOP AuthenticationConnection TimeoutPort Number

Email-Send SendSMTP Server CapacityPort Number

Connection TimeoutMax Mail SizeSMTP Server Capacity

Administrator Mail Address AuthenticationOffPOP Before SMTPSMTP AuthenticationUser NamePasswordRealmBinary DivisionDivision Size


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


SSL/TLS SSL/TLS Infor-mation

Encryption StrengthValidity PeriodOrganizationOrganization UnitLocalityState/ProvinceCountry

Authentication Auto Logout Admin Logout TimeUser Logout Time

IS OpenAPI IS OpenAPI Port NumberUse SSL/TLSPort Number(SSL/TLS)


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


23.3 Configuration Setting

Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


23.4 Font List

Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


Print Sample

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


23.5 PCL Font List

Font# Font Pitch/Point

000 Courier scalable

001 CG Times scalable

002 CG Times Bold scalable

003 CG Times Italic scalable

004 CG Times Bold Italic scalable

005 CG Omega scalable

006 CG Omega Bold scalable

007 CG Omega Italic scalable

008 CG Omega Bold Italic scalable

009 Coronet scalable

010 Clarendon Condensed scalable

011 Univers Medium scalable

012 Univers Bold scalable

013 Univers Medium Italic scalable

014 Univers Bold Italic scalable

015 Univers Medium Condensed scalable

016 Univers Bold Condensed scalable

017 Univers Medium Condensed Italic scalable

018 Univers Bold Condensed Italic scalable

019 Antique Olive scalable

020 Antique Olive Bold scalable

021 Antique Olive Italic scalable

022 Garamond Antique scalable

023 Garamond Halbfett scalable

024 Garamond Kursiv scalable

025 Garamond Kursiv Halbfett scalable

026 Marigold scalable

027 Albertus Medium scalable

028 Albertus Extra Bold scalable

029 Arial scalable

030 Arial Bold scalable

031 Arial Italic scalable

032 Arial Bold Italic scalable

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


033 Times New scalable

034 Times New Bold scalable

035 Times New Italic scalable

036 Times New Bold Italic scalable

037 Helvetica scalable

038 Helvetica Bold scalable

039 Helvetica Olique scalable

040 Helvetica Bold Oblique scalable

041 Helvetica Narrow scalable

042 Helvetica Narrow Bold scalable

043 Helvetica Narrow Oblique scalable

044 Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique scalable

045 Palatino Roman scalable

046 Palatino Bold scalable

047 Palatino Italic scalable

048 Palatino Bold Italic scalable

049 ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book scalable

050 ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi scalable

051 ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique scalable

052 ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique scalable

053 ITC Bookman Light scalable

054 ITC Bookman Demi scalable

055 ITC Bookman Light Italic scalable

056 ITC Bookman Demi Italic scalable

057 New Century Schoolbook Roman scalable

058 New Century Schoolbook Bold scalable

059 New Century Schoolbook Italic scalable

060 New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic scalable

061 Times Roman scalable

062 Times Bold scalable

063 Times Italic scalable

064 Times Bold Italic scalable

065 ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic scalable

066 ITC Zapf Dingbats scalable

067 Symbol scalable


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


068 Symbol scalable

069 Wingdings scalable

070 Courier Bold scalable

071 Courier Italic scalable

072 Courier Bold Italic scalable

073 Letter Gothic scalable

074 Letter Gothic Bold scalable

075 Letter Gothic Italic scalable

076 CourierPS scalable

077 CourierPS Bold scalable

078 CourierPS Oblique scalable

079 CourierPS Bold Oblique scalable

080 Line Printer 16.67/8.5









8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


23.6 Glossary

Term Description

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/ 1000BASE-TX

Types of specifications in compliance with the Ethernetstandard.Cables made of two stranded copper wire rods are used.Communication speed is 10Mbps with 10Base-T, 100Mbpswith 100Base-TX, and 1000Mbps with 1000Base-TX.

APOP Abbreviation of Authenticated Post Office Protocol. An au-thentication method of improved safety by encrypting thepassword; ordinary POP uses an unencrypted passwordwhich is used to receive E-mails.

Client A computer which uses services provided by servers throughthe network.

DHCP Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for a client machine on the TCP/IP network to au-tomatically read the setting for the network from a server.Only by controlling the IP addresses for the DHCP clients col-lectively with the DHCP server, a network can be easily con-structed avoiding duplicate addresses.

DNS Abbreviation of Domain Name System. A system to allow to acquire an appropriate IP address fromthe host name in the network environment. Users can specifythe name of the host instead of the IP address which is diffi-cult to memorize and distinguish and access the other per-sonal computer on the network.

FTP Abbreviation of File Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to

transfer files on the TCP/IP network such as Internet, Intran-et, etc.

Gateway Hardware or software serving as a point connecting net-works. Not only connecting, it converts the format, address,protocol, etc. of the data according to the network to be con-nected.

Hard disk Mass storage device to save data.The data is maintained even if the power is turned OFF.

HTTP Abbreviation of HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocolused to transmit or receive data between a web server andclient (web browser, etc.). Files of image, voice, animation,

etc. correlated with the document can be exchanged includ-ing the expression form and other information.

IP address A code (address) to identify individual network devices on theInternet. Comprises 4 sets of figures of 3 digits at the maxi-mum such as 192.168.1.10. An IP address is allocated to allcomputers and other devices connected to the Internet.

IPP Abbreviation of Internet Printing Protocol. A protocol to con-trol the transmission and reception of printing data or printingdevices through the Internet or other TCP/IP networks. Datacan be transmitted to a remote printer through the Internetand printed there.

LAN Abbreviation of Local Area Network. A network connectingcomputers on the same floor, in the same building, in thebuildings nearby, etc.

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


LPR/LPD Abbreviation of Line Printer Request/Line Printer Daemon. A type of printing through a network of the WindowsNT sys-tem or UNIX system. Printing data from Windows or UNIXcan be transmitted to a printer on a network using TCP/IP.

Memory Unit to save data temporarily.Data in some memory is erased when the power is turnedOFF and not erased in others.

NDS Abbreviation of Novell Directory Service.Shared resources such as servers, printers, user information,etc. on the network or information such access authority ofeach user to those resources can be centrally controlled in ahierarchical structure.

NetWare Network OS developed by Novel.Uses NetWare IPX/SPX as the communication protocol.

OS Abbreviation of Operating System. Basic software to control

the computer system. Windows, MacOS, and Unix are exam-ples.

PDF Abbreviation of Portable Document Format. One of electron-ic documents (extension; .pdf) in the format based on Post-Script which can be accessed using Adobe Acrobat Reader,software free of charge.

ping Abbreviation of Packed INternet Groper. A command used toconfirm the communication situation with a distant deviceunder the TCP/IP network environment.

POP Abbreviation of Post Office Protocol. A protocol to receiveelectronic mails from a mail server. Currently, POP3, version3 of POP, is mainly used.

Port number Number to distinguish each communication port of multipleprocesses working in the computers on the network. A sameport cannot be used for multiple processes.

PostScript Representative page description language generally used forprinting requiring specifically high quality, developed by US

Adobe.

Printer driver Software acting as an intermediate between the computerand printer.

Proxy Server A server provided to act as the connecting point with the out-side instead of each client in the connection with Internet andto secure the security of the whole system efficiently.

Pserver Print server module under the Netware environment.Monitors, alters, pauses, resumes or stops the print job.

Resolution Degree how correctly the details of images or prints can bereproduced.

SMB Abbreviation of Server Message Block. A protocol usedmainly to realize sharing of files or printers through the net-work between Windows.

SMTP Abbreviation of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A protocol to

transmit or transfer the electronic mails.

SNMP Abbreviation of Simple Network Management Protocol. Acontrol protocol using TCP/IP in the network environment.

Term Description

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


23.7 Index

Numerics

1.000 Magnification mode .....6-28

1-2

..........................................6-331SHOT Indication Time ..........16-8

2 in 1 ......................................8-20

2 Repeat .................................8-49

2-1 ..........................................6-40

2-2 ..........................................6-33

4 in 1 ......................................8-20

4 Repeat .................................8-49

8 in 1 ......................................8-20

8 Repeat .................................8-49

A

Access key ...............................2-6

Accessibility key ...........2-7, 10-22

Add section settings ............17-46

Add user settings .................17-52

Adding Toner ...........................4-9

ADF (Automatic DocumentFeeder) .....................................2-3

ADF AMS .............................16-37

ADF APS ..............................16-37

ADF Frame Erasure Setting .17-31

ADF Restart Timing Adjustment ...........................13-20

Adhesive Binding ...................8-23 Adjusting Response Timeof Touch Keys ......................10-22

Adjustment key ........................2-8

AE key ............................5-3, 6-23

Air Assist ..............................12-16

Alert Mail ..............................17-98

All-Image Area .......................8-59

AMS .......................................6-45

AppleTalk .............................17-88

Application key ................ 5-4, 8-8

APS ........................................ 6-43

ATS ...................................... 16-14

ATS Permit .......................... 16-16

ATS/APS Switch .................. 16-15

Audit log report .................... 17-24

Authentication Method ........ 17-40

Authentication Setting ......... 17-40

Auto Low Power .......... 2-21, 17-6

Auto Paper Select ................. 6-43

Auto Paper Select key

............. 5-4 Auto Paper Type .................. 16-18

AUTO RESET Key Setting ... 16-34

Auto Reset Setting .............. 16-10

Auto select of Booklet copy 16-37

Auto Shut Off ......................... 17-6

Auto Shut-Off ........................ 2-21

Auto Start mode

(Single Feed) .......................... 6-16 Auto Tray Switching ............ 16-14

Auto Zoom key ........................ 5-4

Automatic Exposure (AE) ....... 6-22

B

Back Cover ............................ 8-13

Background Whiteness ......... 6-22

Basic Setting ............. 14-4, 14-11Binding .................................. 14-4

Binding Direction for

Duplex Copies ....................... 9-12

Binding Direction of Originals .. 6-9

Binding margin ...................... 8-63

Blank Insert ............................ 12-5

Block Set ............................. 17-14

Book Copy ............................. 8-33

Book/News ............................ 12-5

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


Booklet ...................................8-23

Bookmark key .......................... 8-9

Both Sides Adj. ..........12-4, 12-15

Brightness adjustment dial ......2-7

Browser

..................................18-1Browser Control Setting ........ 18-3

Administrator Mode ....... 18-10 Administrator Mode

screen ..............................18-6 Administrator Password . 18-10 Alert Mail ........................ 18-17

Apple Talk ......................18-40 Authentication ................18-58

Auto Logout

...................18-58Body Registration ..........18-27

Default Settings ..............18-20Device Information .........18-11

E-Mail .............................18-41E-Mail Receive (POP)Configuration .................. 18-41

E-Mail Send (SMTP)Configuration .................. 18-42

Encryption Strength ....... 18-53

FTP .................................18-35FTP Client .......................18-35

FTP Server ..................... 18-36General Settings ............. 18-20Import/Export .................18-14

Interface .........................18-18IP Filtering ......................18-30

IPP ..................................18-34IS OpenAPI .....................18-59

Logging Administrator Mode

..18-8

Maintenance ................... 18-15NetWare .........................18-32

NetWare Status ..............18-33Network Setting Clear .... 18-15Network tab ....................18-30

Online Assistance ...........18-12PageScopeWeb Connection .............. 18-3

PCL Settings .................. 18-21Port Settings .................. 18-19

Print ................................18-39

Print tab ..........................18-18

PS Settings (Option) .......18-22Reset ..............................18-16ROM Version ..................18-12

Scan tab .........................18-24

SMB

................................18-38SMB Scan .......................18-38SNMP .............................18-37

SSL/TLS .........................18-43Subject Registration .......18-24

System Requirements ......18-3System tab .....................18-10TCP/IP ............................18-30

TIFF Settings ..................18-23User Mode screen ............18-6

Web Browser Settings ......18-4

Buzzer for Job Stop Setting ...16-6

Buzzer ON/OFF,

Volume Setting .......................16-4

Buzzer Setting ........................16-4

buzzer volume ........................16-4

C

[C] (Clear quantity) key .............2-6

Call for Service Screen ...........20-3

Cartridge indicator .................4-12

CAUTION ..................................1-3

Caution Labels and Indicators 1-12

Centre Staple/Centre Fold/ Trimming ...........14-4

Centring Adjustment ............13-22

Change .................................12-26

Change HDD LockPassword ...........................17-133

Change Magnification Ratio ...6-29

Change overlay memory ......17-26

Change preset zoom ............17-26

Change section settings .......17-46

Change send address ..........17-26

Change User Password .......16-12

Change user settings ...........17-51

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


Change/Delete E-Mail

destination address ...........17-139

Change/Delete the FTPdestination address ...........17-142

Change/Delete the HDDdestination address ...........17-140

Change/delete the SMBdestination address ...........17-143

Chapter ..................................8-17

Check Mode ...........................10-5

Check/Control Reserved Jobs .7-4

Checking Copy Count ............21-5

Cleaning Image Scanning

Section ...................................21-3

Clearing Mishandled Paper ....20-5

Coated A ................................12-4

Coated B ................................12-5

Collate ....................................14-4

Collated / Uncollated Output to theSecondary (Sub) Tray ............9-21

Collated mode ....9-14, 9-15, 9-24

Colored Paper 12-4, 12-14, 16-19

Combination ...........................8-20

Configuration Page Print ........14-3

Continuation Print (Copy) ...17-121

Continuation Print(Print) .....17-112

Control panel ...........................2-3

Control Panel Layout ...............2-6

Controller

...............................14-3Controller key ...........................2-8

Conveyance fixing unit .............2-5

Copy card ............................16-35

Copy Mode ............................6-33

Copy Mode area ......................5-4

Copy Reserve Operation ....17-118

Copy Screen ............................5-3

Copy Setting ........................16-32

COPY tab .........................2-8, 5-3

Copy/Printer Setting .......... 17-111

Count/Set indicator ................. 2-8

CSRC ................................. 17-100

CSRC Communications

Test

.................................... 17-104CSRC Receive Setting ...... 17-103

CSRC Send Setting ........... 17-102

Custom Size ........................ 12-19

Custom Size (Original) ........... 6-18

Custom Size(Paper Presetting) .................. 6-50

D

Darker key ............................. 6-23

Data LED ................................. 2-7

Date/Time .............................. 8-66

Default Address Setting ...... 16-40

Default Resolution Setting ... 16-42

Default Screen Setting .......... 16-9

Delete Group ..................... 17-144

Delete section settings

........ 17-47Delete user settings ............. 17-52

Density adjustment key ........... 5-3

Density level ........................ 17-33

density level sample ............ 16-24

Density Setting .................... 16-22

Density Shift for

Enhance Mode .................... 16-21

Diff. time setting .................... 17-9

Double Parallel mode ............ 9-31

Double Parallel Position

Adjustment .......................... 13-44

Drum unit ................................. 2-5

Duplex ................................... 14-4

E

Each FunctionSetting ......... 16-20, 16-37, 16-42

Each Reset Setting .............. 16-34

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


E-Mail ...................................17-90

E-mail error notification ....... 17-98

E-Mail Receive Setting ........ 17-94

E-Mail Send Setting ............. 17-93

Embossed

..............................12-5Empty Trash Basket .............. 4-15

ENERGY STAR Program .......X-13

Enlarge/Reduce .....................6-31

Erase mode ..........................17-33

Erase Outside of Original ..... 17-29

Except Orig. Glass (1:1) ....... 17-29

Exit .........................................15-4

Expert Adjustment ...............17-29

Exposure (density) .................6-22

External Machine Items ...........2-3

F

FD-501 Folding Unit .............. 2-10

Features of the bizhub

PRO 1050 ................................5-5

Feed Tray ...............................14-4

Feed Tray Auto Selection .... 16-14

Feed Tray Setting ................16-14

File form ...............................16-42

File Form Setting (E-Mail) .... 16-42

File Form Setting (FTP) ........ 16-42

File Form Setting (HDD) ....... 16-42

File Form Setting (SMB) ....... 16-42

Fine ........................................12-5

Finisher Adjustment ............. 13-24

Finisher Mode for Full Auto ..16-34

Fixing Prerotation Set ........ 17-114

Fixing unit ................................2-5

Folder Box List/Delete ....... 17-127

Folding Copies ....................... 9-31

Folding mode

......................... 9-31Folding Position Adjustment 13-35

Font pattern list ....................17-23

Frame/Fold Erase ...................8-53

Front Cover ............................8-13

Front door ................................2-4

FS-503 Finisher ......................2-13

FTP

.......................................17-82Full Auto ...............................16-30

Function Invalid ....................17-19

Function Setting ...................16-15

Function Valid .......................17-19

G

Gate mode .............................9-31

Gate Position Adjustment

....13-50Gateway Address .................17-56

H

HDD ......................................17-96

HDD Data Auto Delete

Period Setting .....................17-131

HDD lock password ...........17-133

HDD Management Setting

.17-127Help key ...................................2-7

Help Mode ............................10-19

Help Screen ..........................10-20

Hole-Punch ... 12-4, 12-14, 16-19

Hole-Punch VerticalPosition Adjustment .............13-32

How to Make a Basic Copy ......5-9

I

Icon area ..........................2-9, 5-4

Image Auto Rotation ..........17-116

Image Centring .......................8-57

Image Density Selection .......16-27

Image Insert ...........................8-29

Image Order ...........................14-4

Image Shift

.............................8-60Image shift ............................16-20

Image shift in decimal point .16-20

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


Imaging Solution OpenAPI .17-105

Incomplete Job ........................7-8

Inconformity in Paper

Presetting .............................20-11

Initial by Key Counter Insert

.16-35Initial Setting ........................16-30

Input Size .............................12-20

Inserting a NewStaple Cartridge .....................4-12

Insertion Sheets .....................8-14

Installation Space ...................1-13

Interface Setting ...................14-19

Internal Machine Items

.............2-5Interrupt Copying ...................10-9

Interrupt key .............................2-6

Interrupt mode .......................10-9

Interruption Suspend .........17-117

IP Address ............................17-56

IP Address (Server PC) ........17-56

IPP ........................................17-79

IS OpenAPI ........................17-105

J

Jam Position Screen ..............20-5

Job list ......................................2-8

Job List Screen ........................7-3

JOB LIST tab ....................2-8, 7-3

JOB Offset Operating ........17-111

K

Key counter ..........................16-35

Key Response Time .............16-11

Keypad .....................................2-6

L

Language Setting ...................16-3

Laser Safety

.............................1-9Left side door ...........................2-4

Letter Fold-in mode ...............9-31

Letter Fold-in Position

Adjustment .......................... 13-38

Letter Fold-out mode ............ 9-31

Letter Fold-out Position

Adjustment .......................... 13-41

Lighter key ............................. 6-23

Limited Use of the

Copier in Trouble ................... 20-4

Line Speed Setting .............. 17-56

Loading / Sorting Large Numbers ofSheets (LS-501/LS-502) ........ 9-24

Loading Paper ......................... 4-3

Loading Tabbed Sheets .......... 4-7

Lock/Delete mode memory . 17-26

Low Contrast ....................... 16-21

Low Contrast mode ............... 6-26

LS-501/ LS-502 Large CapacityStacker .................................. 2-14

Lunch Hour Off Setting ........ 17-18

M

Machine Adjustment .............. 13-3

Machine Configuration ............ 2-3

Machine Manager Password ... 17-126

Machine ManagerPassword ............................... 17-3

Machine Manager Register . 17-36

Machine Manager Setting ..... 17-3

Machine Manager

Setting Menu ......................... 17-4

Machine NIC Setting ........... 17-56

Machine status display ............ 2-9

Machine Status Screen ........... 2-8

MACHINE tab .......................... 2-8

Magnification Adjustment ...... 13-3

Main Body Specifications ...... 22-3

Main power switch .................. 2-5

Maintenance ...................... 17-124

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix


Maintenance & supply

indicator ...................................2-9

Making Double-Sided CopiesUsing ADF ..............................6-33

Making Double-Sided CopiesUsing Original Glass .............. 6-36

Making Single-Sided Copies fromDouble-Sided Originals ..........6-40

Management List Print .........17-22

Manager/Machine Register ..17-37

Manual Zoom ......................... 6-30

Memory Full Message .........20-13

Memory Overflow ................20-13

Memory Scan key .................... 5-4

Memory Scan Mode .............. 6-20

Message area .................. 2-9, 5-4

Mixed Original ........................ 6-11

Mode Check key ......................2-7

Mode Memory .....................10-11

Mode Memory key ................... 2-7

Mode memory list

................17-22Multi Folder (Fold)

Adjustment ...........................13-35

Multi Folder (Punch) Adjustment ...........................13-30

Multi-feed detection ...............9-35

N

Name ...................................12-13

Neg. Pos. Reverse .................8-44

NetWare ...............................17-75

Network printer ....................17-75

Network Setting ................... 17-56

Network Setting Clear ........ 17-109

No Image Area Erase ............. 8-41

No. .........................................14-4

Non Image Area EraseSetting ..................................17-33

Non register/Output Set ......17-54

Non-sort mode .............9-14, 9-24

Normal ....................................12-5

Number of Tabs ...................12-23

O

Offset ......................................14-4

OHP ........................................12-6

OHP Interleave .......................8-26

On - APS/AMS Only .............17-29

Operation Prohibit Set ..........17-26

Option Specifications .............22-6

Orig. Glass Small Size ..........17-35

Orig./Out Bind Direction Set

16-37Original Binding Direction ....16-37

Original Direction ......................6-7

Original Glass AMS ..............16-37

Original Glass APS ...............16-37

Original Glass SDF .............17-122

Original Information ..................3-9

Original Scan Area Setting ...17-29

Original Setting .........................6-7

Original Setting key ..................5-3

Original Size Search .............17-35

Output Application key .............5-4

Output History ..........................7-6

Output indicator .......................5-4

Output Order ..........................14-4

Output to the Primary (Main)Tray ........................................9-14

Output to the Secondary (Sub)Tray (Finisher) .........................9-15

Output to the Secondary (Sub)Tray (LS-501/502) ...................9-24

Output to the Stacker .............9-24

Output Tray ............................14-4

Output Tray key ........................9-8

Output with Cover Sheet ........9-33

Overlay ...................................8-77

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


Appendix 23


Overlay Memory .....................8-80

P

Page No. Position (Booklet) 17-113

Page Numbering ....................8-66

Page Space Function .............8-62

PageScope Web

Connection .........................17-107

Paper indicator .........................4-3

Paper Information ....................3-3

Paper Length Adjustment ....13-55

Paper Misfeed ........................20-8

Paper Presetting

....................6-48Paper Presetting key ................5-4

Paper removal button ..2-14, 4-17

Paper Set .............................12-11

Paper Set key ...........................2-8

Paper Setting .........................12-3

Paper Size ................................3-7

Paper size ..................12-3, 12-16

Paper Tray Setting .................6-42

Paper type ..................12-4, 16-18

Paper Weight ...........................3-3

Paper Width

Adjustment ...............13-27, 13-53

Passive function ...................17-82

Password Input Timing ........17-38

PCL Setting ......14-5, 14-9, 14-12

PDL ........................................14-4

Photo ....................................16-21

Photo mode ...........................6-26

Photo Mode Density Setting 16-25

Please Call Service Message .20-3

PM icon ..................................21-7

Positioning Original on Original

Glass ......................................5-16

Positioning Originals ..............5-13

Positioning Originals in ADF ..5-13

Post inserter .......................... 9-33

Power LED ............................... 2-7

Power OFF/ON Screen ........ 20-14

Power Save key ....................... 2-7

Power Save LED

............ 2-7,

2-20Power Save Setting ............... 17-6

Present time .......................... 17-9

Preset density ........................ 6-24

Preset Zoom .............. 6-31, 16-29

Preventive Maintenance

(PM) ....................................... 21-7

Primary (Main) tray ................ 2-13

Print Number ......................... 14-4

Printer Centring Adjustment 13-22

Printer Drum Clock Adjustment

<SIDE1> ................................ 13-4

Printer Drum Clock Adjustment

<SIDE2> ................................ 13-7

Printer Horizontal Adjustment<SIDE1> ................................ 13-9

Printer Horizontal Adjustment<SIDE2> .............................. 13-11

Printer Prohibit Timer .......... 16-20

Printer Restart Timing Adjustment<SIDE1> .............................. 13-13

Printer Restart Timing Adjustment<SIDE2> .............................. 13-16

Printer Setting ........................ 14-6

Program Job

.......................... 8-38Proof Copy key ........................ 2-6

Proof Copying ....................... 10-3

Proxy server ........................ 17-82

PS Setting ........ 14-6, 14-9, 14-13

PSWC ................................ 17-107

Punch .................................... 14-4

Punch Dust indicator ............. 4-15

Punch key ................................ 5-4

Punch mode .......................... 9-27

Punching File Holes in Copies 9-27

8/15/2019 bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf


23 Appendix

R

Recalling PreviousJob Settings .........................10-17

Recalling Stored

Job Settings

.........................10-15Reduce&Shift ......................... 8-63

Register ................................12-30

Register Type/Weight ..........12-11

Regulation Notices .................. 1-9

Removing Finished Sets from

Stacker ...................................4-17

Repeat

Auto/ Repeat Mode

..........8-49Vert./Horiz. Mode ............. 8-46

Scanner message .....................2-9

Scanner Restart

Timing Adjustment ...............13-18

Scanner Setting ....................16-41

SDF Auto Setting

................17-123Secondary (Sub) tray ..............2-13

Section Authentication .........17-38

Section Distribute Number ...17-38

Section Management Setting 17-41

Section Name Input .............17-38

Security Setting ..................17-126

Security Strengthen mode .17-136

Select Printer Setting ...........14-16

Select tray when APS cancel 16-37

Date post:	05-Jul-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	mohammedsayd2014
View:	215 times
Download:	0 times

bizhub_pro_1050 (1).pdf

Documents